JP2018143607A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of deriving a further impressive performance.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes: main control means producing a special game state capable of executing a special game, when a win/losing lottery is won; special display means executing a variation display teaching a result of the win/losing lottery; sub control means capable of executing control on the basis of information from the main control means; and performance display means controlled by the sub control means. The performance display mens executes a performance variation display corresponding to the variation display of the special display means and executes an intra-special-game-state performance display corresponding to the special game state. A special teaching related display relates to a prescribed performance display derived in the performance variation display of the performance display means that has been executed corresponding to the variation means of the special display means teaching the production of the special game state. The special teaching related display is derived at least one of timing when notifying of start of a special game state out of the intra-special-game-state performance display, and timing when starting the special game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed on the variable display means (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, various effects are derived as the variable display and the special game state progress.

JP 2006-271480 A

  By the way, the effects that are derived along with the progress of the change display and the special game state are one-shot, and when they are flashy, the impression tends to be thin. In particular, in recent years, the effects of gaming machines have become flashy, and there is a need to be able to leave an impression of gaming machines individually.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of deriving a more impressive performance.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player can be performed is determined whether or not to generate a special game state. Main control means for generating a special gaming state;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
Production display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
In the effect display means, in the gaming machine in which the effect change display is performed corresponding to the change display of the identification information of the special display means, and the effect display during the special game state is performed corresponding to the special game state,
A special teaching related display related to a predetermined effect display derived from the effect variation display of the effect display means performed in response to the variation display of the special display means that taught the occurrence of the special gaming state is the special display It is characterized in that it is derived at least one of the timing for notifying the start of the special game state and the timing for starting the special game among the effect display during the game state.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a rotary gaming machine.

  According to the present invention, a more impressive presentation can be derived.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a residual sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous change count process. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (at the time of a normal game state) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (at the time of a big hit state) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a normal and time reduction mode pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a probability change mode pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scene update process. It is a time chart of the fluctuation | variation display (at the time of normal mode and time reduction mode) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a time chart of the fluctuation | variation display (at the time of probability variation mode) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence (combination determination table) of a moving image pattern and the value of a combination determination counter. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) combination storage area and (b) round schedule storage area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a NG number flag. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit moving image setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit animation separate start process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit animation separate start process. It is a time chart of the big hit state (at the time of 15RS) in a decoration design display device. It is a time chart of the jackpot state (at the time of 8RS) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is sectional drawing of a production | presentation handle. It is sectional drawing of a production | presentation handle.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 does not show game members (nails, accessories, etc.) disposed on the surface of the game board 30 and a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14 as the front frame.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, you may comprise the front frame 14 so that it may be supported by the outer frame 11 so that opening is possible directly rather than via the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape similar to the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the lower payout outlet 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 as operating means (launching operation means) projecting toward the front side. Note that the handle 18 is provided with a rotary operation body 18a as an operation unit provided so as to be rotatable, and touch as a touch detection means capable of detecting that the handle 18 is touched by a human hand at a position not shown. A variable resistor is provided as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the sensor or the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b as stop operation means that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18b is pressed, even if the handle 18 is gripped, the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an upper plate 19 that can store game balls paid out from the upper payout outlet 17 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 through the lower plate communication passage 71 and the lower payout outlet 16 described later.

  A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. In a gaming hall or the like, if the lending switch 121 is operated in a state where a gaming card with a balance is inserted (inserted) into the CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, the operation depends on the operation. The lending balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the CR unit. Also, the balance display unit 124 displays how much of the card is inserted in the CR unit.

  Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to protrude and retract from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 and is always urged to a side protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 by an urging means (not shown). When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 are guided to the lower plate 15. . That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, an effect button 125 as an effect operation means, a cross button 126, and a specific effect button 127 as a specific operation means are provided. The effect button 125 and the specific effect button 127 have built-in LEDs, and by pressing the effect button 125, the cross button 126, and the specific effect button 127, the decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later, etc. Corresponding effects are performed or the contents of the effects are changed.

  Further, an effect handle 401 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15 as tactile transmission means that protrudes toward the front side. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the effect handle 401 is slidable in the front-rear direction adjacent to the first slide member 402 provided to be slidable in the front-rear direction and the right side of the first slide member 402. The second slide member 403 provided, the support plate 404 provided adjacent to the right side of the second slide member 403, the first slide member 402, and the drive enabling the second slide member 403 to be displaced respectively. A mechanism 405, a first slide member 402, a second slide member 403, and a soft cover made of a soft resin (such as an olefin-based elastomer) that collectively cover the support plate 404 are provided.

  The first slide member 402 is configured to be displaceable between a reference position where the front end is substantially the same position as the front end of the support plate 404 and a retracted position displaced rearward from the reference position in the front-rear direction. Yes. The second slide member 403 is configured to be displaceable between a reference position where the front end portion is substantially the same position as the front end portion of the support plate 404 in the front-rear direction and a protruding position displaced forward from the reference position. Yes.

  The second slide member 403 includes a base piece 407 supported by the drive mechanism 405 and a tip piece 408 that is rotatably connected to the front end portion of the base piece 407 with the vertical direction as the axial direction. ing. When the first slide member 402 and the second slide member are at the reference position, the tip piece 408 is supported by the first slide member 402 and the support plate 404 and extends on the extension line of the base piece 407. On the other hand, when the second slide member 403 is displaced to the protruding position and the first slide member 402 is displaced to the retracted position, the tip piece 408 is guided by the cover member 406 and extended in a posture slightly inclined to the left side. It comes to exist.

  Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the first slide member 402, the second slide member 403, and the support plate 404 have an axis extending in the left-right direction behind the front surface of the front frame 14, an axis extending in the vertical direction, It is configured to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The drive mechanism 405 of the effect handle 401 is electrically connected to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later, and is driven and controlled according to the effect and the like.

  In addition, the production handle 401 of the present embodiment is configured such that a bag-like dedicated part 411 made of rubber (such as sponge rubber) can be attached so as to cover the cover member 406. The dedicated parts 411 have multiple variations in material, paint (color and design), surface shape, etc. For example, a player purchases it from a gaming machine manufacturer and brings it to the game hall, and directs the production handle. It may be attached to 401, or may be lent out in a game hall.

  A holding frame 412 for holding the opening shape is embedded in the opening edge of the dedicated part 411. Furthermore, the engaging part 413 is provided with respect to a part of opening edge of the exclusive part 411 (part arrange | positioned on the right side in the attachment state to the effect handle 401).

  In addition, the effect handle 401 is adjacent to the right side of the cover member 406, an engaged portion 414 that can be engaged with the engaging portion 413, and an engaging portion that is engaged with the engaged portion 414. An attachment detection means (not shown) (infrared sensor, optical sensor, switch, etc.) capable of detecting 413 and an engaged position between the engaged portion 413 and the engaged portion 414 are provided above the engaged portion 414. A release button 416 (see FIG. 1) that can be released with one touch and a mounting lamp 417 (see FIG. 1) that is built in the release button 416 and emits light when the engagement portion 413 is detected by the mounting detection means are provided. It has been. The detection signal of the attachment detection means is input to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 performs lighting control of the attachment lamp 417 according to the detection signal of the attachment detection means.

  Even if the dedicated part 411 is not attached to the effect handle 401, it is possible to enjoy the effect by the effect handle 401 described later. Further, the cover member 406 is formed with a groove portion extending in the front-rear direction, and when the dedicated part 411 is attached, the air between the dedicated part 411 and the cover member 406 is configured to escape to the outside through the groove portion. It is good to be. Further, when the return switch 122 is operated in a state where the detection by the attachment detection means is being performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to derive a display indicating that the dedicated part 411 is attached. (It is also possible to make settings that are not derived). In the present embodiment, the production handle 401 constitutes a part mounting part.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game while the light emission mode is changed and controlled according to a change in the gaming state. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. Note that a number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame 14.

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 30 is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39. Yes. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning device 31, a first variable winning device 32a (first variable entering device) as a variable entering device, and a second variable winning device 32b (second variable entering device). A first start winning device 33a (first start entering device), a second start winning device 33b (second start entering device), a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and the like are disposed as a ball entering means. Has been. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) the various winning devices such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the start winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or lower A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

  In the present embodiment, 3 balls are entered when the start winning devices 33a and 33b are entered, 10 balls are entered when the general winning device 31 is entered, and the variable winning device 32 is entered. If there is, 15 game balls are paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 where the game ball only passes through the game area (not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. In addition, the first start winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that game balls moving in the game area can always enter or pass, whereas The two-start winning device 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are configured to change between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it cannot enter.

  As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b include a first condition winning detection switch 224a serving as a start condition detecting means and a condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. A second start winning switch 224b is provided. If a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state as a special gaming state in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are opened In addition, a lottery or the like is performed, and variable display is performed on special display devices 43a and 43b and a decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later. And, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state will be given.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area. A game ball that has not won a prize in various winning devices such as the general winning device 31 or the like is provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area. The game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails (game nails) in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate, and various members (servants) such as a windmill. ing.

  A variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. A pair of left and right entrances 151 are provided in the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game balls that enter the center frame 47 through the entrances 151 are the left and right side parts of the decorative symbol display device 42. Is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 through a warp flow path 152 extending vertically along the line. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . In addition, the pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area directly above the first start winning device 33a, and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 will be described later with a relatively high probability. The first start winning device 33a is entered.

  A first start winning device 33a is disposed below the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening (start winning port) through which a game ball can always win is opened. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with a configuration (such as an opening / closing member) that changes the ease with which a game ball can enter the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is provided at a lower right position of the first start winning device 33a. The first variable prize-winning device 32a has a big prize opening leading to the back of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the big prize opening, a big prize opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a game that has entered the big prize opening. And a count switch 223a for detecting a ball. The first variable winning device 32a (large winning port) is switched between a closed state and an opened state by driving and controlling the large winning port solenoid and opening and closing the shutter.

  The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which the game ball can win in the big hit state. The first prize winning shutter of the first variable prize winning device 32a of the present embodiment is pivotally supported by the lower edge of the big prize shutter so as to be rotatable along the lower edge of the big prize opening. In the closed state of the device 32a, the big winning shutter extends vertically and closes the big winning opening, so that the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first variable winning device 32a, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), and has flowed down to the front of the big winning opening. A game ball is received on the back surface (upper surface) of the big prize shutter and guided to the big prize opening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is entered into the first start winning device 32a by arrangement of game nails or the like provided in the game area, the game ball is placed in the variable display device unit in the game area. It is necessary to pass (left-handed) the area 35 located on the left side of 35 (left-handed area), and even if it passes through the area (right-handed area) located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 (right-handed). Even so, the first start winning device 32a cannot be entered. On the other hand, in order to enter the game ball into the first variable winning device 32a, it is necessary to pass the game ball to the right side region, and even if it passes through the left side region, the first variable winning device 32a. Is almost impossible to enter.

  In the lower portion of the right side region, a second start winning device 33b is provided at an upper right position of the first variable winning device 32a. The second start winning device 33b includes a pair of blade members 37 provided so as to be rotatable and displaceable adjacent to the left and right sides of a winning opening (start winning port) through which a game ball can enter. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip of the pair of blade members 37 and the game nail, and the second start The winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball. On the other hand, by changing the blade member 37 to the open position that opens outward, the second starting prize-winning device 33b secures a gap through which the game ball passes between the blade member 37 and the game nail, and enters the game ball. Is allowed, and the game ball moving to the side of the second start winning device 33b is guided to the start winning port of the second start winning device 33b by the blade member 37 (the game ball is easy to enter). Opened.

  In the upper part of the right side region, a through gate 34 through which game balls flowing down the game region can pass one by one is provided above the second start winning device 33c. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34. In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 is not provided in the right side region.

  In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball support support lottery (open lottery) for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is opened is performed, and a normal symbol display device 41 is also provided. The variation display for teaching the result of the pitching support lottery is performed. If the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  In the present embodiment, there are a “low probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the winning lottery and a “high probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the winning lottery. Furthermore, the “high pitched state” as the second pitched state in which the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is released relatively frequently and the game ball can easily enter the second start winning device 33c, There is a “low entry state” as the first entry state in which the time zone during which the blade member 37 is opened is reduced as compared to the high entry state. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low pitching state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high pitching state are referred to as “time shortening mode (or short time mode)”. In addition, a state in which the ball is in a high pitch state is referred to as “probability change mode”.

  Note that the high pitched state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low pitched state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( A state in which the specified time) is longer than that in the low entry state, and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is released per winning of the winning support lottery is larger than that in the low entering state, (5) the winning probability of the winning support lottery is lower than in the low entering state. And so on. The high pitched-in state in the present embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), (4), and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “highly-entered state”. . As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, and the number of times that the winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode is continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode and the probability change mode are the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the jackpot state does not occur. Is completed when the predetermined number of times is set in advance (100 times in this example), and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In the lower right part of the center frame 47, a second variable winning device 32b is provided at a position above the second start winning device 33b and below the through gate 34. The second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment includes a specific area 141 in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an opening / closing member 143 that opens and closes a ball entry opening 142 serving as an entrance to the specific area 141, A solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 143 is provided, and the solenoid is driven and controlled to open and close the opening and closing member 143, thereby switching the second variable winning device 32b between a closed state and an open state. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which a game ball can enter in the big hit state.

  Note that the opening / closing member 143 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported around a shaft portion (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the ball opening portion 142, and the second variable winning device 32b is closed. In the state, the opening / closing member 143 extends up and down to close the entrance opening 142. On the other hand, in the open state of the second variable winning device 32b, the opening / closing member 143 opens to the right (the upper surface is inclined slightly upward toward the right), and has flowed down to the right of the second variable winning device 32b. The game ball is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the opening / closing member 143 and guided to the entrance opening 142.

  Furthermore, the second variable winning device 32b has a count-up switch 226 that can detect all the game balls that have entered the specific area 141, and a game that has entered the specific area 141 and has been detected by the count-in count switch 226. A specific entry portion 145 and a non-specific entry portion 146 that can enter a ball, a specific entry detection switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the specific entry portion 145, and a non-specific entry portion 146 A non-specific entry detection switch 223c that detects a game ball that entered the game, and a sorting device that guides the game ball detected by the entry count switch 226 to one of the specific entry part 145 or the non-specific entry part 146 149.

  The sorter 149 includes a slide bar 149a that is displaced to a closed position that restricts entry into the specific entry portion 145 and an open position that allows entry into the specific entry portion 145, and a slide bar at predetermined intervals. And a solenoid (not shown) that displaces 149a to the open position. If the slide ball 149a is in the open position when the game ball that has entered the specific area 141 reaches the sorting device 149, the game ball enters the specific ball portion 145 and the slide bar 149a is in the closed position. In this case, the game ball enters the non-specific ball entry portion 146.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b enters the specific ball portion 145, the probability variation mode is given.

  In addition, as the jackpot type of the present embodiment, 15 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15RS”), 8 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “8RS”), and 8 round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “8RN”). ) Regarding “15RS”, the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b has eight pieces. A game ball enters a round and is repeated 15 times before the jackpot state ends. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a is opened in the first to seventh rounds and the ninth to fifteenth rounds, and the second variable winning device 32b is opened in the eighth round. It has become. That is, with respect to “15RS”, in the eighth round, the game ball enters the specific ball entry unit 145 by entering the second variable winning device 32b, and the “15RS” After the jackpot state ends, the “probability change mode” is given.

  Regarding “8RS”, the first to seventh rounds are one round when the first variable prize-winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds or eight game balls enter the first variable prize-winning device 32a. In the eighth round, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b as one round. In other words, for “8RS”, the game ball can be made to enter the specific entry portion 145 of the second variable prize-winning device 32b in the eighth round, and the “probability change mode” is given after the end of the big hit state. It has become.

  Regarding “8RN”, the first to seventh rounds are one round that the first variable winning device 32a is released for 30 seconds or eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a. In the eighth round, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.1 second, or eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b as one round. That is, the “eighth round” of “8RN” is a big hit round in which no game balls can be expected to enter the second variable prize-winning device 32b and no increase in game balls can be expected. For this reason, in the big hit state of “8RN”, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the specific pitching unit 145, and after the big hit state ends, the “time reduction mode” is given.

  In addition to the “15RS” and “8RS” rounds other than the eighth round, even if the game ball enters the specific area 141 of the second variable prize-winning device 32b, the slide bar 149a of the distribution device 149 is in the closed position. Thus, it does not enter the specific ball entry portion 145 (the timing at which the game ball that has entered when the opening / closing member 143 is opened does not match the timing at which the slide bar 149a is opened). It is good also as a simple structure.

  In addition, a special display adjacent to the upper right part of the substantially elliptical gaming area is displayed with a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / losing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. First display device 43a as a means and second display device as a special display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of a lottery determination performed when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b When there is a game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the variable display on the special display device 43b and the special display devices 43a and 43b, the fact that the variable display corresponding to the pitch has been stored on hold. The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b as the hold display means to be shown, and a change for teaching the result of the entrance support lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 The normal symbol display device 41 as a normal display means for performing display, and when a game ball passes to the through gate 34 during the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display corresponding to the passage is suspended. A normal hold display device 44 indicating that it is stored is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 will be described later. Display control is directly performed by a main control device 261 as main control means.

  The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special figure lamps). Then, the first special display device 43a performs switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a.

  The second special display device 43b includes four LEDs (second special figure lamps). The second special display device 43b performs switching display (variable display) of the second special figure lamp when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery determination. That is, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (a combination of the special figure lamps that are lit) is associated with the various results of the winning / failing lottery. As a result, that is, “big hit” or “off” is definitely displayed.

  Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, “15RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” It is also taught if there is. Further, there are a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b for teaching various types of jackpots and disagreement, and any one of them is selected, and the stop display is selected. Is done.

  As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, in the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, “15RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” are won. In the winning lottery that is triggered by the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b, there is a possibility of winning “15RS” and “8RS”, and winning “8RN” There is no possibility to do that.

  In addition, the stop display in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and is configured so that the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the variable interval). Has been. Further, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, if the next variable display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b. The special display device 43b is configured to be switched from a lighting mode indicating a result of the lottery determination to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is performed. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the lighting mode which shows the result of a success / failure lottery is maintained as it is.

  Each of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b includes two LEDs (a first hold lamp and a second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, the variable display based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”) can be held and stored up to four times. Furthermore, the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b is also configured to be able to hold and hold up to four times.

  For example, when the first variation display is held for one time, the first hold lamp on the left side (inside the game area) is lit, and when the first variation display is held twice. When the left and right first hold lamps are lit and the first fluctuation display is held for three times, the left first hold lamp blinks and the right first hold lamp lights and the first fluctuation When the display is held four times, the left and right first hold lamps flash. When a new game ball wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the suspended variation display is basically digested in the suspended order. However, when both the first variation display and the second variation display are suspended, the second variation display is performed. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b is not fully digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first starting winning device 33a is performed. It has no configuration. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second holding lamp is lit, the first variation display is postponed, First, the second variation display is performed.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (common figure lamps). The normal symbol display device 41 is configured such that, for example, the right-side (game area outer periphery side) general-purpose lamp blinks and is displayed (variably displayed) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Yes. Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time by the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (a combination of the lit general-purpose lamps) and the various results of the entrance support lottery are associated with each other, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped, The result of the draw support lottery is displayed deterministically. For example, “winning” is indicated by lighting both the left and right common lamps, and “off” is indicated by lighting only the left common lamp.

  The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 41, which is displayed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34, is configured to be able to hold and hold the variable display of up to four times. For example, when the fluctuation display on the normal symbol display device 41 is held once, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inside the game area) is lit, and when held twice, the normal left and right When the hold lamp lights up and is held three times, the left normal hold lamp blinks, and the right normal hold lamp lights and when it is held four times, the left and right normal hold lamps Flashes. In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also held.

  In addition, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 which is constituted by a liquid crystal display device and serves as an effect display means capable of displaying decorative symbols. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variably display decorative symbols as effects in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decoration symbol in the decoration symbol display device 42 is also referred to as “effect variation display”. Furthermore, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 uses the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, upper, middle, and lower three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and a plurality of types of decorations are provided in each symbol display area. Symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each symbol display region (for example, upper symbol display region → lower symbol display region → middle symbol display) The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of the areas). For example, when the occurrence of the big hit state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43a, 43b, and the decorative symbol is given on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are stopped and displayed so that the same decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is Be started.

  In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The Rukoto. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of a reach condition does not necessarily result in a big hit, but may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is made (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), a big hit state is given. Further, in the normal mode, when the number pattern of the decorative design is an odd number of double eyes, “15RS” or “8RS” occurs, and when the number pattern of the decoration pattern is an even number of double eyes, “15RS”, “ If either “8RS” or “8RN” occurs, and “7” is a doublet, “15RS” is generated. Furthermore, in the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode, when the number pattern of the decorative design is an odd number of doubles, “15RS” or “8RS” occurs (highly likely to be “15RS”). ) In the case of an even-numbered doublet, “15RS” or “8RS” occurs (highly likely to be “8RS”), and in the case of a “7” doublet, “15RS” Is generated.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of performance stages (with different backgrounds, etc.) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects that teach or suggest the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, a “probability stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the probability change mode, a “normal stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the normal mode, and a “retraction” which is staying in the time reduction mode. "Stage". That is, when “15RS” and “8RS” are won, the process proceeds to the “probability change stage” after the jackpot state ends. In addition, when “8RN” is won, after the jackpot state ends, the process proceeds to the “retraction stage”. Further, when the variation display is performed 100 times in the probability variation stage and the pull back stage, the process proceeds to the “normal stage”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is a decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 42, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held is displayed at the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Yes.

  At the lower part of the left side area, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area. The general winning device 31 protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a spherical passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the lower discharge outlet 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the gap in the spherical passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the dropped game ball to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  Further, a launch ball passage 74 is provided for communicating between the upper plate 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guiding the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower plate communication passage 71 is formed in the firing ball passage 74 (or a downstream portion of the upper plate 19), and a first shutter that opens and closes the communication hole (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The first shutter is always urged toward a closed position that closes the communication hole by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is configured to be interlocked with the ball removal button 123 and to be displaced to an open position where the communication hole is opened when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is formed with a discharge port 15 a through which the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A second shutter 15b that opens and closes is provided. The second shutter 15b is always urged toward the closed position that closes the discharge port 15a by urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to be interlocked with the ball release lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and when the ball release lever 25 is pressed (to the left side). Is configured to be displaced to an open position for opening the discharge port 15a.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. Yes. When the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the lower plate communication path 71 on the inlet side. The inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the inlets and the discharge passages 67 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance when the front frame 14 is closed. A game ball can pass through the gap. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used. Is controlled. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the back of the frame cover 213 It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the start winning devices 33a and 33b, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls won in various winning devices. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects game balls that have entered the various winning devices corresponding to various winning devices such as the general winning device 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and a count switch 223a is provided in the first variable winning device 32a. The device 32b is provided with a ball count switch 226, a specific ball detection switch 223b, and a non-specific ball detection switch 223c. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a general prize switch 221, a count switch 223a, a ball count switch 226, a specific ball detection switch 223b, a non-specific ball detection switch 223c, and a through gate switch. A first board surface relay board is provided which is electrically connected to 225 via a cable connector. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 through a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

  The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, on the back surface of the game board 30, a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening of the variable winning apparatuses 32 a and 32 b and a blade member 37 of the second start winning apparatus 33 b are opened and closed. A solenoid or the like is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second panel surface relay board (not shown) for relaying these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (start of variation display, start of jackpot state, start of probability variation mode, continuation of probability variation mode, etc.), an opening detection switch described later Terminals for outputting information on opening of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by 91 and 92, information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error are outputted. And a terminal for outputting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout control device 311.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356 in the vertical direction. Has been. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls won in each winning device such as the general winning device 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won any winning device is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply / emission control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are stacked in the front-rear direction. It has been. The power / fire control device 310 includes a fire control circuit 312 and a power circuit 313, and is housed in the board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (power supply / launch control device 310). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that the unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. Yes.

  In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball jam (return to the normal state).

  Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame 14. A key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inner frame is rotated by one. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14 and is turned off. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control device 261 as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data that will be backed up will be backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43 a and 43 b and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223a, a specific winning detection switch 223b, a non-specific winning detection switch 223c, and a starting winning switch 224a. , 224b, through gate switch 225, entrance count switch 226 and other detection switches, hold display devices 46a and 46b, normal hold display device 44 and other information display devices, power supply / launch control device 310, payout control device 311 Various electrical components such as various substrates such as the sub-control device 262, solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and motors for opening and closing the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) are connected. Yes. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Furthermore, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the specific effect button 127, the effect handle 401, the annular illumination part 102, the error display lamp 104, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is taught that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 have won the jackpot, and the sub control device 262 is taught. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the special symbol variation display in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and data can be held (backed up), and all the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is stored. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 515, a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a power / fire control device 310 (fire control circuit 312), a payout device 358, a CR unit connection board 314, and the like are connected.

  The CR unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (lending switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The lending unit is electrically connected to the payout control device 311. Information relating to a ball lending operation unit by a player or a ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and a game value balance is stored in a card which is a recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type or a stick type.

  Also, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312 of the power source / launch control device 310. (For example, every 2 msec).

  The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60. The firing control circuit 312 is electrically connected to the handle 18, the payout control device 311, and the main control device 261. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured so that the dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation operation body 18a) is touched from the handle 18 and the player touches the handle 18. The touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is operating and the firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected from the payout control device 311.

  The firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input. On condition that the status signal is input, the firing permission signal and the ball feed signal are output to the firing control circuit 312. Main controller 261 is configured to output a firing permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a state where a firing state signal is input.

  The launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feed device 63 and send the game ball to the launch position when a ball feed signal is input. It should be noted that the ball feeding device 63 is provided in the ball feeding device 63 and in a state in which it is detected that the game ball already exists at the firing position by a preparation ball detection sensor capable of detecting whether or not the game ball is present at the firing position. Is not driven (the game ball is not sent to the launch position even when the ball feed signal is received).

  Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 drives the firing device 60 (launch solenoid) on condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and a launch permission signal are input. It is configured to let you. As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with strength based on the dial position signal.

  The power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Generate internal command for VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success / failure random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for success / failure lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the failure random number counter C1, a first And the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the second start winning device 33b used to determine the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42). The normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the entrance support lottery of whether or not to be used is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach pattern lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores special fluctuation holding areas as holding storage means for storing the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the normal value storing the values of the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes four holding areas (holding first to fourth holding areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  Further, the special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area, a second special variable reserved area, and one execution area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Yes. In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first start winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the second start winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the variation display (first variation display and second variation display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b can be suspended four times each.

  More specifically, each success / failure random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 631, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 631) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the success / failure random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success / failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the success / failure random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 631), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

  In this embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probability variation mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success / failure determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first winning / failing determination table storing “7, 307” as a jackpot value and a second winning / failing determination table storing “8-16, 308-316” as a jackpot value.

  For example, the type determination counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), the type determination counter C2 returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. The ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and The jackpot type corresponding to which the second start winning device 33b is entered is the same in the jackpot type distribution, so there is one type determination table). Then, when the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, the type of jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the decided type is given The Rukoto.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the reach selection state is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and after the reach state is generated with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The final stop symbol after the stop is to draw lots of “reach other than front / rear off” that stops before and after the reach symbol and “complete out” that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, there is one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach pattern in the ROM 502. For example, a game ball to the first start winning device 33a is stored in the ROM 502. A first reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach pattern (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired by entering the ball and a game ball to the second start winning device 33b It is good also as providing the 2nd reach determination table referred when determining the reach pattern (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation | variation selection counter C3 acquired by the time of the entrance of this.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 255, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 255), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 31, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 31), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In addition, the variation display variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with a rough variation pattern (reach pattern such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) of variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42. If the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also determined (the variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 that just fits in the variation display variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b). Is selected). For example, the variation time is determined based on the variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the variation type counter CS2 (for example, in the case of corresponding to the big hit of 15RS, It may be configured to determine any one of the stop display modes corresponding to the jackpot).

  The counter used for determining the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate for each model. For example, it is possible to determine the reach pattern of the decorative symbol only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the reach pattern of the decorative symbol by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the sizes of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and it is desirable that they are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 232, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 232) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random numbers to be won in the low entry state is 31, and the range is “1 to 31”. On the other hand, the number of random number values to be won in the high pitching state is 232, and the range is “1 to 232”. In other words, in this embodiment, the ROM 502 support determination table that is referred to in the low support entry lottery support lottery and the high input that is referred to in the high support pitch entry support lottery. A ball support determination table is provided. Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a variable display for a predetermined time, and then (the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately. After that, it is stopped and displayed in a mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to winning, and the second start winning device 33b is released in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ) Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning in the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b is executed. In step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. To do. In subsequent step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing a process such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 is performed. Thereafter, in step S307, the remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring the game ball in the second variable winning device 32b is performed, and then the timer interrupt process is temporarily ended.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na that counts the number of first variable display holds triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a, and a second triggered by winning the second start winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the variable display is provided. It is also possible to provide a hold total counter that counts the total number of variable displays that are held (the total number of hold of the first change display and the hold number of the second change display).

  In addition, the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area include a random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1, a winning random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variable selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

  Further, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, the first variation display based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a or the second variation display based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b is performed. A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating whether or not is stored. Hereinafter, “the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area” is also referred to as “the first variation flag is turned on”, and “the second variation display is performed in the variation storage area”. The information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second variation flag is set to ON”.

  First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S511. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right pair of second holding lamps are turned off, the left second holding lamp is turned on, the left second holding lamp is turned on, and the right second holding lamp is turned off. If left, both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the right side second hold lamp is lit and the left side second hold lamp is lit. When the second hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the second hold lamp on the right side is in a lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right second hold lamps is performed.

  After step S504, in step S505, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 (a result random number counter buffer, a type determination counter buffer, and Each value stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (a random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) among the vacant holding areas of the second special variable holding area. To do. After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A type determination process is performed to determine the type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the deviation is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the success / failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either “7” or “307” which is the value stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified. However, in actuality, whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7” is determined, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “307”, and if an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process ends after turning on the first success / failure flag in step S5102. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second success / failure determination table “8 to 16”. , 308 to 316 ”. Incidentally, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” is a value that is a big hit only in a high probability state (probability variation mode). In the determination process, in practice, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is “out” even in a high probability state, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (the possibility of a jackpot state occurring), in step S5302, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0 to 11” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5303, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the process is terminated after the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5304.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first hit / no-go flag is set in the hit / no-go determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if both the low probability state and the high probability state are jackpots (the jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit state does not occur at least in a low probability state (there is a possibility of losing), a reach determination table is referred to in step S5402, and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5404 corresponds to “reach other than forward / backward deviation”. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the non-front / rear flag is turned on in step S5405, and then the process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the change display is “completely out” without passing through the reach state, this processing is ended as it is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 subsequent to step S508, a variation time determination process for determining the second variation time of the second variation display is performed. That is, the variation time is grasped based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 with reference to the variation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode is highly likely). Further, the grasped variation time is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the second special variation reserved area (the value of the first variation type counter CS1 of the reserved area is not erased).

  In step S510 subsequent to step S509, a starting command setting process is performed. The advance command includes variation information (information used to determine the contents of variation display) indicating the results of the success / failure determination processing, the type determination processing, the reach determination processing, and the variation time determination processing, and the first command. Information indicating whether the starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is the variation information triggered by entering the ball is included, and in the next external output process (see step S201), the sub control device 262 receives the information. Is output.

  After the process of step S510, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S511, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminate | determines by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S511, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S512, the value of the first holding counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S512, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S514, an addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variation display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right pair of first holding lamps are in the off state, the left first holding lamp is turned on, the left first holding lamp is in the on state, and the right first holding lamp is in the off state. If left, both the left and right first hold lamps are lit. If both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left side first hold lamp is lit and the left side first hold lamp is lit. When the first hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in a lighting state, a process for blinking both the left and right first hold lamps is performed.

  After step S514, in step S515, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set to the vacant reservation areas (the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage) of the first special variable reservation area. Area, reach random number storage area). After step S515, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S516, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination process have already been described above.

  In the subsequent step S517, if it is determined in step S514 that the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is newly determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area. A first type determination process for determining the type is performed.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S517 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0-9” corresponding to “8RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the process ends after turning on the 8RS flag in step S5203.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value “10” corresponding to “15RS” in consideration of the type determination table. , 11 ". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the process ends after the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the process is terminated after the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5206. In the present embodiment, when winning the big hit state triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a, it is possible to expect to enter the specific entering portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b. When the jackpot state (15RS or 8RS) to which the state is granted is 60%, when winning the jackpot state triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b, A jackpot state (15RS or 8RS) to which a high probability state is assigned is assigned at 100%.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area A reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of the selection counter C3. Details of the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) have already been described above.

  In step S519 following step S518, a variation time determination process for determining the first variation time of the first variation display is performed. That is, the first variation time is grasped based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 with reference to the variation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (in this case, the normal mode is highly likely). Further, the grasped variation time is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the first special variation reserved area (the value of the first variation type counter CS1 of the reserved area is not erased).

  After step S519, in step S520, a starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the pass / fail determination process. The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area is provided for temporarily storing these counter values when the value of the random number counter C1 is acquired, and for the information stored in the temporary storage area, the determination process, the type determination process, and A configuration may be adopted in which after the reach determination process is executed, the information is stored in the holding area of the corresponding special variable holding area.

  Note that the process of extracting the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S515 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the function of extracting and storing the value of the random number counter C1 constitutes an information acquisition unit. Further, the process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S516 (steps S5101 and S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first success / failure determination process. The processing of storing (setting the correspondence flag) in steps S5102 and S5104 constitutes the result storing processing.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (step S305) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S604, addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed by one. That is, when both the left and right normal hold lamps are off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on, the left normal hold lamp is on, and the right normal hold lamp is off. Both left and right normal hold lamps are lit.If both left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the right side normal hold lamp is lit and the left side normal hold lamp blinks, and the left side normal hold lamp is flashed. If the lamp is blinking and the right normal hold lamp is lit, processing is performed to blink both the right and left normal hold lamps.

  After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to the success / failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  Next, the remaining sphere monitoring process (step S307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball monitoring flag indicating that the game ball is being monitored in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b based on the detection information of the winning count switch 226. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, in step S1303, 1 is added to the value of a winning counter that counts the number of game balls present in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b.

  After step S1303, or when a negative determination is made in step S1302, whether or not a game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit 145 based on the detection information of the specific ball detection switch 223b in step S1304. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not a specific entry flag indicating that a game ball has entered the specific entry unit 145 is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the specific entry flag is turned on in step S1306. Further, in step S1307, a specific entry command for instructing the sub-control device 262 to enter the specific entry unit 145 is set.

  After step S1307 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter in step S1308.

  In addition, after step S1308 or when a negative determination is made in step S1304, a game ball enters the non-specific entry portion 146 based on the detection information of the non-specific entry detection switch 223c in step S1309. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, 1 is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter in step S1310.

  After step S1310 or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, it is determined in step S1311 whether or not the value of the monitoring timer is “0”. The monitoring timer enters the second variable prize winning device 32b in the big hit round in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened when the jackpot round in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened is started. A value corresponding to a predetermined time with a margin is set with respect to the time required for the game ball to be discharged from the second variable winning device 32b. If a negative determination is made in step S1311, in step S1312, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, the remaining sphere monitoring flag is turned off in step S1314, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1313, error processing is performed in step S1314, and then this processing ends. The error processing is appropriately set for each model. For example, a signal notifying the ball clogging of the second variable winning device 32b may be output to the outside via the external terminal plate 240. An error occurrence state for notifying the occurrence of an error may be set so that the normal game state is not started. The entrance counter may also acquire a negative value, and in the case of a negative value, an error process corresponding to an illegal act may be performed.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply / launch control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol variation, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is used to cause the decoration symbol display device 42 to perform display (effect display) in accordance with the display (variable display of the special symbol) performed on the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. This command is output to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command or the like, based on the command, the variation mode of the decoration symbol display device 42 (the variation display of the decoration symbol that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery and the decoration The display control device 45 is instructed to display the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display).

  The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines a variation display effect pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and sound.

  Here, the variation types of decorative symbols will be described. “Normal reach” is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode even in various reach cases. For example, the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time) from which the normal reach is derived is “12 seconds” or “15 seconds” in the normal mode, “9 seconds” or “12 seconds” in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode. " Even in the normal mode, the first variation display that is started from the state where four first variation displays are held is also temporarily reduced, and the variation time of the first variation display is normal reach. For example, “9 seconds” or “12 seconds” is set.

  “Super Reach” is a reach in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the variation display from which super reach is derived is “25 seconds” or “30 seconds” in the normal mode, “22 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, or “27 Seconds ". Note that the variation display variation time when super reach occurs may be set to “25 seconds” or “30 seconds” in any game mode.

  “Premium reach” is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character having a pattern different from the super reach, etc. This is a reach pattern in which the player is expected to have a sense of expectation. The variation display from which the premium reach according to the present embodiment is derived has a longer variation time than the variation display from which the super reach is derived, and is the same length in both the high entry state and the low entry state ( For example, 60 seconds).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is “completely out” that does not reach any reach state is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode, and “6 seconds” in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) of the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern command and the variation time information. Stop display after the fluctuation time has elapsed. In other words, when “15RS” is won, the variable display is stopped with a combination of decorative symbols consisting of any one of the first to ninth (a combination of jackpot symbols), and when “8RS” is won. , 1-6, 8, 9 If the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols (combination of jackpot symbol) consisting of a flat eye, if the normal jackpot ("8RN") is won, The variable display is stopped and displayed by a combination of decorative symbols (a combination of jackpot symbols) made up of even numbers 4, 6, or 8.

  The combination of front / rear detachment symbols corresponds to “front / rear detachment reach” in which, after reach, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to “reach other than front / rear detachment” in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after reach occurs. The combination of completely missed symbols corresponds to “completely missed” in which even reach is not generated. As will be described in detail later, when receiving the variation pattern command, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In the main controller 261, one of a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols with rush, a combination of jackpot symbols with time-shortening, a combination of front and rear missed symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear misses, and a combination of completely missed symbols The symbol command may be determined, a symbol command for designating the symbol may be set, and output to the sub-control device 262 together with the variation pattern command.

  After step S201, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, and determination of jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the variable winning device 32 is performed. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S208, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Or not. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211 and step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (631 in this example).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the process after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of the power supply interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember.

  Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process in step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval set after the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the process ends after subtracting the value of the fluctuation interval timer in step S802. That is, for example, when the fluctuation interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and “249 (“ 250 ”in the case where step S802 is performed before step S801” is set) ”is set in the fluctuation interval timer. In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec and becomes “0” after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not a variable interval, in step S803, a hit status storage area to be described later is referred to in detail, and whether or not the current status is other than the big win status. Is determined.

  During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is released, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. Round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started after the final round.

  In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, any one of “1, 4, 5” in the opening period and the interval period, “2” is stored during the round period, and “3” is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the winning status storage area, and it is determined whether or not a big hit state is being established.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, in FIG. By looking at the setting status of the display flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performing variable display. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is being stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if neither the big hit state nor the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S805 to hold the second fluctuation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number is larger than “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S806. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is held and stored by the determination processing in step S805, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S807, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S807, in step S808, the second fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. In subsequent step S809, a subtraction display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right second hold lamps are blinking, the right second hold lamp is lit while the left second hold lamp is blinking, and the left second hold lamp is blinking. When the second hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left second hold lamp is turned on. If the second hold lamp on the right is turned off and the second hold lamp on the left is on and the second hold lamp on the right is off, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned off. To perform the process.

  After step S809, in step S810, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no second variation display is stored on hold, in step S811, the first variation triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a is triggered. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na for counting the number of hold of display is greater than zero.

  If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are in a variable standby state in which no variable display is performed. A standby display setting for deriving a corresponding display mode (for example, a mode in which only the first and second first special figure lamps or the second special figure lamps from the right in the lower row are lit) is performed. That is, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b according to the present embodiment are maintained after the suspension of the fluctuation for the fluctuation interval (in a manner indicating the result of the lottery). However, when the fluctuation interval ends (and the passage of a predetermined time may be used as a condition), the display mode is switched to indicate the fluctuation standby state. After step S812, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S813. In a succeeding step S814, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S814, in step S815, the first change flag of the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON. In the subsequent step S816, subtraction display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold of the first variable display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the left and right first hold lamps are blinking, the right first hold lamp is turned on while the left first hold lamp is blinking, and the left first hold lamp is blinking. If the first hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on. If both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left first hold lamp is turned on. The first hold lamp on the right side is turned off while the left is on. When the first hold lamp on the left side is lit and the first hold lamp on the right side is turned off, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned off. To perform the process.

  After step S816, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later, is referred to in detail to determine whether or not a high probability state (probability variation mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In this embodiment, the mode storage area stores any one of “11”, “12”, and “21”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” is the time. Corresponding to the shortening mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is obtained by determining whether or not “21” is stored in the mode storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is a high probability state (probability variation mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the appropriateness flags (see the appropriateness determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the high-probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is set, in step S903, whether or not the first success / failure flag is turned on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

  In a succeeding step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see the type determination process in FIG. 15) is set to ON, taking into account the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if “15RS”, a 15RS pattern setting process is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing fluctuation display for teaching the occurrence of “15RS”, and is based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Variation patterns of the display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display time, variation display stop mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42, variation display effect patterns of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ) Is set, and the variation pattern command is set based on the determination and various flags.

  The relationship between the numerical values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, the variation pattern, and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. That is, in the 15RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability change mode, time reduction mode, or first variation display On the basis of the determination result whether or not there are four holds), the variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. Then, the information including 15RS, the determined reach pattern and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information for grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. In addition, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 15RS is to be stopped, and is stored in the corresponding storage area. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if “8RS”, an 8RS pattern setting process is performed in step S908, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S907, an 8RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when a big win is not won in a high probability state, or when a negative decision is made in step S903, that is, when a big win is not won in a low probability state. In step S910, the execution area of the special variable suspension area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the front / rear flag (see the reach determination process in FIG. 16) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach”, the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, “reach other than front / rear out”, after performing reach pattern setting processing other than front / rear in step S913, the process proceeds to step S915.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, in the case of “completely out”, a deviation variation pattern setting process is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  In step S915, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is turned on. Thereby, it is shown that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) is established in the special display devices 43a and 43b. In the subsequent step S916, a special figure display timer setting process for measuring the variation time (remaining time for variation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43a and 43b, switching display (variation display) is started. The sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command starts variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the special display devices 43a and 43b. At the same time as the stop display, the decorative symbol change display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped. After step S916 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 is acquired and stored in the special variable hold area, the success / failure determination process in steps S506 and 516, and the variable display setting. In the process, the success / failure lottery is configured by the processing of step S901 to step S903 and the like for determining the success / failure based on the success / failure flag and the situation at that time. In addition, the second success / failure determination process is configured by the processes in steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes in steps S906, S908, S909, S911, S913, and S914.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 804, that is, when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 817, and a special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 12 seconds (12000 msec), “3000” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step S818 when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S818, in step S823, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S823, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S820. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type or loss set in the variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

  Further, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the sub-control device 262 to perform stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is ensured. However, the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, and therefore information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is added again. There is no need. In addition, the display is mainly the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for production).

  Subsequently, in step S822, the discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the hit state and the switching setting of the game mode is performed, and then this process ends.

  Here, the discrimination information setting process in step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, the execution area of the special variable suspension area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the jackpot confirmation flag is turned off in step S1002, and the jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot state is in effect is turned on in step S1003. Further, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON by taking into account the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if “15RS” is a big hit, in step S1005, the number of rounds executed during the big win state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is released) is determined. Set “15” in the round number counter.

  In the subsequent step S1006, “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1007, for example, a value “2000” corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for the control in the winning state (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32). In step S1008, “8” indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set to “8” for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. . The value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not there is a ball entering the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. When it is determined that there is a ball entering 32a, 32b, 1 is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes hit type information and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the win state. After step S1009, this process ends.

  It should be noted that the appearance of promotion of the type of jackpot that appears in the jackpot state (for example, when an even number of blue eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, “8RS” or “15RS” in the jackpot state immediately after Or, when the odd symbol other than “7 symbols” is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it is taught that “15RS” is won during the jackpot state immediately after It is also possible to carry out.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1004, “8” is set in the round number counter in step S1010. After step S1010, the process proceeds to step S1006 described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, a value corresponding to the fluctuation interval (for example, 1 second) is set in the fluctuation interval timer in step S1011. Note that, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol variation display is basically stopped at the timing of the variable display stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the special display devices 43a and 43b are displayed. Until the end of the variation interval (until the next variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is started), the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. When the fluctuation interval ends and the fluctuation display is stored on hold, the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 are started simultaneously. On the other hand, if the variable display is not held and stored even after the variable interval is over, the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 continues to be derived for a while, and then the display is switched to a display waiting for the game (demo screen display). . In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of even-numbered double eyes in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the combination of the decorative symbols may be converted into odd-numbered double dots in the variable interval period (derivation). In such a case, a re-lottery effect may be performed.

  After step S1011, in step S1012, whether “12” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode is selected. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1012, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, the duration of the time shortening mode given after the end of the normal jackpot jackpot state in step S1013 and the duration of the probability changing mode given after the end of the jackpot state of probability variation jackpot 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation counter. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state, the number of times of change display (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set to the change number counter, and the special display devices 43a and 43b. Each time the variable display of the (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1013.

  In a succeeding step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “0”. When a negative determination is made in step S1014, that is, after the end of the big hit state of “8RN”, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is displayed. If not done yet, or after the end of the jackpot state of “15RS” and “8RS”, the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorated symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the probability variation mode If the variable display has not been performed yet, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1014, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1015. That is, when the special display devices 43a and 43b perform the variable display for the specified number of times, the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode ends, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After step S1015, in step S1016, a support end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode, and then the process ends.

  Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning situation storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the winning state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the winning state is not reached, this processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the hit state, “1” is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the winning state is in effect (when any of “1” to “5” is set in the winning situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. Subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state, “2000”, which is a value corresponding to the opening effect time, is set for the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not “1” is set in the winning status storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, “2” is set for the winning situation storage area in step S1205. In the subsequent step S1206, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) during which the variable winning device 32 is kept open is set for the special variable timer.

  After step S1206, in step S1207, processing is performed to open the first variable winning device 32a. In step S1208, a round command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start a round is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not “4” is set in the winning situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot state of “15RS” and “8RS”, when the interval period immediately before the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started, “4” is set for the storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1210 whether or not “5” is set in the winning situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when the interval period immediately before the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened in the jackpot state of “8RN” is started, Therefore, “5” is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1210, it is determined whether or not “3” is set in the hit status storage area in step S1211. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state are completed and the ending period is started, “3” is set for the win situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step S1212.

  In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “1”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if it is immediately before the start of a big hit round other than the eighth round of “8RS” and “8RN” and the fourteenth round of “15RS” (interval). In step S1215, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “8”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, that is, if it is immediately before the start of the big hit round other than the eighth round of “15RS” (interval), in step S1216, “1” is set for the win status storage area. Set. Thereafter, in step S1217, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

  After step S1217, in step S1218, “8” is set to the winning counter. Further, in step S1219, a process for closing the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b that are in the open state is performed, and in step S1220, information indicating that the sub control device 262 starts an interval. Set the interval command to tell Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, that is, if it is immediately before the start of the eighth big hit round of “15RS” (interval), in step S1222, “4” is set for the win status storage area. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1217 described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1223 whether the 8RN flag is set on by referring to the execution area of the special variable suspension area. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, that is, if the interval period immediately before the start of the eighth round of “8RS” is reached, “4” is set in the winning status storage area in step S1225. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1217 described above.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, it is the fourteenth round of “15RS”, and in this example, the process proceeds to step S1216 described above in order to open the first variable winning device 32a.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1223, that is, if the interval period immediately before the start of the eighth round of “8RN” is reached, “5” is set for the win status storage area in step S1226. In step S1227, a value “25” corresponding to the interval time (0.1 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1218 described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there remains a time (opening time or closing time) in which the variable winning devices 32a and 32b should be kept open or closed, the process proceeds to step S1228. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8”, which is the upper limit (specified number) of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and the start of the interval. Each time one game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1228, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1228, that is, if the end of the round comes without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, when eight game balls have entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during one round, the round ends immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. It will be.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the eighth round of “15RS” or “8RS” is started, in step S1229, the variable winning device 32 is set to the special variable timer. A value “7500” corresponding to the time for maintaining the open state (30 seconds) is set. In subsequent step S1230, a V winning round command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that the second variable winning device 32b starts a jackpot round to enter a game ball in order to acquire the probability variation mode. To do.

  After step S1230, in step S1231, “2” is set for the winning situation storage area. Further, in step S1232, a second opening process for opening the second variable winning device 32b is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1233, the remaining ball monitoring flag for executing the monitoring of the game ball (residual ball monitoring process; see FIG. 18) in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to ON. In step S1234, a monitoring timer indicating a period for performing the remaining sphere monitoring process is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1210, that is, if the eighth round of “8RN” is started, the time during which the variable winning device 32 is kept open with respect to the special variable timer in step S1235. A value “25” corresponding to (0.1 seconds) is set. In the subsequent step S1236, a short round command is set for informing the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot round for opening the second variable prize-winning device 32b is opened shortly. After step S1236, the process proceeds to step S1231 described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if all rounds in the big hit state are exhausted, the process moves to step S1237, and “3” is set for the win situation storage area. After step S1237, in step S1238, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

  After step S1238, in step S1239, “7” is set to the winning counter. Note that when the process of setting the ending after step S1237 is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1228, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is made in step S1221 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. For this reason, a tentative numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1239, thereby completing the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1239, in step S1240, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b that are opened are closed, and in subsequent step S1241, information indicating that ending is to be started is sent to the sub-control device 262. Set the ending command to convey. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is time to end the ending period and end the jackpot state, the process proceeds to step S1242, and an end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific entry flag (see steps S1305 and S1306 in the remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 18) is set to ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, a value “21” corresponding to the probability variation mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the probability variation mode is given after the end of the big hit state.

  In the subsequent step S1403, “100” is set to the variation counter. Note that the variation counter is used for grasping that the upper limit of the variation count has been reached in the probability variation mode in which the upper limit is set for the variation count and the time reduction mode. After step S1403, in step S1404, a probability change start command is set to notify the sub control device 262 of the start of the probability change mode (transition to the probability change stage). Thereafter, the big hit / medium flag is turned off in step S1405, and then the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1406. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1406, in step S1407, “100” is set to the variation counter. Thereafter, in step S1408, a short time start command is set to notify the sub control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode (shift to the pull back stage). Thereafter, the big hit / medium flag is turned off in step S1405, and then the present process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process in step S1242, in step S1243, “0” indicating that the hit state storage area is not in the big hit state is set. Thereafter, in step S1244, a hit end command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is to be ended is set, and then this processing ends. The hit end command includes the number information of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, whether or not the value of the normal time interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal time interval) set after the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is “0” or not. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is a normal interval, the value of the normal interval timer is subtracted in step S2116, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the usual time interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec), “249 (“ 250 ”in the case where step S2116 is performed before step S2101”) is set in the usual time interval timer. In this process, the value of the usual interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec and becomes “0” after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is not the usual interval period, in step S2102, the support period flag indicating that the opening / closing control of the second start winning device 33b is in progress is on. Determine whether it is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is on. When the normal figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in a variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, this processing is terminated as it is. For example, if a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed. It is good. In other words, the normal symbol display device 41, after the suspension of fluctuation, will be maintained during the usual figure interval period (in the form showing the result of the entrance support lottery), but the usual figure interval period ends. Then, you may comprise so that it may switch to the display mode which shows that it is a fluctuation waiting state.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In a succeeding step S2106, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  After that, in step S2107, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set and the normal figure fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

  Here, the common map variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol change display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In the subsequent step S2302, the winning situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether or not it is currently in a state other than the big hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, whether or not a value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303, that is, high It is determined whether or not it is a ball entering state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  If the determination in step S2303 is affirmative, in step S2304, the normal symbol change display time is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the change time (remaining time) of the change display performed in the normal symbol display device 41. “100” is set to 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “0”. It should be noted that in the high pitching state, the winning is made when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking the value in the range of “0-232” is “1-232.”

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if a winning support lottery for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is to be opened is won, the winning support lottery is won in step S2306. The entrance support flag indicating that is turned on. After step S2306, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, if the player is in a big hit state or a low pitched state, in step S2307, the normal symbol change display time is displayed with respect to the normal symbol display timer. Set “2000” to 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “1 to 31”. In the low entry state, a win is awarded when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 232” is “1 to 31”. Or, the normal symbol variation display time may be determined by lottery.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2308, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in step S2306, after the incoming support flag indicating that the incoming support lottery has been won is set on, End the process. Note that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol and the winning probability in the pitching support lottery can be set appropriately for each model of the pachinko machine, for example, the winning probability of the pitching support lottery in the high pitching state Further, the winning probability of the pitching support lottery in the low pitching state may be higher than the winning probability.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display process of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the fact that the variable display hold number of the normal symbol display device 41 has decreased by one. I do. In other words, if both the left and right normal hold lamps are blinking, the right normal hold lamp is lit while the left normal hold lamp is blinking, and the left normal hold lamp is blinking and the right normal hold lamp is blinking. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left side normal hold lamp is lit and the right side normal hold lamp is lit. When the hold lamp is turned off and the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal hold lamps. After step S2108, this process ends.

  If the determination in step S2103 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process advances to step S2109 to perform processing for subtracting the general symbol display timer. Each time this processing is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, where it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step S2111, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. In other words, when the winning support lottery is won (when the incoming support flag is set on), both the left and right normal lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are turned on. Turn on only the left-hand general lamp.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2113 to perform a general-purpose discrimination information setting process. Here, the common figure discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entrance support flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in an open state is set on.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high pitching state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set “450” to 8 seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, “3” is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter for counting the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second starting winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in an open state, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if there is a low pitching state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. “100” is set. In step S2407, “1” is set to the opening number counter so that the second start winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409, and the second start winning device 33b is set in the open state in step S2410. This process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to a normal interval period (for example, 1 second) is set in the normal interval timer, and then the present process ends.

  If the determination in step S2110 is negative, in step S2115, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display for alternately turning on the pair of left and right general lamps). I do. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. As a result, the normal display control processing timing, that is, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms. After step S2115, this process ends.

  Next, the start winning device control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal variable timer in step S2202.

  In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period during which the open / close state of the second start winning device 33b is maintained, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the second start prize-winning device 33b is currently in an open state and the closing timing has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In subsequent step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-opening counter, and in step S2207, setting is made to close the second start winning device 33b.

  Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-releases counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the second start winning device 33b is released three times based on it. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, “250”) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210, and then this process is terminated.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state), the timing for ending the interval period In step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on, and in step S2212, a value corresponding to the opening time is set in the normal variable timer (in this example, in a high pitching state; “450”). In step S2213, the second start winning device 33b is set to be open. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  When the second start winning device 33b is in an open state, if a specified number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b. May be configured to be immediately closed (for example, if a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b is detected, and an affirmative determination is made). In such a case, it may be configured to proceed to step S2205).

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed.

  When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control apparatus 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the CR unit is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the firing control circuit 312 of the power / fire control device 310 in step S3203.

  After step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and the state return operation is executed if it is determined that the state return operation has started. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3206, setting of the lower pan full state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the lower pan 15. That is, the full state of the lower pan 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set. Execute the setting of dish full tank release state. Further, in step S3207, the setting of the tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or the tank ball absence release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is detected based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3208, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3209, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

  In step S3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3213, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which information on the advance command output from the main control device 261 is stored in a hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. The starting command includes, as described above, information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display triggered by the winning, and variable information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating whether or not there is, information indicating the type of jackpot, information indicating the type of reach, and the like are included.

  The holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262 is the same as the special variable holding area of the main control device 261, a first holding information storage area having four holding areas (holding first to fourth holding areas), and A second holding information storage area and one execution area are provided. In the first hold information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first change display (information stored in the first special change hold area), information on whether or not the jackpot, jackpot type, reach pattern, In addition, information (variation information) regarding variation display such as variation time is stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Four pieces of fluctuation information regarding each can be stored on hold. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special change reservation areas of the main control device 261 but also the change information stored in the reservation area. .

  Here, the hold information storage processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area) in step S4102. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103 The first fluctuation hold counter Nd that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, jackpot type information, reach pattern information, variation time information, etc., are the first among the vacant reserved areas in the first reserved information storage area. Remember me in the area.

  In subsequent step S4105, notice information storage processing is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, there may be intentional derivations of effects related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information. Among the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  In the advance notice storage process, when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the values of the continuous advance notice counter and the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is derived.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to carry out continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is already set on. Therefore, when there is no confirmation of the presence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set, and further, only the variation information corresponding to the complete detachment (the detachment where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the first holding area. , Lottery for continuous notice is to be performed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set, the lottery for the continuous notice is not performed.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Determine whether or not to execute consecutive notices by referring to the notice determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to a miss) . Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach pattern, or the game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. To determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), a hold icon 461 that imitates a “floating ring” is displayed in the hold display area 462 provided at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42. The hold display area 462 of the present embodiment includes an execution correspondence area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold correspondence area corresponding to the hold areas of the hold information storage areas (first and second hold information storage areas). 462b, and up to nine hold icons 461 can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the first fluctuation display and the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second fluctuation display are in a common mode. It is impossible to identify whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display. In addition, among the holding correspondence areas 462b, each holding correspondence area 462b that displays the four holding icons 461 to be digested first is more than each holding correspondence area 462b that displays the holding icons 461 to be digested after the fifth. Is larger than the execution correspondence area 462a.

  In addition, the hold icon 461 may be derived in a manner that suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the corresponding variable display. Hereinafter, such a hold icon 461 is also referred to as a “prefetch hold icon 463”. The prefetch hold icon 463 of this embodiment is derived in such a manner that the character uses a “buoy ring”. Furthermore, a plurality of types of pre-read hold icons 463 are prepared, and the pattern of the pre-read hold icon 463 is associated with a winning expectation level (a jackpot expectation level) for occurrence of a big hit state. As a result, the prefetch hold icon 463 is ranked with respect to the jackpot expectation degree according to the mode, and the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived to suggest the jackpot expectation degree (prefetch hold notice effect is performed). It is configured.

  Further, when the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived, the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463 changes until the change display corresponding to the prefetch hold icon 463 is consumed (hold change effect is derived). There is a case.

  That is, in the hold icon setting process in step S4107, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the prefetch hold icon 463 is to be derived. Is done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a holding change effect is performed. In the case of winning, the holding change flag of the corresponding holding area is set on, and the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463 is set as follows. An upper limit pattern that may be finally displayed and a temporary pattern that is a lower rank expectation degree (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern and that is displayed first are determined. It should be noted that the temporary pattern may be configured such that there is an option that only the default hold icon 461 is displayed at first. On the other hand, in the case of no win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463.

  Basically, a process is performed in which the hold icon 461 having the determined pattern is displayed so that the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is arranged on the right side of the rightmost icon. Is called. In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is digested with priority over the first variation display, the second variation display is newly suspended in a state where the first variation display is suspended. In the hold correspondence area 462b, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second hold display that is newly held is displayed at the left position of the leftmost hold icon 461 among the hold icons 461 corresponding to the first change display. It has become so.

  In the present embodiment, when the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived in the hold display area 462 in step S4107, the prefetch hold producing flag is set on. After step S4107, this process ends.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of pieces of change information held in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the jackpot type information, the reach pattern information, the variation time information, and the like are stored in the first reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. Remember in the area. In subsequent step S4110, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 in the second reserved information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4111, it is confirmed whether or not there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is already set on. Therefore, when the presence is confirmed, the lottery of the continuous notice is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the reserved area where the continuous notice flag is turned on is the first reserved area. If it is determined that the area is the first reserved area, the continuous notice flag of the first reserved area is turned off, and the display mode of the final notice of the continuous notice is derived in the second reserved area where the variation information is newly stored. Set a flag to In other words, when the second variation display is suspended while the continuous announcement is being performed with respect to the first variation display, the continuous announcement effect of the first variation display is interrupted by the second variation display. In the second variation display, a display mode for ending the continuous notice effect is derived.

  On the other hand, in the case where the presence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, only the variation information corresponding to the complete detachment (the detachment in which the reach state does not occur) is stored in the second holding area. If there is a lottery for continuous notice. The continuous notice lottery process in step S4111 only corresponds to the ball entering the second start winning device 33b in the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After step S4111, a hold icon setting process is performed in step S4112, and then this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3904 following step S3903, the continuous-changing counting process for counting the number of game balls to be paid out (total number of payouts) in a series of consecutive jackpot states while interposing the high pitching state is performed. Do.

  Here, the continuous change counting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the continuous-changing flag that has been set on during the period from the start of the big hit state to the transition to the low entry state (during continuous-changing) is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. If the determination in step S4902 is affirmative, in step S4903, 15 is added to the continuous-changing counter as a period paying-out total counting unit for counting the total number of payouts in continuous chain.

  In subsequent step S4904, 15 is subtracted from the value of the teaching opportunity counter for determining that the total number of payouts in the continuous chain has reached a predetermined number. In the present embodiment, every time the total number of payouts in the continuous chain increases by 2500, 2500 ball arrival display, 5000 ball arrival display as a specific payout display that teaches that the total payout has reached a predetermined number. A 7500 ball arrival display or the like is derived to the decorative symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 44 (h), the specific payout number display is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 42. As will be described in detail later, the decorative symbol display device 42 includes a plurality of layers, and the layer on which the specific payout number display is performed is a transparent area other than the display of characters and numbers. The display mode of the (back side) layer is visible.

  After step S4904 or when a negative determination is made in step S4902, it is determined in step S4905 whether or not the value of the teaching opportunity counter is “0” or less. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4905, a specific payout number display process for deriving a specific payout number display is performed in step S4906. In this example, the number of hundreds or more out of the total number of payouts counted by the continuous counter is displayed. In addition, a counter that counts the number of times that the specific payout number display is executed may be provided, and the corresponding specific payout number display may be performed based on the number of such counters. Further, the function of grasping that 2500 game balls have been paid out using the teaching opportunity counter corresponds to the specific payout number display timing calculation means.

  In step S4907 following step S4906, “2500” is set again for the teaching opportunity counter. After step S4907, this process ends. In the present embodiment, only the number of game balls paid out based on the entering into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the continuous change is counted in the continuous change counter. You may comprise so that it may count also about the game ball paid out based on the ball | bowl entering the winning device 31 grade | etc.,. In addition, for example, to reset the remaining number of fluctuations in the probability variation mode, although the number of rounds is small, a big hit state (for example, all 2 rounds) in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, or a small amount similar to this A hit state (even if a small hit state occurs, a game ball does not enter the specific ball portion 145, and the remaining number of times in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode is not reset) (normal big hit state) Such a production may not be performed).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3904 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3905, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3906. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3914.

  In step S3906, various counter updating processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the out-of-place design symbols CO, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO determines a symbol when the fluctuation symbol of the decoration symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot state occurs (in this embodiment, as a jackpot decoration symbol counter CO). 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 8, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8), returns to 0.

  When the variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 261, for example, if the counter value is 0, “1” based on a table (not shown) (a table for associating the counter value with the decorative design). If the number is 1, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined such that “2” (the size) is 1. This jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3906, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553. However, it is not stored in the buffer, but the counter value is referred to at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. You may do it.

  Further, when a variation pattern command corresponding to a normal jackpot is received, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is “2” (a flat point), and if it is 2-4, “4” (a flat point), The combination of jackpot symbols is determined such that “6” (the flat eye) is 5 or 6 and “8” (the flat eye) is 7 or 8.

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine combinations of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / losing lottery is lost. Since any one of the nine decorative symbols is displayed, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated in such a way that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the front / rear reach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and the complete failure Stored in one of the symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. Thereby, every time the update process is executed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), it is further determined in step S4007 whether or not a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and back. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front / rear out of symbol (front / rear out of reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is determined as the front / rear out of reach of the RAM 553. After storing in the symbol buffer, the process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment (reach other than front / rear detachment) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the previous and subsequent deviations, and the process is terminated.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the completely out symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a hold process is performed in step S3907. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is digested with priority over the first variation display, and the first variation display is digested when the second variation display is stored on hold. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is possessed is discriminated. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process for shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted, such as execution area, second hold area, first hold area, third hold area, second hold area, fourth hold area, third hold area. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of change information of the second change display is held, the value of the second change hold counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4205.

  In a succeeding step S4206, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The hold first area → the execution area, the hold second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed with a variable display corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the advance notice setting process in step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice flag (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Since this is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what is the type if it is a big hit, and what is the reach pattern if it is not a big hit, etc. The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The type of continuous notice determined here is derived at a predetermined timing when the corresponding change display is performed.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Note that a hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon 461 is provided in each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area, and the information related to the hold icon 461 is also stored in the hold information storage described above. The data is shifted by area data shift processing.

  The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 in accordance with the data shift. In the decorative symbol display device 42, every time the variable display is digested (executed), The hold icon 461 located on the left side is deleted, and the hold icon 461 arranged on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display location moves). After step S4208, this process ends.

  In this embodiment, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon 461 in step S4208, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set on, the hold change effect of the prefetch hold icon 463 is displayed. A lottery of whether or not to perform is performed, and when winning, the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463 is changed to a higher rank pattern (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding change flag is set to ON, the pre-reading holding effect flag is turned off. Further, by changing the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463, when the prefetch hold icon 463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the prefetch hold in-progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off. ing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3908. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a change pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 determines the game state (game mode), change type (type of jackpot for jackpot, reach pattern for outage), change time, etc. Based on the corresponding table, the symbol configuration of the decorative symbol change display, the effect pattern of the effect display performed together with the decorative symbol change display, and the like are determined. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is coordinated in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Will continue to be displayed.

  Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106) is on, each situation is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. Referring to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived for the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, or the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Further, in the display setting process in step S3908, a process for performing effect control during the big hit (a win display process) is also performed.

  Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received. Note that the various types of variation information included in the variation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area, or may be configured to be stored in a separate storage area. Further, for example, the flag corresponding to the case where the processing corresponding to the reception of the variation pattern command is performed in the hold processing (see FIG. 36) is turned on, and the variation display is set in the display setting processing. It may be configured such that the flag is turned off, and it is possible to determine whether or not a variation pattern command has been received by checking the flag.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the mode is the probability variation mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4502, in step S4503, processing (normal / time shortening mode pattern setting processing) for setting an effect display (decorative display of decorative symbols) in the normal mode and the time shortening mode is performed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, in step S4504, processing (probability variation mode pattern setting processing) for setting effect display (decoration display of decorative symbols) in the probability variation mode is performed.

  Now, the decorative symbol display device 42 as the effect display means of the present embodiment is mainly composed of layer 1, layer 2, and layer 3 in which moving images are reproduced, mainly still images and moving images with little movement (in the short term). A layer 4 and a layer 5 used for a derived image, an effect image, and the like. Layer 2 is displayed on the upper side (near side) than Layer 1, Layer 3 is displayed above Layer 2, Layer 4 is displayed above Layer 3, and Layer 5 is displayed above Layer 4 Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an effect display in which the character A, character B, character C, character D, character E, character F, character G, and character H appear. In particular, in the present embodiment, one of them can be specified by the player. That is, in the state where the normal game state change display which is not the big hit state is not performed, the character selection screen is opened from the menu screen on the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIG. When the specific effect button 127 is operated during the variable display, the character selection screen may be opened directly), the cross button 126 is operated to bring the cursor to a predetermined character icon, and the effect button 125 is operated. The selection information of the corresponding character is stored in the specific character selection storage area.

  The effect (hereinafter also referred to as “specific character display”) derived from the character (hereinafter also referred to as “specific character”) indicated in the specific character selection storage area is derived from other characters (general characters). It is derived with priority over production. Note that the specific character is preferentially derived, which means that it is easier to be derived than other characters or that there are many opportunities to be displayed. As will be described in detail later, While the jackpot video from which the specific character is derived is derived, or while the specific character is being displayed, it is basically configured so that the visual appearance of the specific character display is not hindered by other displays, or in a normal gaming state, If it continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 across a plurality of variable displays, a specific character may be selected as a display (stock point display 465 described later).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a part of the decorative design derived from the decorative design display device 42 is constituted by an image of the character, the character A corresponds to the decorative design of the number design “1”, and the character B is a number. The character “C” corresponds to the decorative pattern of the pattern “2”, the character C corresponds to the decorative pattern of the numerical pattern “3”, the character D corresponds to the decorative pattern of the numerical pattern “4”, and the character E of the numerical pattern “5”. Corresponding to the decorative design, character F corresponds to the decorative design of the number pattern “6”, character G corresponds to the decorative design of the number design “8”, and character H corresponds to the decorative design of the number design “9”. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, the character specified as the specific character by the player corresponds to the decorative pattern of the numeral pattern “7” (the specific character corresponds to two decorative patterns). .

  In addition, the setting of the specific character is not reset only by turning off / on the power of the pachinko machine 10, but is reset by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the RAM erase switch 323. ing. In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, the character C is set as a specific character (the decorative symbols “3” and “7” become the character C).

  The number of characters appearing on the decorative symbol display device 42 is not particularly limited, and the number of characters that can be specified as specific characters among the appearing characters is not particularly limited. It can be set. Further, the specific character may be reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off / on, and the specific character set when setting the specific character in the initialization process is not particularly limited. For example, it may be determined at random (lottery). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect display (specific character display) in which the specific character appears corresponds to the “specific effect display”, and one of the characters A to H is selected as the specific character, and the selection information of the specific character is displayed. The function of storing and determining whether the specific character is derived from the target effect display constitutes the effect display specifying means.

  Here, the normal / time reduction mode pattern setting processing in step S4503 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, in the decorative display variation display in the normal mode and the time reduction mode, basically, the effect display of the moving image (hereinafter also referred to as “main effect”) is performed in “Layer 1”. The decoration pattern variation display is reproduced in “Layer 3”, and the still image effect display (hereinafter also referred to as “sub-effect”) is reproduced in “Layer 4”. In this embodiment, the effect display mode may be switched based on the operation of the specific effect button 127. In “Layer 2” and “Layer 5”, the switched image is played back (rear channel display). ). That is, in “Layer 2”, a moving image corresponding to the moving image of Layer 1 is reproduced, and in “Layer 5”, a still image corresponding to the still image of Layer 4 is reproduced.

  First, in step S6101, the decorative pattern variation pattern of layer 3 is determined and set based on the variation pattern command. That is, the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols and the first (stopped) symbol that is stopped first among the decorative symbols (in this example, basically, the decorative symbols in the upper symbol display area) and the second stopped symbol The second (stopped) symbol (in this example, basically the decorative symbol in the lower symbol display area) and the third (stopped) symbol to be stopped last (in this example, basically, the middle symbol display area) (Decoration pattern) and the pattern of the decoration pattern operation (speed change, direction change, shape change, etc.) are determined.

  In the subsequent step S6102, the pattern of the main effect of layer 1 is determined and set. The main effect is developed with the passage of time from the start to the end of the variation display of decorative symbols, and in this example, the main effect is divided into four scenes, and the result of the winning lottery in the last scene Is taught or suggested.

  More specifically, “scene 1” from the start of fluctuation to “second stop” when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, and the timing of development from “second stop” to “super reach production” (hereinafter simply referred to as “reach”). "Scene 2" (referred to as "Super Development"), "Scene 3" from "Super Development" to "Decision Effect", and the end of the variable display from the start of "Decision Effect" (all decorative symbols are stopped) It is divided into “scene 4 (last scene)” up to the third stop).

  In addition, the “decision effect” is a continuation of the “result teaching effect” indicating whether or not the main effect ends in success, and the animation of the super reach effect in scene 3 immediately before the result teaching effect. It consists of “kiwa production” that leads to the derivation of teaching production and the super-reaching production. Regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol, during the period in which the “kiwa effect” is derived, the moving speed of the third symbol (decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area) that is still variably displayed is slow and the third symbol is displayed. The third symbol is emphasized, such as the size of the image is enlarged (the aspect of voice and electrical decoration also changes). Also, instead of emphasizing the third pattern, an animation showing the result of the lottery (for example, the final action of the character's predetermined challenge) is emphasized (for example, a slow motion or a still image, There is also a pattern in which the face and the part where the result of the challenge can be seen are close-up and deformed).

  In addition, as the kiwa effect of the settlement effect, the same moving image is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 includes a scene information storage area, and includes a first scene storage area to a fourth scene storage area associated with each of the scenes 1 to 4. Furthermore, since each time of scene 1 to scene 4 is determined when the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined, in step S6101 (or step S6102), the scene storage area corresponding to the time of each scene. Is remembered.

  In step S6102, a production pattern matching the variation information and the time of each scene is determined using various tables and various random number counters, and stored in each scene storage area. Further, when the specific character display from which the specific character is derived is selected, the main specific character flag in the corresponding scene storage area is set to ON.

  After step S6102, in step S6103, layer 2 back channel display is set. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the specific character display can be derived at the player's timing in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied. In the normal mode and the time reduction mode, the specific character display is performed. When the specific character display is not derived at a timing that can be derived, the specific character display is derived based on the operation of the specific effect button 127.

  Step S6103 is a process for realizing a portion corresponding to a moving image in such a configuration, and in a period in which the specific character display can be derived in layer 1, the setting is made so that the specific character display is not displayed. 2, a setting is made to reproduce the specific character display during that period. However, the layer 2 is normally hidden and is not visually recognized even when the specific character display is reproduced. On the other hand, when the second layer is displayed (visible), the first layer displayed on the lower side (back side) than the second layer becomes invisible.

  In the subsequent step S6104, a layer 4 sub-effect pattern is determined using various tables and various random number counters. The sub effect is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect at a time of the main effect, and includes, for example, a cut-in effect and a button effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), there may be a case where a character C appears in the scene 3 and a long jump effect is derived. In this case, the scene 3 is made until the character C jumps as shown in FIG. 43 (c), and immediately after that, the transition is made to the final effect shown in FIG. 43 (d) and then landed. At the stage of production, the sub production (cut-in production, button production) of FIG. 43 (f) is derived.

  When derivation of a sub effect is determined, each sub effect flag (cut-in flag, button effect flag, etc.) indicating that the sub effect is to be executed is set on for the corresponding scene storage area in the scene information storage area. Then, the sub production pattern is stored. Further, when the sub effect is a specific character display, the sub specific character flag is set to ON.

  After step S6104, in step S6105, the setting of layer 5 back channel display is performed. Step S6105 is a process for realizing a portion corresponding to a still image in the configuration for deriving the specific character display based on the operation of the specific effect button 127. In the case where a sub-effect that can be selected is derived, if a pattern that displays a specific character is not selected, a setting is made in layer 5 to reproduce the sub-effect of the pattern that displays the specific character. However, the layer 5 is normally hidden and is not visually recognized even when the specific character display is reproduced. On the other hand, when the fifth layer is displayed (visible), the fourth layer displayed on the lower side (back side) than the fifth layer becomes invisible.

  Thereafter, in step S6106, the main specific character flag in each scene storage area of the scene information storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not there is a scene from which the specific character display is derived in the main effect. If a negative determination is made in step S6106, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, in step S6107, the sub effect flag in the scene storage area in which the specific character flag is set on is referred to, and in the scene where the specific character display is performed in the main effect, It is determined whether or not the display is scheduled to be executed. If a negative determination is made in step S6107, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6107, in step S6108, with reference to the sub specific character flag, the sub effect that is executed in a scene where the specific character display is performed in the main effect is displayed in the specific character display. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6108, that is, if the specific character display of the main effect and the specific character display of the sub effect are derived in duplicate, in step S6109, the stock effect flag in the corresponding scene storage area is derived. Set to ON.

  That is, the character C is specified as a specific character (stored in the specific character selection storage area), and the main effect in FIG. 43D and the sub effect in FIG. 43F overlap. In this case, both are specific character displays, but the mode of FIG. 43 (d) is (almost) not visible. In this case, in this example, stock points are given as a price for not being able to show the specific character display (the mode of FIG. 43 (d)) of the main effect.

  In the present embodiment, by accumulating 5 stock points, the right to derive the specific character display once (based on the operation of the specific effect button 127) is given at the player's favorite timing. . In step S6109, the stock effect flag for executing the stock effect display that the stock point is added because the specific character display overlaps is set to ON. After step S6109, this process ends. The stock points are added when the stock effect display is derived, not at the timing of step S6109.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, a stock point display 465 as a specific effect stock display indicating how much stock points are accumulated is derived at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. In the state where 5 stock points are accumulated, the stock point display 465 changes to display of a specific character. In addition, stock points can be stored up to 7 points, and the stock point display 465 of the sixth point and the seventh point is displayed small on the right side of the specific character.

  By operating the specific effect button 127 with 5 or more stock points accumulated, a specific character display (or a part effect using an effect handle 401 described later in detail) is derived (the specific character that has been stocked). At the same time, the stock point is subtracted by 5 points, and the stock point display 465 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the point subtracted by 5 points. Further, when the stock point exceeds 7 points, the right of stock for displaying the specific character is forcibly exercised even if the player does not operate the specific effect button 127. The stock point display 465 of the present embodiment is not displayed when it is developed into a super reach effect by effect change display, but may be configured to be continuously displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6108, it is determined in step S6110 whether or not the sub effect overlapping the specific character display of the main effect is a permission display. In other words, in the sub-effects, a permission display that is permitted to be derived in duplicate with the specific character display of the main effect and a disallowed display that is not permitted are set in advance. The display is a display that does not hinder the specific character display or is conversely enhanced, and the non-permission display is a display that hinders the visual recognition of at least a part of the specific character display. It should be noted that the non-permission display derivation period corresponds to the specific display prohibition period.

  For example, when FIG. 43D is a specific effect display of the main effect, FIG. 43E is a permission display and an effect display (semi-transparent red flame). The display is as if the spirit of C is entered. On the other hand, FIG. 43 (g) is a disapproval display and is a cut-in effect in which character B appears. When this is superimposed on FIG. 43 (d), the specific character in FIG. 43 (d) is displayed. C becomes invisible. The setting (regulation) of permission display and non-permission display is appropriately set for each model.

  In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S6110, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6110, in step S6111, a process for changing the sub-effect derivation timing is executed. That is, as in the second variable display of FIG. 48, in the setting stage of the variable display, it is provisionally determined that the sub effect (button effect) is derived in the scene 4 (final effect) of “Layer 3”. Since the movie of the character C as the specific character display is derived in the scene 3 and the scene 4 of “Layer 1”, the sub-production is performed so that the user can enjoy the sub-production while preferentially viewing the video of the character C. Is derived at a timing (for example, the end of the scene 1) that does not overlap with the display of the specific character and is not scheduled to perform any other sub-effects. After step S6111, the process ends.

  Next, the probability variation mode pattern setting process in step S4504 of FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation display of the decorative symbol in the probability variation mode, basically, the effect display (main effect) of the moving image is reproduced in “Layer 2”, and the variation of the decoration symbol in “Layer 3”. The display is reproduced, and a still image effect display (hereinafter also referred to as “sub-effect”) is reproduced in “Layer 4”. Further, in the present embodiment, the back channel display is reproduced at “Layer 5”.

  Further, in “Layer 1”, a background moving image that is not related to the variation display of the decorative design is continuously played during the probability variation mode. In the present embodiment, a 30-second uniform background moving image is sequentially reproduced in the probability variation mode. As shown in FIG. 50, the background moving image includes three individually specialized patterns of character A to character H (total of 24 patterns), three patterns in which characters A to D appear, and characters E to There are three patterns in which H appears, three patterns in which characters A, C, E, and G appear, three patterns in which characters B, D, F, and H appear, and four patterns in which all casts appear It has become.

  As will be described in detail later, when the probability variation mode is started, a combination determination counter used for determining the selection of the background moving image is acquired, and the pattern of the background moving image is determined with reference to the combination determination table. In addition, a background moving image storage area for storing information of the background moving image executed in the probability variation mode is provided. In this example, the background moving image storage area includes four storage areas that can store background moving image information, and each stores background moving image information. Then, the background moving image of each storage area is sequentially reproduced, and new background moving image information is set again in the storage area where the corresponding background moving image has been reproduced.

  First, in step S6201, the decorative pattern variation pattern of layer 3 is determined and set based on the variation pattern command. Further, since the time of each scene of the main effect is also determined by determining the variation pattern of the decorative design, the time of each scene is stored in each scene storage area of the scene information storage area.

  In the subsequent step S6202, the layer 2 main effect pattern is determined and stored in each scene storage area. Further, when the specific character display from which the specific character is derived is selected, the main specific character flag in the corresponding scene storage area is set to ON. In the probability variation mode of the present embodiment, when the variable display that does not cause the reach state is performed, the main effect of layer 2 is basically not set. Even in the case where the reach state occurs, in scenes 1 and 2, there are few patterns in which the main effect is set. In addition, there is a pattern in which the main effect of layer 2 is not set even in the effect display corresponding to the variable display that is a big hit. In the present embodiment, the number of scenes is also set to four in the probability variation mode in the same manner as in the normal mode or the like, but can be set to be smaller than in the normal mode or the like.

  After step S6202, in step S6203, when the sub-effect pattern of layer 4 is determined and derivation of the sub-effect is determined, the sub-effect is executed for the corresponding scene storage area in the scene information storage area. Each sub effect flag (cut-in flag, button effect flag, etc.) indicating this is turned on, and the sub effect pattern is stored. Further, when the sub effect is a specific character display, the sub specific character flag is set to ON.

  After step S6203, in step S6204, layer 5 back channel display is set. Step S6204 is a process for realizing a portion corresponding to a still image in the probability variation mode in the configuration for deriving the specific character display based on the operation of the specific effect button 127. In a case where a sub-effect that can select a pattern to be derived is derived, if a pattern that provides a specific character display is not selected, the layer 5 is set to reproduce the sub-effect of the pattern that provides the specific character display.

  In the probability change mode, the setting of the back channel corresponding to the moving image is not performed.

  Thereafter, in step S6205, it is determined whether or not a specific background moving image flag indicating that a specific character display in which a specific character appears in the background moving image of layer 1 is being reproduced is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6205, in step S6206, the main effect that overlaps the background moving image (the one being played) displayed with the specific character is set to “non-display” (see FIG. 49). However, among the main effects, the scene from which the specific character display is derived is set to “display”, and the stock effect flag of the corresponding scene storage area is set to ON.

  In the subsequent step S6207, when a sub-effect that overlaps with the background video of the specific character display is set, processing for stopping the sub-effect is performed.

  In the subsequent step S6208, a decorative display variation display overlapping the background image of the specific character display is mini-displayed (for example, the decorative design is displayed small in the upper left part of the decorative design display device 42, and areas other than the decorative design of layer 3 are displayed. (Transparent area). After step S6208, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6205, in step S6209, the main specific character flag in each scene storage area of the scene information storage area is referred to, and whether there is a scene from which a specific character display is derived in the main effect. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S6209, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6209, in step S6210, the sub effect flag in the scene storage area in which the specific character flag is set on is referred to, and in the scene where the specific character display is performed in the main effect, It is determined whether or not the display is scheduled to be executed. If a negative determination is made in step S6210, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6210, in step S6211, the sub effect that is executed in a scene where the specific character display is performed in the main effect with reference to the sub specific character flag is displayed in the specific character display. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6211, that is, if the specific character display of the main effect and the specific character display of the sub effect are derived in duplicate, the stock effect flag of the corresponding scene storage area is determined in step S6212. Set to ON. After step S6212, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6211, it is determined in step S6213 whether or not the sub-effect that overlaps the specific character display of the main effect is a permission display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6213, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6213, in step S6214, a process for changing the sub-effect derivation timing is executed. After step S6214, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 39, after step S4504, in step S4505, “1” indicating that the scene is 1 is set to the scene counter used for grasping the scene of the decorative symbol variation display. After step S4505, in step S4506, a value corresponding to the time of scene 1 is set in the scene grasp timer used for grasping the scene.

  In a succeeding step S4507, it is determined whether or not there is a sub effect of the scene 1 with reference to the sub effect flag of the first scene storage area of the scene information storage area. If the determination in step S4507 is affirmative, in step S4508, a sub effect corresponding to the sub effect flag is set.

  After step S4508 or if a negative determination is made in step S4507, in step S4509, the stock effect flag in the first scene storage area of the scene information storage area is referred to, and whether there is a stock effect of scene 1 or not. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S4509, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4509, a stock effect is set in step S4510, and after adding stock points in step S4511, the present process ends.

  Since the stock effect is derived while the specific character display is being performed, the stock effect is small in the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 42 (the part where the stock point display 465 is displayed or its vicinity). Only a display such as “stock point acquisition” is derived. In addition, regarding addition of stock points, points may be added one by one, or one or more points may be added in a lottery, or a specific character that is duplicated (one whose visibility has been hindered) The number of added points may be different depending on the type of display. In addition, it may be configured such that the player can operate the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 so that the stock effect is not derived when the specific character is displayed. Further, when the setting is made so that the stock effect is not derived. Instead of this, a notification (stock effect) by the dedicated part 411 may be performed. In addition, regarding the timing of adding stock points, the stock points may be added not at the step S4511 but at the timing at which the stock effect is actually derived.

  Next, the scene update process for updating the main effect scene accompanying the decorative symbol variation display performed in the display setting process in step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the value of the scene counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S6301, that is, if a variable display is being performed, it is determined in step S6302 whether or not the value of the scene grasp timer is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, it is determined in step S6303 whether or not the value of the scene counter is “1”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6303, that is, if scene 1 has ended, a value corresponding to the time of scene 2 is set in the scene grasp timer in step S6304.

  In the subsequent step S6305, 1 is added to the value of the scene counter. Thereafter, in step S6306, the sub effect flag in the scene storage area of the scene information storage area corresponding to the scene indicated by the scene counter is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the sub effect is performed in the scene. If the determination in step S6306 is affirmative, in step S6307, the sub-effect is set based on information such as the type of the sub-effect flag in the scene storage area.

  After step S6307, or when a negative determination is made in step S6306, in step S6308, the stock effect flag in the scene storage area of the scene information storage area corresponding to the scene indicated by the scene counter is referred to. It is determined whether or not stock production is performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6308, the stock effect is set in step S6309 so that it is derived in accordance with the timing at which the specific character display overlaps.

  In the subsequent step S6310, the stock point is added. After step S6310, the process proceeds to step S6316 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6303, it is determined in step S6311 whether or not the value of the scene counter is “2”. If the determination in step S6311 is affirmative, that is, if the scene 2 has ended, a value corresponding to the time of the scene 3 is set in the scene grasping timer in step S6312. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6305 described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6311, it is determined in step S6313 whether or not the value of the scene counter is “3”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6313, that is, if the scene 3 has ended, a value corresponding to the scene 4 (last scene) is set in the scene grasp timer in step S6314. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6315 described above.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6313, that is, if the scene 4 has ended, the value of the scene counter is set to “0” in step S6315. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6316.

  In step S6316, it is determined whether or not the mode is the probability variation mode. If a negative determination is made in step S6316, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6316, in step S6317, 1 is subtracted from the background moving image timer for measuring the remaining time of the background moving image.

  After step S6317, in step S6318, it is determined whether or not the value of the background moving image timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S6318, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6318, that is, if the background video that has been played back has ended, in step S6319, the background video in which storage area of the four storage areas of the background video storage area is being played back. The background moving image information in the storage area indicated by the background moving image pointer indicating whether or not is reset. That is, the combination determination counter is acquired, the background determination pattern is determined with reference to the combination determination table, and the information is stored in the corresponding storage area.

  After step S6319, in step S6320, the background moving image pointer is updated (set to indicate the next storage area in the background moving image storage area). It should be noted that the background moving image pointer is updated so that the generation of the background moving image is not started, but the generation of the background moving image is sequentially started before that.

  In the subsequent step S6321, a value “3500” corresponding to 30 seconds is set for the background moving image timer. After step S6321, in step S6322, it is determined whether or not the background moving image indicated by the updated background moving image point is a specific character display in which a specific character appears. In the present embodiment, the background moving image in which the all cast appears is not included in the specific character display.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6322, the specific background video flag is set on in step S6323. Furthermore, in step S6324, the main effect overlapping with the background video of the specific character display is set to “non-display”. However, the scene in which the specific character display is derived among the main effects is set to “display”, and the stock effect flag in the corresponding scene storage area is set on.

  In a succeeding step S6325, a setting of “mini display” is performed on the decorative pattern overlapping the background moving image of the specific character display. Furthermore, in step S6326, the setting is made to stop the sub-effect that overlaps the background moving image of the specific character display, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6322, the specific background video flag is turned off in step S6327, the main effect is set to “display” in step S6328, and the decorative design is set to normal display in step S6329. After this setting (setting to cancel the mini display), this process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S6322, if the specific background moving image flag is off, the present processing may be terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6302, that is, if the timing for switching the scene has not been reached, in step S6330, 1 is subtracted from the value of the scene grasp timer. It should be noted that the scene grasping timer subtraction process may be performed before step S6302 (in this case, the setting value for the scene grasping timer is increased by 1).

  After step S6330, in step S6331, it is determined whether or not the specific effect button 127 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S6331, the process proceeds to step S6316 described above.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6331, it is determined in step S6332 whether or not there is a stock (whether or not there are 5 or more stock points). If a negative determination is made in step S6332, this processing is terminated as it is. In the scene update process, if a negative determination is made in step S6332, it is determined whether an error notification display is derived, and if an affirmative determination is made, whether the specific character display is being reproduced in the main effect. If it is determined whether or not a specific character display is being reproduced, a stock effect may be derived and a process of adding stock points may be performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6332, in step S6333, the back channel display (specific character display performed in layer 2 or layer 5 in the normal mode and time reduction mode and in layer 5 in the probability variation mode) ) Is being reproduced.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6333, in step S6334, the layer on which the back channel display is performed is set as a visible display, and the back channel display is made visible. Thereby, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the display mode other than the specific character display is switched to the specific character display. After step S6334, after one stock is subtracted (after 5 stock points are subtracted) in step S6335, the process proceeds to step S6316 described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6333, it is determined in step S6336 whether the specific character is being displayed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6336, the process transitions to step S6316. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6336, it is determined in step S6337 whether or not a part effect using the effect handle 401 is being performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6337, the flow advances to step S6316.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6337, in step S6338, if the change display corresponds to a big hit or a front / rear reach, a part effect is performed by 1/2, otherwise 1 / The part production setting which performs part production in 6 is performed. In the part effect setting, when the part effect is set, the stock point is subtracted by 5. After step S6338, the process proceeds to step S6316.

  As the parts effect of the present embodiment, the effect handle 401 is normally in a state where the positions of the tip portions of the first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 are aligned as shown in FIG. As the “shake handshake effect”, a display mode indicating whether or not the handshake with the predetermined character is successful is derived. When the handshake effect is successful, the effect handle 401 causes the first slide member 402 to jump forward as shown in FIG. It is deformed into a nice appearance (a shape resembling a hand) and is slightly displaced up and down. Further, for example, in the state in which an option is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 as a “guidance effect” and a display mode in which any one of the options is selected with the cross button 126 and the effect button 125 is derived. A specific character appears on the decorative symbol display device 42, and a guidance display for holding the effect handle 401 is derived, and the operation of the effect handle 401 can grasp which of the options is correct (for example, two choices). In this case, the production handle 401 moves to the correct answer option side, or, in the case of 3 choices, the cross button 126 is operated and the cursor shakes when the cursor is over the correct option icon).

  In step S6334, when switching to the back channel display, a plurality of switching conditions may be provided. For example, the display is switched to the back channel display by operating the specific effect button 127 five times (for example, the back channel display is displayed only once for each operation until the fourth operation). Also good. Furthermore, when such an effect is derived, it is possible to set a fake effect that is likely to be switched to the back channel display and not switched when the negative determination is made in step S6337 so that the effect is not necessarily switched to the back channel. Also good. Further, as a condition for switching to the back channel display, the higher the jackpot expectation, the easier it is to switch.

  Next, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit state is received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the sub-side big hit flag for confirming that the sub-control device 262 is in a big hit state is set on. After step S4702, in step S4703, for the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, “15RS” is set to “15” based on the information included in the opening command, and “8RS” If “8RN”, “8” is set.

  Thereafter, in step S4704, an opening effect is set for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps). In the subsequent step S4705, a value “2000” corresponding to the time of the opening effect is set for the remaining time measurement timer for measuring the remaining time of each scene of the effect display performed in the layer 1 in the big hit state.

  After step S4705, in step S4706, it is determined whether or not a continuous-changing flag indicating that the continuous-changing state in which the big hit state is being overlapped with the high pitching state being on is set on. When a negative determination is made in step S4706, that is, when the high pitching state is interrupted and the so-called “first win” is won in the normal mode, the big hit state flag is set to ON in step S4707. .

  In the subsequent step S4708, the value of the continuous-changing counter that counts the number of game balls paid out based on the entering into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b (the total number of payouts) is set to “0”. . Furthermore, in step S4709, “2500” is set to the teaching opportunity counter for grasping the timing at which the total number of payouts increased by 2500 (2500 shots) in the continuous chain.

  After step S4709 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, in step S4710, a jackpot moving image setting process for setting a jackpot moving image derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 in a jackpot state is performed.

  Here, the jackpot moving image setting processing in step S4710 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a jackpot moving image having a uniform 15 seconds is sequentially played back during the big hit state round period (from the end of the opening effect to the start of the ending effect). Also, as shown in FIG. 56 and the like, the jackpot moving image is played back and displayed in layer 1.

  As shown in FIG. 50, as the jackpot video, there are three patterns specialized for each of characters A to H (24 patterns in total), three patterns in which characters A to D appear, characters E to There are three patterns in which H appears, three patterns in which characters A, C, E, and G appear, three patterns in which characters B, D, F, and H appear, and four patterns in which all casts appear It has become. Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (d), a jackpot video in which a plurality of characters appear does not always display all the target characters. Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 (e) and 44 (f), no other character appears in the jackpot video corresponding to each character individually. In the present embodiment, the number of jackpot videos is the same as the number of patterns of background videos in the probability variation mode, and the combination determination counter and the combination determination table are also used when determining the jackpot videos described later. It has become. However, the content of the actually derived moving image is different from the background moving image.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), a combination storage area is provided as combination storage means for storing information on a jackpot video (combination of jackpot videos) executed in the jackpot state. In this example, the combination storage area includes a first storage area to a sixteenth storage area that can store information on the jackpot video, and each jackpot video information is stored therein. Then, the big hit video in each storage area is sequentially played back.

  In the background moving image storage area used in the probability change mode, new background moving image information is set again for the storage area in which the corresponding background moving image has been reproduced. After being set at the start of the state, it is not reset, and when the jackpot video of all storage areas is played, the jackpot video of the storage area that was played first is played back . Further, the function of storing the timing (order) of deriving the hit character moving image in the combination storage area corresponds to the period specifying means.

  First, in step S6501, the storage information in the combination storage area is reset. In the following step S6502, the combination order pointer indicating which storage area of the first to sixteenth storage areas of the combination storage area is being played is set to be the first storage area.

  After that, in Step 6503, it is determined whether or not the big hit state of “15RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6503, 15RS schedule setting processing is performed in step S6504.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the present embodiment, a round schedule storage area is provided as a period specifying means for grasping an event performed in each jackpot round. Also, as shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, in the big hit state of “15RS”, after the opening effect ends, at the start of the round period, the character of the character as shown in FIG. An introduction image is derived. In step S6504, information indicating that a character introduction image is derived is stored for an area (first area) corresponding to the first round in the round schedule storage area. Further, the information indicating that the final round is stored in the 15th area, and the second variable winning device 32b that is in the open state is instructed to enter the game ball into the 8th area “V winning. Information on performing “Challenge production” is stored.

  After step S6504, in step S6505, the hit character flag of the second storage area in the combination storage area is set ON (see FIG. 51A).

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, the character derived in the scene 4 of the main effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “winning character”) in the decorative symbol variation display performed immediately before the big hit state of “15RS”. ) Is a target of the character introduction image. In addition, a hit character storage area for storing information for specifying the hit character is provided, and the character derived in the scene 4 is shown with respect to the hit character storage area when setting the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the big hit state. Information is stored.

  Note that the character introduction image is played back and displayed on layer 4. When a plurality of main characters appear in the scene 4, the target of the introduction image is determined at random (from those characters). In the present embodiment, the character introduction display corresponds to a special teaching related display (first special teaching related display) and a priority effect display (first priority effect display). In addition, the opening effect of the present embodiment is configured such that a pattern corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots (the number of jackpot states that are stacked without interposing the normal mode) is selected from a plurality of patterns. However, for example, with respect to the opening effect, a plurality of patterns associated with each character are stored, and when the opening effect is set, the pattern corresponding to the winning character is selected and reproduced. Also good.

  Furthermore, regarding the jackpot video, when the introduction image ends, a jackpot video in which a hit character appears is started soon. As will be described later, the introduction image of the character is derived corresponding to the first round of the jackpot round (from the start to the end of the first round), and if the game ball is fired normally, 1 The round ends in about 10 seconds.

  Therefore, in step S6505, the combination storage is performed so that the second jackpot video that is performed second among the jackpot videos that are 15 seconds is a jackpot video in which the hit character appears (hereinafter referred to as “hit character video”). The hit character flag of the second storage area of the area is set on (provisionally). Of the jackpot video, a hit character video in which a character that also appeared in the character introduction display appears corresponds to a special teaching related display (second special teaching related display) and a priority effect display (second priority effect display). Further, the winning character flag and the winning character storage area of the combination storage area constitute a priority effect related display storage means.

  In the subsequent step S6506, a hit character moving image pattern is set. That is, since three patterns of big hit movies are prepared corresponding to each of the characters A to H, one of them is selected by lottery.

  Further, in step S6507, a moving image to be reproduced in layer 2 is set in synchronization with the winning character moving image. That is, the length of each jackpot round is not constant because eight game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b or end after 30 seconds. Thus, for example, if it takes about 20 seconds to digest the first round, the second jackpot video has already started at the end of the first round. In this case, as described above, the second jackpot video is set as the “hit character video”, but the first 5 seconds of the hit character video is hidden in the “character introduction image” and is almost invisible. End up.

  In this regard, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the “winning character video” overlaps with other displays such as “character introduction image”, A hit game with a hit character and a character other than the specific character (hereinafter referred to as “non-specific character”) appearing on layer 2 is displayed in a dare manner. The “hit character animation” is prevented from being visually recognized. Further, the same big hit video as the “hit character video” that has not been displayed so as to be visible is displayed at a timing that does not overlap with the “character introduction image” or the like in the layer 2 so as to be synchronized with the big hit video of the layer 1 It is like that.

  In the step S6507, at the start of the big hit state, in the case where the “hit character video” overlaps with the “character introduction image” or the like, the “hit character video other than a specific character” is set to “ A setting is made so that it can be derived over the “character moving image”. After step S6507, the process proceeds to step S6511.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6503, it is determined in step S6508 whether or not a big hit state of “8RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6508, an 8RS schedule setting process is performed in step S6509. That is, information indicating that the current round is the final round is stored in the eighth area of the round schedule storage area, and the game ball is inserted into the second variable prize-winning device 32b that is opened in the eighth area. Information on performing the “V winning challenge presentation” to be taught is stored. In addition, if there is no announcement that the probability change mode will be granted, information on performing the “probability promotion challenge effect” in which the seventh area is directed to a probability change promotion Remember.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6508, an 8RN schedule setting process is performed in step S6510. That is, information indicating that it is the final round is stored in the eighth area of the round schedule storage area, and information indicating that the “probability promotion promotion effect” is stored. The V prize-winning challenge effect and the probability change promotion challenge effect are reproduced and displayed in layer 3.

  After step S6507, step S6509, or step S6510, in step S6511, a specific payout number display (2500 ball arrival display, 5000 ball arrival display, 7500 ball arrival) is performed every time 2500 game balls are paid out in the big hit state. A specific payout number display timing estimation process is performed to estimate the timing of display).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, 15 game balls are paid out when the game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the upper limit for winning to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b in the big hit round is eight. Therefore, 120 game balls are basically paid out in one round.

  In step S6511, referring to the value of the teaching opportunity counter in which the remaining number until reaching 2500 payouts is counted, the jackpot round where the value of the teaching opportunity counter is “0 or less” is estimated, and “specific” Information on which “payout number display” is scheduled to be performed is stored in the corresponding area of the round schedule storage area. Regarding the 8RN jackpot state, the 8th round is a jackpot round scheduled to display the specific payout number because the opening time of the second variable winning device 32b is very short and the number of game balls does not increase substantially. Not eligible.

  After step S6511, in step S6512, a process of setting a jackpot video (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific character video”) in which the specific character appears is performed. In the present embodiment, basically, the specific character moving image is derived once during the big hit state.

  First, in step S6512, it is determined whether or not the “specific character” matches the “winning character”. If it is determined that they match, the setting process of the specific character video is skipped. (The specific character flag described later is not set to ON). It should be noted that the number of times that the specific character moving image is derived in the big hit state is not limited to one, and may be derived a plurality of times (for example, the number of times is determined by lottery). Further, even if the “specific character” is derived from the “hit character video”, the “hit character video” may not be determined as the “specific character video” (in this case, the jackpot where the specific character appears) The video is derived twice).

  When it is determined that the “specific character” and the “hit character” do not match, the lottery is selected from the three patterns of big hit videos prepared corresponding to the characters A to H specified as the specific character. To select one.

  Further, in step S6512, the order in which the specific character moving image is derived is determined. In the present embodiment, the “specific character video” is set not to overlap with the “character introduction image”, “winning character video”, “V winning challenge presentation”, “probability promotion challenge”, “specific payout display”, etc. Is done.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 56, assuming that one round of the jackpot round is 10 seconds, the first jackpot video overlaps with the character introduction image, and the second jackpot video There is a plan to perform “character animation”, and the fifth and sixth jackpot animations are likely to overlap with “V winning challenge presentation”. In addition, the eleventh jackpot video may be interrupted along with the end of the jackpot round, and the jackpot videos in the order after that may not be played because the jackpot state has been completed so far.

  In addition, regarding the seventh jackpot video, it is desirable to open a schedule in consideration of the possibility that the “V winning challenge presentation” will be shifted later. Furthermore, it is desirable to open a plan for the tenth jackpot video in consideration of the possibility that the jackpot state will end early.

  Therefore, if a specific character moving image is derived, the third, fourth, eighth, and ninth jackpot moving images are selected. Furthermore, select the 3rd or 8th that is the first of the serial numbers so that the specific character video can be shifted suddenly in the order of the back (showing the same video as the specific character video in the next order) Will be. That is, in step S6512, in the case of the big hit state of “15RS”, it is determined whether the “specific character moving image” is set to the third or eighth.

  In the present embodiment, since the round from which the “specific payout number display” is derived is estimated by the specific payout number display timing estimation process in step S6511, for example, the “specific payout number display” is performed in the fourth round. If the possibility is high, setting a specific character video for the third jackpot video that overlaps the fourth round is avoided. Therefore, in this case, it is determined to set the specific character moving image as the eighth jackpot moving image.

  In subsequent step S6513, the specific character moving image is compared with the storage area (for example, the eighth storage area) corresponding to the order of the jackpot moving image determined as performing the specific character moving image in step S6512 among the storage areas of the combination storage area. A specific character flag indicating that the In addition, in the case of a big hit state of “15RS” where there is no possibility that the specific payout number will be displayed, a lottery will be performed to determine whether the specific character video is derived in the third or eighth order. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of the jackpot state, the specific character video is changed to “character introduction image”, “winning character video”, “V winning challenge production”, “probability promotion challenge”, and “specific In accordance with the prohibition setting that does not overlap with the `` payout number display '' etc., these jackpot rounds are specified, or the jackpot rounds that are unlikely to be performed are specified, and when there are multiple jackpot rounds, Among them, a particularly good condition is identified, and when there are a plurality of jackpot rounds, one is selected by lottery, and a specific character video is set to be played in the jackpot round. . The setting (prohibition processing) avoids a situation in which the specific character moving image overlaps with other effect display and the visual recognition of the specific character moving image is hindered.

  In the case of the big hit state of “8RS” and “8RN”, since the character introduction image and the hit character video are not set, the “specific payout number display” from the first to fourth can be avoided. Select the order. In this embodiment, the jackpot round that is highly likely to be performed is “character introduction image”, “winning character video”, “V winning challenge presentation”, “probability promotion challenge”, and “specific payout display”. It is configured to avoid and determine the timing for deriving the specific character display, but the priority of whether or not to display (corresponding to which to display when overlapping) or the display timing The priority at the time of setting (corresponding to which one is shifted when both timings are displayed even if they are overlapped) can be appropriately set for each model.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to infer the timing (big hit round) at which the specific payout number display is highly likely to be derived at the start of the jackpot state. For example, at the start of each jackpot round, It may be determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the specific payout number display is derived in the big hit round. In this case, at the start of the jackpot state, the timing of other effect display is determined without considering the timing of deriving the specific payout number display. That is, the setting of the derivation timing of the specific character video is also derived at a predetermined timing in the same manner as the “character introduction image”, “V winning challenge presentation”, and “probability promotion challenge”. (For example, it is set as the third jackpot video). Then, at the start of each jackpot round, it is determined that there is a high possibility that a specific payout number display is derived for the jackpot round, and a setting is also made in which a specific character video is derived during the jackpot round. In such a case, the timing for deriving the specific character video is changed (the display is not set to be shifted to a later timing until it does not overlap with the jackpot round, or not to be duplicated in the subsequent jackpot round. It may be configured to look for a jackpot round and change to it.

  In the present embodiment, the fact that the specific character display should not be overlapped with various non-permission displays corresponds to the “specific display prohibition condition”, and the period during which the non-permission display is derived corresponds to the “specific display prohibition period”. A function for grasping the derivation timing of the non-permitted display (setting the derivation timing of display effects corresponding to various non-permitted displays for the combination storage area and the round schedule storage area, and the combination storage area and the round schedule storage The function of referring to the area and grasping the overlap with the non-permission display) corresponds to “prohibited period specifying means”. In addition, as in the jackpot state and effect variation display, the effect display composed of a plurality of jackpot videos and a plurality of scene effects (from the start of the first round of the jackpot state to the end from the start to the end of the effect variation display “Until the end of the round, etc.) corresponds to“ composite production ”. In particular, there is an effect display in which a specific character display is derived at any timing (an effect change display in which the specific character display is derived, an effect display in a jackpot state in which at least one of the specific character video and the specific character display is derived). Corresponds to "specific content indication". Furthermore, the effects (including the opening effect and the ending effect) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 from the start to the end of the jackpot state correspond to “special game state effect display”.

  After step S6513, in step S6514, a moving image to be reproduced in layer 2 is set in synchronization with the specific character moving image. That is, in the jackpot state, when the digestion speed of the jackpot round is shortened (compared to the standard 10 seconds in this example) and the timing of the “specific payout display” is shifted, or other notification display (error display, etc.) ) May overlap with the specific character video. In FIG. 57 showing the flow of the jackpot state of “8RS”, a special character video is used as the second jackpot video among the jackpot videos performed every 15 seconds (in FIG. 57, the jackpot video where the character C appears is designated as the specific character video. Is set). However, the digestion of the first round is delayed (more than 5 seconds from the standard 10 seconds in this example), and the end timing of the first round is after the start of the second jackpot video. In this embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, the specific character video is configured to be viewed in a manner that does not overlap with other displays as much as possible.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the “specific character video” overlaps with other displays, the “specific character video” performed in layer 1 is changed to “non-specific character video” in layer 2. It is displayed so as to cover it so that the “specific character moving image” is not visually recognized. Furthermore, the same jackpot video as the “specific character video” that has not been displayed so as to be visible is displayed in the layer 2 so as to be synchronized with the jackpot video of the layer 1 at a timing that does not overlap with other displays. Yes.

  In step S6514, at the start of the jackpot state, “specific character video” is changed to “specific character video” in layer 2 in preparation for the case where the “specific character video” overlaps with other displays. A setting is made so that it can be derived. That is, when both the layer 1 video and the layer 2 video are played and both are visible, only the upper layer 2 video is visible and the layer 1 video is not visible. Is done. On the other hand, even when both the layer 1 movie and the layer 2 movie are played back, if the layer 2 is not displayed, the layer 1 movie is visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined video is not displayed, the video is displayed in a layer above the layer where the predetermined video is displayed, so that the predetermined video is hidden. Although it is configured so that it is not displayed, for example, a predetermined moving image to be hidden is replaced with a moving image to be displayed (reproduction data of the predetermined moving image is deleted and newly generated moving image reproduction data is generated. The predetermined moving image may not be set at a timing at which the display of the predetermined moving image may be canceled. Further, for example, instead of simultaneously reproducing a moving image or the like in a plurality of layers, it may be configured to generate and reproduce only a visually displayed moving image, such as a 3DCG animation that performs rendering in real time. Further, for example, although a plurality of reproduction data that may be displayed are generated in parallel, rather than providing a plurality of layers, the reproduction data to be displayed is selected and derived (select when switching videos). The reproduction data may be changed).

  Note that, even in the jackpot state of “8RS” or “8RN”, a display corresponding to the “hit character” (introduction image of the character in this example) is derived at the start of the jackpot round (first round). May be. Further, when the introduction image of the character corresponding to the “hit character” is omitted, the “hit character video” may be set as the first jackpot video. In addition, regarding the opening effect, a pattern corresponding to each character may be prepared, and a pattern corresponding to the character appearing in the effect variation display in which the big hit state is taught may be selected. Furthermore, a configuration in which a pattern corresponding to a hit character is selected as a character introduction image or a jackpot video that is visually displayed from the beginning after the character introduction image is completed may be omitted.

  After step S6514, in step S6515, the NG number flag used for the setting that avoids the same big hit video being continued or the like is set. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, 40 patterns are prepared. An NG number flag group is provided as specific effect display specifying means composed of 40 NG number flags individually associated with each jackpot video.

  For example, assuming that the NG number flag corresponds to the value of the combination determination counter (see FIG. 50), in step S6515, all of the individual jackpot videos of the characters used as the hit character video (three in this example). NG number flag corresponding to) and NG number flags corresponding to all (three in this example) of individual jackpot moving images of the character used as the specific character moving image. Note that there are basically a total of six NG number flags that are set to ON, but a total of three when the winning character matches the specific character.

  Subsequently, in step S6516, a jackpot video is set for the remaining storage areas in which no winning character video or specific character video is set in the combination storage area. A combination determination counter having a value of “1 to 40” is used and a pattern of a jackpot moving image is selected with reference to the combination determination table. Further, referring to the NG number flag group, when the target NG number flag is OFF, the NG number flag is turned ON, and the big hit moving image pattern is stored in the target storage area of the combination storage area.

  If the NG number flag corresponding to the selected jackpot video pattern is on, the value indicating the jackpot video pattern is incremented by 1 (in the case of 40, it is set to 1), and the NG number flag of that value is off. It is determined whether or not. This is repeated until an affirmative determination is made, and when an affirmative determination is made, the corresponding NG number flag is turned on, and a jackpot video pattern corresponding to the NG number flag that is set to ON is set in the target storage area of the combination storage area. Remember. This is repeated until the big hit moving image pattern is stored in all 16 storage areas of the combination storage area.

  By setting the jackpot video as described above, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character display is processed as an effect display other than the specific character display and overlaps with the disapproval display. In addition, since the NG number flag is set to ON corresponding to the pattern of the jackpot video set in the combination storage area, the same jackpot video is kept until the series of jackpot videos stored in the combination storage area is completed. Is not derived.

  In step S6517, a pending continuous challenge effect is set to suggest / teach that the variation information that is reserved at the start of the jackpot state includes a bonus game. In the present embodiment, if the current big hit state is the first hit, the hold consecutive challenge effect is not performed, and a probability of 3/4 is included in the case where the change display that is held includes a big hit This is executed with a probability of 1/20 if there is no jackpot in the suspended display of variation. In addition, the reservation continuous challenge effect is performed in layer 3. In addition, since “character introduction image”, “winning character video”, “V prize winning challenge production”, “probability promotion challenge production”, and “specific character video” are prioritized over “pending series challenge production”. The “pending consecutive challenge effect” is set to be derived at a timing that does not overlap with these displays (if the timing of these displays deviates to overlap with the timing of the hold consecutive challenge effect, The timing is changed), and is omitted particularly when there is no room for deriving the reserved continuous challenge effect in the big hit state. In addition, the “specific payout display” has the same timing of derivation as the “character introduction image”, “winning character video”, “V prize winning challenge effect”, “probability promotion challenge effect”, and “pending consecutive challenge effect”. In this case, it is derived as it is.

  It should be noted that the “winning character video” and “holding continuous challenge effect” that can shift the derivation timing may be configured to avoid duplication with the specific payout number display by shifting these derivation timings. . Further, in the present embodiment, among the “non-permission display”, when it is determined that the specific character display overlaps, the “character introduction image” and the “V prize winning challenge effect” for adjusting the derivation timing of the specific character display. ”,“ Probability Change Promotion Challenge ”, etc. correspond to“ First Disapproval Display ”, and adjust the derivation timing of the disapproval display when it is determined that it overlaps with the specific character display. "Corresponds to" second disapproval display ".

  When deriving the specific payout number display, it is determined whether or not the specific payout number display and the specific character video overlap, and when it is determined that they overlap, the timing at which the specific character video is visually displayed is 1 It may be set so that another jackpot video (a jackpot video other than the specific character video) can be displayed in the order in which the specific character video was supposed to be displayed visually. Good.

  Furthermore, in step S6517, when it is determined to perform the hold continuous challenge effect, a jackpot round for executing the hold continuous challenge is selected. In this embodiment, not the big hit round in which the character introduction image, the specific payout display, the V prize challenge production, and the probability variation promotion production are performed, and the big hit round that does not overlap with the win character video and the specific character video ( In the case of FIGS. 51 and 56, the sixth round) is selected.

  In a succeeding step S6518, a hold continuous challenge flag indicating that a hold continuous challenge effect is to be performed on the storage area corresponding to the jackpot round selected in the step S6517 in the round schedule storage area is set on. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot video for 15 seconds is equivalent to “periodic effect display”, and the jackpot video is connected from the start of the round period (start of the first round) to the end (end of the final round). The displayed effect display (background moving image) corresponds to the “first effect display”. In addition, “Character introduction image”, “V winning challenge production”, “Probability promotion promotion challenge”, etc., which are set corresponding to a predetermined jackpot round and the length from start to finish are variable, This corresponds to “second effect display”. Further, the “specific character moving image” corresponds to “periodic specific effect display”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S4710, in step S4711, the jackpot video standby flag indicating that the system is waiting for the start of the jackpot round is set on, and then the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4712 whether the sub-side big hit flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining time measurement timer in step S4713. In the subsequent step S4714, it is determined whether or not the remaining time measurement timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4714, that is, if it is time to update the moving image performed in layer 1, it is determined in step S4715 whether or not the big hit moving image standby flag is set on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4715, that is, when the opening effect is finished and the first round is started, in step S4716, the big hit video standby flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S4718.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4715, the combination order pointer is updated in step S4717 so that the combination order pointer indicates the storage area next to the combination storage area.

  In step S4718, a big hit video individual start process performed at the start of each big hit video is performed.

  Here, the jackpot video individual start processing in step S4718 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S6601, it is determined whether or not a specific character flag indicating that a specific character moving image is to be reproduced is set on in the storage area of the combination storage area indicated by the combination order pointer. When an affirmative determination is made in step S6601, in step S6602, non-permission displays such as “specific payout number display” and error display are being derived, and if the specific character video is derived, It is determined whether or not the display overlaps. If a negative determination is made in step S6602, that is, even if the specific character video is derived and can be displayed without overlapping the disapproval display, in step S6603 the layer 2 where the non-specific character video is reproduced. Is switched to non-display, and then this process is terminated. As a result, the specific character video is displayed as the jackpot video in the order set at the beginning of the jackpot state, as planned at the beginning of the jackpot state.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6602, in step S6604, a specific character standby flag indicating that the specific character moving image scheduled to be displayed has not been displayed yet is set on.

  In subsequent step S6605, layer 2 is switched to visible display. In other words, in layer 2, since the non-specific character video is reproduced (synchronized) with the jackpot video in the order that will be performed from now on in layer 1, it is reproduced in layer 1 by switching layer 2 to visible display. -The displayed specific character video is not visible.

  Further, in step S6606, a specific character moving image to be overlapped with the next jackpot moving image is set in layer 2. In other words, in the current jackpot video, the specific character video could not be viewed, so if possible, the setting to have the specific character video (the same video) viewed in the next jackpot video (Generation of specific character moving image of layer 2) is performed. After step S6606, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6601, it is determined in step S6607 whether or not the specific character standby flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 6607, whether or not the disallowed display is being derived in step S 6608 and if the specific character video is derived, whether or not the specific character video and the disallowed display overlap. Determine.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6608, it is determined in step S6609 whether or not there is a possibility that the final round of the jackpot round will end during the current jackpot video and the ending effect may be entered. If a negative determination is made in step S6609, layer 2 is switched to visible display in step S6610. In other words, in layer 2, it is duplicated (synchronized) with the jackpot video performed in layer 1 (reproduced as a jackpot video that has just been completed in layer 1, but overlapped with the jackpot video in layer 2 and is a non-specific character video Since the specific character video (which was not visually recognized by the player since it was visually displayed) is reproduced (same video as the same video), the layer 2 is reproduced and displayed by switching to the visible display. Character animation other than specific is not visible. Accordingly, the derivation timing is changed so that the specific character moving image does not overlap with the unauthorized display.

  After step S6610, in step S6611, the specific character standby flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

  If the determination in step S6608 is affirmative, in step S6612 a layer 2 specific character video to be overlapped with the next jackpot video (non-specific character video) performed in layer 1 is set. Thereafter, layer 2 is switched to non-display in step S6613, and then this process is terminated.

  It should be noted that at the start of the non-permission display such as the sub effect and the notification effect, it is determined whether or not the non-permission display overlaps with the specific character video. It is determined which of the display and the specific character display is prioritized, and the derivation timing which is not prioritized is set so as to avoid duplication. For example, as shown in <special case> in FIG. 56, the second jackpot moving image (moving image of the character C that is the specific character moving image) performed in the layer 1 is not permitted display (predetermined over the specific character moving image). Error notification display), the character video (alternative effect display) other than layer 2 that is reproduced overlapping the specific character video is made visible and the third jackpot video (specific In such a manner, the setting is performed so that the same specific character moving image (re-display effect display) as the specific character moving image whose visual display has been stopped is reproduced in layer 2.

  As a result, in the second jackpot video, the character video other than the specific of layer 2 is visually recognized, and in the third jackpot video, the specific character video of the layer 2 is visually recognized. However, in the <special case> of FIG. 56, the error notification display is also duplicated in the third jackpot video. For this reason, at the start of the second jackpot video, the overlap between the specific character video of layer 2 and the error notification display is grasped, the layer 2 (re-effect display) is hidden, and the non-specific character display of layer 1 is displayed. In addition to the visual recognition, the setting is made so that the specific character video (reproduction display) is reproduced in layer 2 (the visual display of the specific character video is further postponed) so as to overlap the fourth jackpot video of layer 1 Do. After that, at the start of the fourth jackpot video, if there is no overlap between the disallowed display (error notification display) prioritized over the specific character video and the specific character video, layer 2 in the fourth jackpot video The specific character moving image will be visibly displayed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6609, the specific character standby flag is turned off in step S6614. Thereafter, layer 2 is switched to non-display in step S6613 described above, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6607, it is determined in step S6615 whether or not the hit character flag is set on in the storage area of the combination storage area indicated by the combination order pointer (basically, “ 15RS ", the hit character flag is set on in the second storage area).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6615, in step S6616, whether or not the first round of the jackpot round has ended, and in turn whether or not the character introduction screen performed in synchronization with the first round has ended. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6616, in step S6617, a disallowed display such as “specific payout number display” or error display is being derived, and if the winning character video is derived, It is determined whether or not the display overlaps. If a negative determination is made in step S6617, the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the hit character moving image is displayed as the second jackpot moving image as planned at the beginning of “15RS” (layer 2 where the character moving image other than the specific one is played remains “hidden”).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6616, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S6617, in step S6618, a winning character standby flag indicating that the hit character moving image to be displayed has not been displayed yet is displayed. Set to ON.

  In subsequent step S6619, layer 2 is switched to visible display. That is, in layer 2, since the character video other than the specific is reproduced (synchronized) with the second jackpot video performed in layer 1, the layer 2 is switched to visible display so that The displayed hit character animation is not visible.

  Further, in step S6620, a hit character video to be overlapped with the next (third) jackpot video is set in layer 2. In other words, in this jackpot video, the hit character video could not be viewed, so if possible, the setting to have the hit character video (the same video) visible in the next jackpot video (Generation of hit character animation for layer 2) is performed. After step S6620, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6615, it is determined in step S6621 whether the winning character standby flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S6621, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6621, it is determined in step S6622 whether or not the first round has ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6622, in step S6623, a disallowed display such as “specific payout number display” or error display is being derived, and if the winning character video is derived, It is determined whether or not the display overlaps.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6623, layer 2 is switched to visible display in step S6624. That is, in layer 2, it is duplicated (synchronized) with the jackpot video performed in layer 1 (reproduced as the second jackpot video in layer 1, but overlapped with the jackpot video in layer 2 and a non-specific character video Since the player's character video (same video) is played back), the layer 2 is switched to the visible display and is played back / displayed on the layer 1 Character animation other than specific is not visible. Accordingly, the derivation timing is changed so that the hit character moving image does not overlap with the character introduction image and other non-permitted displays. Note that even if the display is not permitted (positive determination in step S6623), if it is determined that the pending consecutive challenge effect whose priority is set lower than that of the hit character video and the hit character video are duplicated, the hold is held. The derivation timing of the continuous challenge effect is changed (then, the process proceeds to step S6624). The derivation timing of the reserved continuous challenge effect may be changed before and after step S6624, or may be set at the time of starting the reserved continuous challenge effect.

  After step S6624, in step S6625, the winning character standby flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6622, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S6623, layer 2 is switched to non-display in step S6626. For example, when a non-specific character video of layer 2 overlapped with the second hit character video of layer 1 is displayed as a visual display, the hit character video is played back at layer 2 by overlapping with the third non-specific character video of layer 1 However, if the third jackpot video (non-specific character video) of layer 1 also overlaps with the character introduction image or other unauthorized display, layer 2 is not displayed in step S6626. Thus, the character video other than the specific layer 1 is visually recognized.

  Further, in subsequent step S6627, a hit character video of layer 2 to be overlapped with the next big hit video (non-specific character video) performed in layer 1 is set. After step S6627, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S4718, in step S4719, a value “1750” corresponding to 15 seconds of the jackpot moving image is set to the remaining time measurement timer.

  After step S4719 or if a negative determination is made in step S4714, it is determined in step S4720 whether a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4720, in step S4721, a round display setting for performing a round display indicating the current number of jackpot rounds is performed. For example, if “15RS” and the value of the round grasp counter is “15”, “first round” is displayed. The eighth round of “8RN” does not derive a round display.

  In a succeeding step S4722, it is determined whether or not the first round of “15RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7222, the character introduction setting for deriving the character introduction image in layer 4 is performed in step S4723 by referring to the round schedule storage area (see FIG. 51B). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4728.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4722, the storage area of the round schedule storage area corresponding to the jackpot round indicated by the round grasp counter is checked in step S4724, and whether or not the pending consecutive challenge flag is set on. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 4724, in step S 4725, a setting for deriving a reserved continuous challenge effect is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4728.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4724, the storage area of the round schedule storage area corresponding to the jackpot round indicated by the round grasp counter is confirmed in step S4726, and whether or not the probability variation promotion challenge flag is set on. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S4726, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4726, settings are made in step S4727 for deriving a probable promotion challenge effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4728.

  In step S4728, in parallel with the derivation of the sub-effects for which the derivation setting has been performed (character introduction image, reserved series challenge effect, probability variation promotion challenge effect, etc.), the sub-effect of the pattern in which the specific character appears is layer 2 or layer In step 5, a process for non-display reproduction (rear channel display) is performed. However, it is not necessary to set the back channel when the sub-effect itself is a specific character display. Note that the back channel display of the character introduction image (layer 4) is played back at layer 5, and the back channel display of the pending consecutive challenge effect and the probability change promotion challenge effect (layer 3) is played back at layer 2.

  After step S4728, in step S4729, it is determined whether or not the sub effect overlaps with the specific character video performed in “Layer 1” (whether or not the specific character video is being displayed). In other words, at the start of the big hit state, the specific character display and the non-permission display are avoided so that the specific character display is set, but the length of the big hit round is not constant. Even at the start of each sub-effect, the overlap between the specific character display and the disapproval display is confirmed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4729, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4729, it is determined in step S4730 whether the sub-effect is a specific character display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4730, settings relating to stock effects are made in step S4731. That is, processing for deriving a stock effect is performed, and processing for adding stock points is performed. After step S4731, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4730, it is determined in step S4732 whether or not the sub effect is a pending consecutive challenge effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4732, in step S4733, processing for changing the derivation timing of the pending consecutive challenge effect is performed. That is, the pending consecutive challenge flag is turned on in a storage area where the predetermined sub-effect flag is not set on in the round schedule storage area (if there is no space, the pending consecutive challenge flag is not set on). After step S4733, the process ends.

  In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S4732, that is, the sub-production is a probability variation promotion challenge production, a character introduction (in this example, since the character introduction is derived only in the first round, it substantially overlaps). However, in the case of a V prize challenge effect described later, in step S4734, a process for changing the timing of deriving the specific character video instead of the sub-effect is performed. In other words, “layer 2” in which a non-specific character moving image is reproduced without being displayed is made visible, and the next jackpot moving image is rewritten to a specific character moving image. After step S4734, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4720, it is determined in step S4735 whether or not a V winning round command has been received from main controller 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4735, settings are made in step S4736 for deriving a V prize challenge effect.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4728 described above, and when the V prize challenge effect is not a specific character display in which the specific character appears, the V prize challenge effect of the pattern in which the specific character appears is reproduced on the layer 2 (however, This processing is terminated after the processing for display) is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4735, it is determined in step S4737 whether or not a short round command has been received from main controller 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4737, effect setting for a short round is performed in step S4738. In other words, since the second variable prize-winning device 32b is at the start of the eighth round of “8RN” that is open for 0.1 seconds, the seventh round jackpot video is not interrupted. Then, a setting is made for deriving an effect that connects the ending effect without a sense of incongruity (the display form of the decorative symbol display device 42 is inherited as it is, and is terminated after 0.1 second). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4737, it is determined in step S4739 whether or not an interval command has been received from main controller 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4739, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4740, the round display is erased in step S4741, and the process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4739, it is determined in step S4742 in FIG. 38 whether or not an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4742, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4743, and an ending effect of 10 seconds is set in step S4744. In addition, although the ending effect of this embodiment is comprised so that the pattern according to the jackpot type may be selected from a plurality of patterns, for example, the ending effect is also a plurality associated with each character. This pattern may be stored, and the pattern corresponding to the winning character may be selected and reproduced when setting the ending effect. Further, for example, the hit character may be continuously displayed from the beginning to the end of the big hit state. That is, for example, the jackpot video in the big hit state may be selected from a hit character video, a video in which the hit character and other characters appear, or a part of the decorative symbol display device 42 ( For example, in a normal gaming state, the winning character may be continuously displayed in the area where the stock point display 465 is displayed.

  After step S4744, in step S4745, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4745, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4745, processing for setting a background moving image derived in layer 1 is performed in step S4746. As described above, the background moving image pattern is determined and stored in the four storage areas of the background moving image storage area, and the background moving image pointer is set to indicate the first storage area in the background moving image storage area.

  In a succeeding step S4747, it is determined whether or not the background moving image indicated by the background moving image pointer is a specific character display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4747, the specific background video flag is set on in step S4748. In addition, when the specific background video flag is set to ON in step S4748, the main effect overlapping with the background video that is the specific character display is set to “non-display” when setting the variation display of the decorative symbols (the accompanying effect display). (Except for the case where the main effect is also a specific character display), the decorative design overlapping the background video of the specific character display is set to “mini display”, and the sub effect overlapping the background video of the specific character display is canceled. become.

  After step S4748 or when a negative determination is made in step S4747, in step S4749, a value corresponding to 15 seconds is set for the background moving image timer, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4742, it is determined in step S4750 whether or not a specific payout number display flag indicating that the specific payout number display is performed is set on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4750, in step S4751, processing for deriving a specific payout number display is performed in layer 4, and in step S4752, a specific character display is displayed in layer 5 in synchronization with the specific payout number display. As a back channel display, a specific payout number display of a pattern in which a specific character (character C in FIG. 56) appears is set. The back channel display (layer 5) is basically hidden, and the back channel display is visible when the specific effect button 127 is operated in a state where there is a right to derive the specific character display (there is stock). It is displayed.

  In step S4753, the specific payout number display flag is turned off. After step S4753 or when a negative determination is made in step S4750, whether or not the specific effect button 127 is pressed is determined in step S4754 based on the corresponding detection information. If a negative determination is made in step S4754, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4754, it is determined in step S4755 whether or not there is a right to derive a specific character display (there is stock, there are 5 or more stock points). If a negative determination is made in step S4755, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4755, it is determined in step S4756 whether the back channel display (not displayed in layer 2 or layer 5) is being reproduced. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4756, processing for switching the back channel display to visible display is performed in step S4757. In a succeeding step S4758, 1 is subtracted from the stock (5 is subtracted from the stock point), and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4756, it is determined in step S4759 whether or not it is the timing overlapping with the specific character display (specific character video) when a predetermined effect is derived. If a negative determination is made in step S4759, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4759, in step S4760, the setting for deriving the back effect is performed, and then this process ends. The back effect is, for example, a dedicated effect, a specific character display from which a specific character is derived, or an effect that is difficult to be derived normally, and can be set as appropriate. In the present embodiment, for example, a specific character display is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, and a part effect in which the effect handle 401 performs a predetermined operation is derived.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S <b> 3909, change stop processing related to stop of change display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, processing for stopping and displaying the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed in step S4402.

  After step S4402, it is determined in step S4403 whether a support end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S4403 is affirmative, in step S4404, the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed from "probability change stage" or "retraction stage" to "normal stage". I do.

  In subsequent step S4405, the continuous-changing flag is turned off, and in step S4406, continuous-changing end count display processing for teaching the content of the continuous-changing (total number of payouts, etc.) is performed, and then this processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process in step S3910, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device.

  In the sound setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error occurrence notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3911.

  In step S 3912, other processing such as control setting for a waiting-for-waiting effect is performed. That is, when the state in which the player is not playing continues for a specified time, the decoration pattern display device 42 does not display a decoration symbol as a waiting for customer effect (alternatively) A series of moving images are displayed or a still image is displayed), and a demonstration screen display such as a dark screen is derived.

  In step S3913, external output processing for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3906 to S3913 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3906 to S3913 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3914, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step S3915 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that the information about the occurrence of power interruption is stored, the power interruption process is executed in step S3916. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, any one of the characters A to H displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 according to the input by the player with the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 is set as the specific character. The specific character display in which the specific character appears is preferentially displayed.

  More specifically, in the normal mode and the time reduction mode, when starting the production variation display, after setting the main production and the sub production, it is determined whether the specific character display exists in the main production, When there is a specific character display, it is determined whether or not there is a sub-display (non-permitted display such as button effect) overlapping therewith. And about the sub display which overlaps with a specific character, it is changed to the timing which does not overlap. That is, at the start of the production variation display, it is determined whether or not the specific character display of the main production and the non-permission display of the sub production are overlapped. This is changed (see step S6111, etc. in FIG. 45). For example, as in the setting of the second effect variation display in FIG. 48, the animation of the character C as “specific character display” performed in “layer 1” and “non-permission display” performed in “layer 4”. When the button effect overlaps, the button effect is changed at a timing that does not overlap the character C video.

  Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the big hit state, after setting “V winning challenge effect”, “character introduction image”, and “specific payout display” (and further, setting “winning character video” Is set) so that the “specific character moving image” is derived at a timing that does not overlap with them. That is, for example, when the jackpot state is started, as shown in FIG. 56, the video of the character C as the specific character display performed in “Layer 1” is performed in “Layer 3”. It is set so as not to overlap with the V winning challenge effect as “permission display”, the character introduction image as “non-permission display” performed in “Layer 4”, and the specific payout display (see FIG. 53, step S6512, etc.). ).

  Furthermore, as shown in <special case> of FIG. 56, after the start of the jackpot state (after setting of various effects display during the jackpot state), suddenly, “Layer 4” is applied to the moving image of the character C as the specific character display. When the error notification display is repeated, the moving image of the character C is changed in timing so that the moving image of the character C is derived after the error notification display ends. That is, in the present embodiment, at the start of the specific character video, it is determined whether or not the specific character video and the non-permission display overlap (FIG. 54; step S6601, step S6602). When it is determined that they overlap, the specific character video is changed so that it is visible in the next order, and in the order (period) in which the specific character video should be visible, another jackpot A moving image (moving image other than the specific character moving image) is derived (visible when the error notification display is erased).

  In addition, as shown in the jackpot state display setting in FIG. 57, after the start of the jackpot state, the specific payout number of “Layer 4” is suddenly applied to the moving image of the character C as the specific character display (specific character moving image). If the display overlaps (the specific payout number display is not predicted, the specific payout number display overlaps with the next jackpot video, and the specific payout number display is The timing of the moving image of the character C is changed so that the moving image of the character C is derived after the specific payout number display ends. That is, when starting the specific character video, when the first area of the round schedule storage area corresponding to the current big hit round is referred to, information indicating that the specific payout number display that is a non-permission display is stored. Therefore, the visible display of the specific character moving image is changed to the next order, and instead, the jackpot moving image other than the specific character is set to be displayed visually. In this embodiment, the jackpot video other than the specific character of the layer 2 that is displayed in place of the specific character video corresponds to the alternative effect display, and is performed in the layer 2 after the alternative effect display, and the layer 1 is invisible. The jackpot video that is the same as the specific character video corresponds to the re-production display.

  Also, in step S4729 in FIG. 37, when the sub-effect in the big hit state is derived (start of disapproval display), it is determined that it overlaps with the jackpot video (the jackpot video is being played back). Is a pending consecutive challenge production, the timing of the pending consecutive challenge production is changed (step S4733), and in the case of the V winning challenge production, the character introduction display, and the probability change promotion challenge production, the timing of the jackpot video is changed ( Step S4734).

  As described above, the “V winning challenge effect”, “character introduction image”, “specific payout number display”, and “error notification display” are non-permitted displays that are not permitted to overlap with the specific character display. On the other hand, there is a permission display that can be overlapped with the specific character display (for example, the display of FIG. 43 (e) with respect to the specific character display of FIG. 43 (d)). Even if the timing is duplicated, it is derived in such a manner that it is duplicated as it is. In other words, with regard to the “specific character display”, in order to allow the player to fully enjoy the display, a display in which the visual appearance of the specific character display is hindered by being derived in duplicate with the specific character display is “ It is set as “non-permission display”, and the derivation timing is adjusted so that the specific character display and the non-permission display do not overlap. On the other hand, display effects that enhance the specific character display and displays that do not substantially obstruct the visual aspect of the specific character display are not set as “non-permitted display” (“permitted display”) Duplication with character display is allowed.

  As described above, in the normal mode, the time reduction mode, and the jackpot state, the specific character display and the non-permission display are set so as not to overlap at the start of the effect variation display and the start of the jackpot state ( Forbidden processing is performed). Furthermore, the specific character animation in the big hit state, and the specific character display at the start of each non-permission display (the effect display corresponding to the big hit round, the display for performing predetermined teaching / notification), and the non-permission Setting (change of derivation timing) is performed so that the display does not overlap. For this reason, one of the specific character display and the non-permission display is omitted, or one or both are difficult to recognize because the specific character display and the non-permission display overlap. It is possible to avoid a situation such as the specific character display and the non-permission display intermingled to make each display difficult to understand. Moreover, it can be visually recognized through a specific character display or a disapproval display (a situation such as being interrupted and then restarting from where it was interrupted can be avoided). Accordingly, the derivation of the specific character display that the player is looking forward to is prevented by the derivation of the disapproval display, and the situation where the player accumulates stress can be avoided, and the disapproval display can be visually recognized. it can. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the character introduction image corresponding to the first round in the jackpot state, the V winning challenge production corresponding to the eighth round, and the total number of game balls paid out in the jackpot state are performed at a timing exceeding the prescribed number. The specific payout number display timing is configured to be performed at the original timing (so that the specific character display derivation timing is managed). In other words, it is meaningless to derive a V prize challenge effect for encouraging game balls to enter the second variable prize apparatus 32b other than the eighth round in which the second variable prize apparatus 32b is opened. The timing for deriving the V prize challenge production must not be shifted from the eighth round. Also, regarding the specific payout display, if the timing of derivation is postponed because it overlaps with the specific character display, the specific payout display and the actual payout total of the actual game balls will deviate. The value (meaning) of the payout number display information is lost. Furthermore, in the character introduction image, the character that appeared in the variable display with the jackpot displayed (or the character of the jackpot symbol may be configured, or the jackpot symbol and the character that appeared in the variable display may be matched). However, when the timing is far from the start of the big hit state, it is difficult to understand the correspondence, so it is desirable that the timing be as close as possible.

  In this regard, the “character introduction image”, “V winning challenge presentation”, and “specific payout number display” are set with a derivation timing before the specific character video, and the specific character video does not overlap with many of these. For this reason, the timings of “character introduction image”, “V winning challenge presentation”, and “specific payout number display” are maintained, and the derivation timing of these “notification display” is maintained. Due to the delay, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the information obtained from the notification display becomes old and loses its value, loses its meaning, or contradicts. Therefore, the information on the notification display can be obtained reliably at the original timing, and the game can proceed with peace of mind based on the information on the notification display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation mode, when the specific character video is derived from the big hit video of layer 1, the variation display of the decorative pattern of layer 3 is mini-displayed (see FIG. 49). ). For this reason, although it is better for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display even when it overlaps with the specific character video, there is a concern that the display mode as it is would hinder the visual mode of the specific character video. Can be wiped off. In addition, the specific character video can be viewed in the original display mode.

  In addition, in the first round of the big hit state of “15RS”, the character introduction image in which the same character as the character (hit character) that appeared in the scene 4 of the effect variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the big hit state is taught appears. Is displayed in layer 4 (character introduction display is performed) (see FIG. 56). Furthermore, with respect to the jackpot video sequentially derived at layer 1 from the start to the end of the jackpot round (from the end of the opening stage to the start of the ending stage), the first after the end of the display of the character introduction image (first round) The hit character animation in which the hit character appears is selected as the big hit movie starting at the time.

  Therefore, from the teaching of the occurrence of the jackpot state of “15RS” in the effect variation display to the beginning of the jackpot state of “15RS”, it is possible to connect the effect display (display of the hit character) related to each other, and the occurrence of the jackpot state Can be connected smoothly to the big hit state. Therefore, in a situation that is very delightful to the player that the jackpot state is won and the jackpot state is started, a more impressive effect can be derived, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Further, by visually recognizing the display related to the effect display of the effect variation display in which the jackpot is taught at the beginning of the jackpot state (the hit character in the above example), a recollection of how the occurrence of the jackpot state was taught in the effect variation display The effect of the effect change display and the effect display during the jackpot state can be synergistically enhanced.

  In addition, because of the configuration, the effect display in which the hit character appears is made conscious (attention), and therefore the effect display in which the hit character appears is interrupted for some reason in the big hit state, and the visual recognition is hindered. If you do, there is a concern that you may feel offended. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the hit character moving image is configured not to overlap with the character introduction image and other non-permitted displays (see step S6615 to step S6627 in FIG. 55), and thus dispels this concern. It is possible to enjoy the presentation display in the big hit state more pleasantly.

  Furthermore, since the winning character animation is derived while the scene 4 effect display (winning effect display) and the character introduction image storage are new, the scene 4 effect display results. The significance of can be strengthened. Therefore, the effect display of the scene 4 can be made more interesting, and the game performance can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific character moving image is derived once during the big hit state. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot state, it is grasped in advance that a disapproval effect (character introduction image, V-winning challenge effect, probability variation promotion challenge effect) is derived corresponding to a specific jackpot round, and the disapproval display On the other hand, it is set so that the specific character moving images are derived at a timing such that they do not overlap as much as possible. That is, after the setting for deriving the specific character video is made, changing the setting of the specific character video (resetting) just because the non-permission display is derived leads to complicated processing and the specific character video. Since there is a concern that it may cause a predetermined defect (displacement, etc.) in the above aspect, when setting the specific character video, by setting as much as possible to avoid duplication with non-permission display, Such a concern can be suppressed. Furthermore, by setting the derivation timing of the specific character video according to the derivation timing of the disapproval display at the start of the jackpot state, for example, it has been found that there is an overlap with the disapproval effect when the specific character video is started The situation where there is no room for change can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each time the number of game balls to be paid out (total number of payouts) is increased by about 2500 in the big win state based on the balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the decoration symbol display device 42 specifies A payout number display is derived. The specific payout number display is a disapproval display, and at the start of the jackpot state, it is determined which jackpot round the specific payout number display is likely to be derived, and avoiding the jackpot round, the specific character video as much as possible The order of a plurality of jackpot videos to be derived in the jackpot state is determined so as not to overlap with the specific payout number display. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly take measures such as reducing the possibility of duplication of the derivation timing of the specific character video according to the prediction of the timing at which the specific payout number display is derived. In particular, during the derivation of the specific character video, a situation in which either the specific character video and the specific payout number display are suddenly interrupted or derived, or the specific character video is interrupted. It can be avoided.

  The overlap determination between the specific character display (specific character moving image) and the disapproval display (including the specific character display) is not only performed at the start of the jackpot state (step S4710) but also at the start of the specific character display (step S4718). ) And at the start of the disapproval display (steps S4720 to S4736). For this reason, even if the timing of the disapproval display or the specific character display changes suddenly after the start of the jackpot state (a jackpot video as a disapproval content effect or a specific display content effect), duplication is avoided. It is possible to take appropriate measures. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of avoiding the overlap between the non-permission display and the specific character display can be achieved more reliably.

  Regarding the effect variation display, the overlap between the specific character display and the disapproval display is determined at the start of the effect variation display, and after the start of the specific character display, at the time of the error notification display and the start of the background video, An overlap with the permission display is determined, and a corresponding process (stock display process or the like) is performed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the non-permission display overlapping with the specific character display (specific character video) is the specific character display and the general effect display other than the notification display (button effect, hold challenge effect, etc.) The derivation timing of the effect display is changed, and the derivation timing of the specific character display is not changed. For this reason, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the specific character display to be derived, and when the specific character display is derived, it is possible to avoid the overlap with the general effect display and enjoy the specific character display. it can. Furthermore, since the derivation timing of the specific character display is also maintained (in the case where it was originally overlapped with the general effect display), the situation where the specific character display is not derived at the timing of the heel where the specific character display is derived is suppressed. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of such a situation.

  In the above embodiment, in the big hit state, the big hit video is derived a plurality of times in layer 1, one of which is the specific character video and the layer 2 displayed on the upper side (front side) of layer 1 As a substitute effect display overlapping with the specific character video, a video of a character other than the specific is derived (see S6507 in FIG. 53, FIG. 56). And, when the specific character video is derived, if the specific character video suddenly (unlike the prediction at the start of the big hit state), it overlaps with the notification display (specific payout display etc.) The second layer is visible (display state), and the specific character moving image of the first layer is not visible. On the other hand, when the specific character video does not overlap with the disapproval display, the second layer is hidden (non-display state), and the specific character video is displayed so as to be visible as scheduled.

  That is, for example, after the setting of a specific character video, if it is determined to derive a notification display that overlaps with the specific character video, if the content of the specific character video is changed (redoed), the sub-control There is a concern that the control burden of the device 262 will increase significantly, or the risk of occurrence of a predetermined defect (such as a deviation) in the specific character video will increase. In addition, for example, it may be difficult to delete the moving image data generated (generated) as the specific character moving image and replace it with another moving image data.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, when a specific character video is derived, it is set so that a non-specific character video can be derived in synchronization with the specific character video, and the specific character video and the notification display suddenly appear. In a case where the derivation timing of the specific character video is to be changed in the case of overlapping, basically the specific character video of layer 1 (processing related to) is left as it is, and the character video other than the specific of layer 2 is selected. By simply switching to the display state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character moving image and the notification display overlap each other.

  In addition, when a character video other than specified in layer 2 is displayed in a visible manner, it cannot be viewed because it overlaps with a character other than specified in layer 2 so as to overlap with the jackpot video in the next order. It is set so that the same jackpot moving image as the specific character moving image is derived in layer 2 (see <special case> in FIGS. 54 and 56). When it is determined that the specific character moving image of layer 2 does not overlap with the notification display, layer 2 is displayed visually. That is, by deriving the same jackpot moving image as the specific character moving image that is refrained from being visually recognized in Layer 2, the specific character moving image is changed and derived at a later timing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific character video of layer 2 overlaps with the notification display, layer 2 is not displayed again, and the second layer so that it overlaps with the next jackpot video. It is set so that the same jackpot video as the specific character video is derived.

  As described above, a non-specific character video that overlaps with the specific character video is set in preparation for abruptly avoiding the overlap between the specific character video and the notification display (reproduced simultaneously with the specific character). Thus, when the overlap is to be avoided, the mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 can be switched relatively smoothly to a mode in which the specific character moving image is not visually recognized. Therefore, the specific character display can be surely enjoyed while suppressing an increase in the processing load related to the sudden timing change of the specific character moving image.

  Furthermore, the specific character animation overlapping with the layer 1 notification display can be made completely invisible by overlapping the character animation other than the layer 2 identification. For this reason, for example, it is derived that a specific character moving image with a deterioration in visibility due to the appearance that most of the information is superimposed on the rear side of the notification display, and that the specific character moving image is being performed (recognizable) Although it can be confirmed (from some parts), it is possible to avoid a situation in which it does not look well (it can be seen but cannot be seen) that causes a decline in interest.

  In addition, when the specific character video of layer 2 overlaps with the notification display, the specific character video is not displayed and a specific character video synchronized with the next jackpot video of layer 1 is derived in layer 2. Is set to For this reason, coping with the case where the notification display overlaps with the timing at which the derivation timing of the specific character display has been changed is performed relatively smoothly while utilizing the effect display (character animation other than the specific layer) of the first layer. Can do.

  Moreover, the time of the jackpot character moving image is uniform, and the start timing of the jackpot character moving image can be reliably grasped by the remaining time measuring timer. For this reason, it is possible to relatively easily and accurately synchronize the character video and the specific character video other than the specific of layer 2 with the jackpot video such as the specific character video of the layer 1.

  In the present embodiment, the effect display in which the specific character is displayed is comprehensively specified as the specific character display simply by specifying the predetermined character as the specific character. Therefore, for a player who plays a game aiming at the specific character display, the setting for specifying the specific character display becomes simple, and the game can be started smoothly without stress. In addition, since the setting for specifying the specific character display becomes simple, more players can enjoy the function of the specific character display. In addition, the function (combination memory area, etc.) as a derivation period grasping means for grasping the derivation schedule of the specific character can surely grasp the derivation period of the specific character display, and the specific character display, It can be reliably determined whether or not.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a specific character display can be selected as an effect display pattern (can be one of choices), when a character display other than specific is selected, the specific display is performed in another layer. The specific character display is reproduced in synchronization with the non-character display (see “Layer 2” and “Layer 5” in FIGS. 48 and 56). In other words, if a non-specific character display is derived instead of a specific character display during a period in which the specific character display may be displayed (derivative possibility period), the generation of the non-specific character display alone is not sufficient. Rather, it is also configured to generate a specific character display image. For this reason, based on the determination after the start of the derivation possibility period, the display mode visually recognized on the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched from the non-specific character display to the specific character display, or from the specific character display to the non-specific character display. Switching can be performed relatively smoothly.

  For example, when switching the contents of the display (video), in order to earn time to generate the switching destination video (at least the first part), sandwich still images (those that are not very fine, not very good image quality) It is possible to smoothly switch the display without deteriorating the appearance, even without temporarily covering the decorative symbol display device 42 with a movable accessory. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which image generation of a plurality of patterns of effect display proceeds simultaneously, it is possible to appropriately change which of the plurality of patterns of effect display that are reproduced at the same time. Therefore, in the derivation possibility period, the specific effect display can be displayed immediately at any time, and the opportunity for the specific effect display to be derived is increased, and the switching between the specific effect display is made smooth, Variations in derivation of the specific effect display can be increased, or switching between the specific effect display and the non-specific effect display can be performed on an ad hoc basis depending on whether or not a predetermined condition has passed after the start of the derivation possibility period. Furthermore, it is possible to derive a dramatic effect that changes in real time in relation to the display of a specific character, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the moving image are all determined at the start of the moving image. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 42 is a main layer on which the main effect display of the jackpot moving image and the effect variation display in the normal mode is reproduced, and the back main layer on which the moving image synchronized with the layer 1 moving image is reproduced. Layer 2 as a movie, a movie shorter than a movie of layer 1, or a layer 4 as a sublayer in which a still image is reproduced, and a back sublayer in which a movie or a still image synchronized with a movie or a still image in layer 4 is reproduced Layer 2 is disposed above layer 1 (player side), layer 4 is disposed above layer 2, and layer 5 is disposed above layer 4. . For this reason, the amount of images generated in each layer can be reduced, and the burden in the case where an image with a different pattern of the image to be reproduced in a predetermined layer is reproduced in another layer can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when specific character display overlaps, or when a specific character display and notification display overlap, it is comprised so that the right to derive | lead-out a specific character display can be stocked, and by a player In response to an input to the pachinko machine 10, the right to derive the stocked specific character display can be exercised. For this reason, the right to derive the specific character display can be stocked, and fun can be found in new game play such that the specific character display is derived at his own timing. In addition, for example, when a specific character display is derived, and when an urgent display such as notification of an error state is derived, the visual appearance of the specific character display is inevitably hindered. By using a configuration that allows stocks to be stocked, the use of such stocks can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the deterioration of the visibility of the specific character display due to the overlap of some display with respect to the specific character display, ensuring the gameability of enjoying the specific character display, As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences. In addition, since the effect display that is stocked is a specific character display, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked, and various effects attached to it are derived. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player makes the game easy due to the derivation (too much) of the useless effects.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the right to derive the specific character display is configured to be stockable, and the specific effect button 127 is operated in a state where the right to derive the specific character display is stocked. Thus, the right to derive the specific character display is exercised. That is, when the specific effect button 127 is operated in a situation where there is a stock and a character display other than specific is derived in the layer 1 or 4, the specific character display is reproduced without being displayed in the layer 2 or 5. If so, the display is switched between the specific character display and the visible display.

  As a result, the right to derive the specific character display can be stocked, and fun can be found in the new gameplay such that the specific character display is derived at his own timing. In addition, for example, when a specific character display is derived, and when an urgent display such as notification of an error state is derived, the visual appearance of the specific character display is inevitably hindered. By using a configuration that allows stocks to be stocked, the use of such stocks can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the deterioration of the visibility of the specific character display due to the overlap of some display with respect to the specific character display, ensuring the gameability of enjoying the specific character display, As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences. In addition, since the effect display that is stocked is a specific character display, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked, and various effects attached to it are derived. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player makes the game easy due to the derivation (too much) of the useless effects.

  In addition, it is possible to derive even if the specific character display is derived by exercising the right to derive the stocked specific character display after the predetermined presentation display in the middle of the derivation possibility period is started In the sex period, since the specific character display is scheduled to be reproduced together with the non-specific character display, the stock right for the specific character display can be exercised smoothly. Furthermore, even after the derivation possibility period is started, the specific character display corresponding to the derivation possibility period can be immediately derived. For example, in order to derive the specific character display only with a slight delay in timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the video is interrupted or the image is distorted because it is not possible to cope with the situation, or the display is switched to the specific character display. Therefore, the function of stocking the specific character display and exercising the stock right at the player's timing can be fully exhibited.

  In addition, since the specific character display corresponding to the character display other than the specific that is derived when the specific effect button 127 is operated is derived, what kind of mode is exercised when the right to derive the specific character display is exercised at this timing You can add enjoyment such as whether it is derived by. Therefore, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking the specific character display.

  In the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 42, a stock point display 465 indicating that the right for deriving the specific character display is stocked (holds the right) is displayed. Then, in a state where 5 stock points are accumulated and the right to derive the specific character display is given, the stock point display 465 for 5 points is changed to the display of the specific character (FIG. 42 (c)). reference). For this reason, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user does not notice the function that the specific character display is stocked or does not notice that the specific character display is stocked. Furthermore, since the stock point display 465 itself is a display of a specific character (special stock display), the specific character display can be stocked and enjoyment can be found in the mode of the special stock display. The interest can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the stock point exceeds 7 points, the right of the stock of the specific character display is forcibly exercised even if the player does not operate the specific effect button 127. Yes. For this reason, for example, the specific character display stock is automatically exercised at an appropriate place corresponding to the consumption of the stock (for example, in the scene 3 and the scene 4 of the effect variation display). It is possible to avoid a situation in which the right to derive the display is only stocked, the right is not exercised, and the stock function for enjoying the specific character display is not utilized well. Furthermore, when the stock is consumed, the special stock display (the display in which the stock point display 465 indicating the stock point is changed to a specific character) disappears, so it is expected that the stock will not be consumed from the feeling that it is uneasy to consume. If it is configured to be consumed automatically, the player can consume the stock without hesitation, and the special stock display continues to be displayed for a long time, thereby suppressing the situation where the appreciation is lost. Can increase the value of special stock labeling.

  In the present embodiment, as the hold icon 461, a prefetch hold icon 463 that suggests the contents of the effect change display may be derived. As a result, the convenience of using the stock, such as exercising the right to derive the display of the specific character that is stocked in a situation where the prefetch hold icon 463 can be expected to generate a jackpot state. Etc. can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an effect handle 401 that can change the outer shape and can be displaced is provided, and various information can be transmitted to the player by touch. Therefore, the range of production can be expanded. In particular, since the information can be transmitted without changing the display mode and the voice mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect related to the specific character display (for example, a cross) without hindering the specific character display and the accompanying voice. For example, it is possible to notify the player of the correct answer choice by the operation of the effect handle 401, or to inform the player of information unrelated to the specific character display. As a result, it is possible to improve performance and convenience of information transmission to the player.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, an effect that the player selects one of the options with the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 may be derived, and further, the correct answer option by the operation of the effect handle 401 at the time of the effect. May be suggested. In this way, in a state where input by the input operation means is possible (a state where he / she is wondering what kind of input to input), the player is surprised, delighted and input by teaching the input guidelines. While expecting that the results of the above will be taught, it is possible to obtain an exhilarating feeling during that time. As a result, it is possible to derive an effect that can improve interest.

  Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, for example, when the start winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are entered during the derivation of the specific character display, the effect handle 401 vibrates. If the configuration is such that the guidance for the production handle 401 to vibrate in response to the entry of the specific character being displayed or the setting to stop the function of the vibration can be made, Various types of entry information can be transmitted to the player without obstructing the visual display mode of the character display and the accompanying audio mode. As a result, the specific character display can be further enjoyed.

  Further, the effect handle 401 is provided at a substantially left-right symmetrical position of the handle 18 for launch operation. For this reason, even if it touches with the hand (left hand) opposite to the hand (right hand) which operates the handle | steering-wheel 18 for a comparatively long time, it can avoid getting tired. Therefore, while the specific character display is being derived, it is possible to keep touching the effect handle 401 relatively easily, and the function of the effect handle 401 can be fully utilized.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that attachment of the exclusive parts 411 with respect to the production | presentation handle 401 as a parts attachment part and a mode change means is possible. The dedicated part 411 is brought in by the player or rented in the game hall, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by attaching the dedicated part 411 to the effect handle 401. Therefore, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 can be made to the player's preference in the environment where the game is played with the feeling of coordinating his / her room, and the game can be played with good mood. Moreover, even if it is a case where the exclusive parts 411 are previously attached as a service in a game hall, the external appearance of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed individually. In addition, it is difficult to attach as the pachinko machine 10 itself (obstructed during transportation, fragile, etc.) A thing that protrudes in front of the front frame 14 can be attached to the pachinko machine 10 and the design is improved. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, the aspect of the exclusive part 411 attached to the production | presentation handle 401 is comprised so that a change is possible. That is, the production handle 401 of the present embodiment is made of a soft resin that covers the first slide member 402, the second slide member 403, and the first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 protruding forward of the front frame 14. The first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 are each configured to be displaceable back and forth, and as a whole, can be tilted up and down and left and right. As described above, when the production handle 401 is displaced or deformed (the outer shape changes), the dedicated part 411 attached so as to cover the production handle 401 is also displaced or deformed (outer shape). Change). For this reason, it is possible to operate the dedicated part 411 attached to the pachinko machine 10 (providing an unprecedented movable accessory for production), and the dedicated part 411 does not become a simple figurine, but the performance as a decoration. Can be strengthened, or used as part of the production, etc., and the interest in the dedicated part 411 and eventually the pachinko machine 10 can be further enhanced. In addition, when the player touches the dedicated part 411, it is possible to perform a presentation or suggestion using a change in touch or the like, and it is possible to further improve the presentation performance and game playability.

  As a result, by attaching the dedicated parts 411 selected by the player to the pachinko machine 10 and matching the appearance to his / her hobbies / preferences, the interest / attachment to the pachinko machine 10 can be increased more actively. It is possible to suppress getting bored relatively early and to improve the repeat rate to the pachinko machine 10. The effect handle 401 can change the pressure applied to the dedicated part 411 from the effect handle 401 by displacing the first slide member 402, whereby the feel (hardness, tension) of the dedicated part 411 can be changed. (A feeling) is changed (when the first slide member 402 is located in the front, the dedicated part 411 feels harder than when the first slide member 402 is located in the rear).

  Further, there is provided attachment detection means (not shown) that can distinguish between a state in which the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401 and a state in which the dedicated part 411 is not attached. For this reason, for example, when the dedicated part 411 is prepared by the game hall side and rented to the player, the dedicated part 411 is removed from the attached state so that the dedicated part 411 is returned in the pachinko machine 10. Deriving announcements to be requested, etc., or configuring the corresponding signals to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 so that game hall personnel can grasp that the dedicated parts 411 have been removed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the dedicated part 411 is taken away by the player without permission.

  Further, for example, when the player prepares the dedicated part 411, when the player performs an operation to end the game (for example, when an operation to return a game value storage medium capable of storing the game value is performed) When an operation of paying out a game value (game ball) stored in a digitized form as a real game value is performed, the special part 411 is reminded not to forget. Display and sound teaching that it is attached).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an attachment lamp 417 (see FIG. 1) is provided as a part reaction unit that emits light when the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401. For this reason, it can be confirmed whether the dedicated part 411 is properly attached. In addition, it is good also as providing the movable accessory, the light emission means, etc. as a parts reaction part which changes a mode in conjunction with attachment of the exclusive parts 411 to the production | presentation handle 401. FIG. In this case, the interest in attaching the dedicated part 411 can be further increased.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A; permission display, non-permission display, notification display) Setting (prescription) of permission display or non-permission display is performed for each model. Basically, “permission display” is a specific character display ( It is a display that does not cover or almost does not cover the subject), and the specific character display can be seen through even if it is covered, and the “non-permission display” is the specific character display (subject) and the whole or main part In other words, the display may be such that the corresponding part (entire or part) of the specific character display is not visible.

  In addition, “notification display” of the disapproval display can be set for each model, for example, teaching that a right such as a jackpot state has been acquired, teaching that a jackpot state is started, Examples include teaching that the game has ended, teaching that the variable display has ended, and teaching regarding the number of game values (such as game balls) that have been paid out to the player. Moreover, it is good also as "the notification display which is a permission display exists". That is, for example, as one type of specific character display, there is a super specific character display whose derivation timing cannot be changed, and when it is determined that the super specific character display and the notification display overlap, the notification display is permitted. You may comprise so that it may change so that it may become a display. In addition, as a notification display, the teaching that the given game state has been assigned / transferred has been determined, and the condition set as a break (small target) in progressing the game has been achieved (in addition to the total number of payouts, For example, that a big win was won five times without going through the normal mode, a premium effect was derived, etc.), and an error condition occurred.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when it is discriminate | determined that a specific character display and a disapproval display overlap, it is comprised fundamentally, either one timing is changed, but a specific character display In addition, the derivation timing of the non-permission display may be changed (both flexibility is effective). In the effect change display, it is desirable not to move the disallowed display derived to the scene 1 to the scenes 2 to 4 (movement within the scene 1 or cancellation of the derivation). That is, in general, scene 1 is an effect display (for example, button effect) to the extent that a reach state may occur, but an effect display (for example, button effect) for scenes 2 to 4 has a jackpot state. Because it is an effect display such as it may be (or it may be an effect display that has already been confirmed that it has already been released, and has just consumed the remaining time), the effect display of scene 1 is changed to a later scene If it is moved, there is a concern that the presentation display may be uncomfortable with the scene. Therefore, it is desirable not to move from the previous scene to the subsequent scene. Furthermore, it is desirable that a display explaining a predetermined effect or the like is displayed as a permission display at that time so as not to disturb other displays.

  Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when the specific character video and the non-permitted display that is prioritized over the specific character video overlap after the start of the big hit state (big hit round), in particular, the final round If there is no time left to change the derivation timing of the specific character video until the end of the specific character video, the specific character video is not visible (cancelled) and the specific character video is In a certain period, another special jackpot video (a jackpot video other than the specific character video) is derived, and a specific effect may be performed in which the disallowed display is changed to a mode that is treated as the specific character display (for example, FIG. The character C in layer 2 is displayed with the V prize challenge effect in layer 3 hidden. The visible display of the V prize challenge directing that). In this case, even when there is no time to change the derivation timing of the specific character moving image, the specific character display (specific effect related to the specific character moving image) can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the specific character video and the non-permitted display (first non-permitted display) prioritized over the specific character video overlap, so that the specific character video is not derived, and the specific character video (specific character display) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest of the player who was looking forward to the game is reduced.

  (B; interruption of specific character display due to interruption of notification display) Furthermore, “in the state where the specific character display is derived, when the notification display that is not permitted is derived, the specific character display is interrupted. The notification display is derived, and from the point where the specific character display is interrupted after the notification display ends, or from the point where it was returned before the interrupted point (from the timing slightly before the interrupted timing, Alternatively, it may be resumed from the beginning of the specific character display). In the above embodiment, when the V prize challenge effect and the probability change promotion effect are derived during the reproduction of the specific character video, the jackpot video is rendered invisible (the character video other than the specific on the second layer is visually recognized). Instead, a specific character video that can no longer be viewed is set as the next big hit video (see step S4734).

  In other words, if the derivation of the specific character display has been decided but has not yet been derived, the derivation timing of the entire specific character display can be changed. When the notification display is given priority and the notification display is given priority, the specific character display is inevitably interrupted. Even in such a case, the specific character display can be enjoyed as much as possible by suspending and resuming as described above. In addition, a guidance display that teaches resuming the interrupted specific character display, a guidance display that displays (countdown) the time until restart of the interrupted specific character display, and the like may be derived. In this case, it is possible to be relieved that the display of the specific character is resumed (knowing in advance) or to suppress the situation such as overlooking the opening part without noticing that the display of the specific character has been resumed. Can be.

  (C: Specific Character Voice) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the specific character voice (specific effect sound) derived together with the specific character display may be handled in the same manner as the specific character display. . That is, when it is determined that the voice that is at least partially overlapped with the derivation period of the specific character voice is “non-permitted voice”, the specific character voice and the non-permitted voice are not overlapped. The derivation timing of at least one of the non-permitted voices may be changed. Further, the input to the pachinko machine 10 by the player for specifying the specific character voice is not particularly limited. For example, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to derive a setting screen for specific character display. A specific character display can be set according to the operation of the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 provided so that the player can operate, or between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via the portable communication terminal. When a mobile linked game that exchanges data is performed, the password issued by the server is input to the pachinko machine 10 so that the storage of the specific character display of the previous game is reflected in the current game. It may be configured.

  (D; Stock Function) In the above embodiment, the specific character display is overlapped so that the right to derive the specific character display is stocked. However, the stock conditions are particularly limited. is not. For example, it is possible to derive a mini-game in which stock points are added by success, stock points are added every time a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, jackpots, etc. are performed, or a predetermined lottery at the start of production fluctuation display Based on the above, stock points may be added (corresponding to a predetermined effect display that is derived). Further, for example, when the specific character display overlaps with the notification display, the stock character may be implemented instead of shifting the derivation timing of the specific character display. Further, when the specific character displays overlap, the stock character is not executed, but the derivation timing of the specific character display may be changed. In addition, when the specific character display overlaps, the specific character display that is difficult to visually recognize in the lower layer is displayed as it is, but the display mode is hidden by the back channel display. May be. The stock function can be omitted.

  Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, after the start of the jackpot state (big hit round), the specific character video and the non-permitted display that is prioritized over the specific character video overlap, and the specific character video is derived. When the timing is set to be changed later, if there is no time for deriving the specific character video until the end of the final round, the specific character display is stocked and the specific character is displayed. It may be configured such that another jackpot video (a jackpot video other than the specific character video) and a stock effect display as a specific effect are derived in a period when the video is supposed to be performed.

  (E; Production Display during Probability Mode) In the above embodiment, when a specific character video in which a specific character appears in the background video of layer 1 is derived in the probability variation mode, the production display of layer 2 is hidden ( However, when the effect display of layer 2 is a specific character display, the effect display is visible display), but the sub-effect display of layer 4 is configured to be stopped, but it is derived redundantly. In addition, stock points may be added.

  Furthermore, the effect display (main effect display) started by visual display in layer 2 is configured to be displayed until the stop of the variable symbol display even if a specific character video is derived on the way. Also good. That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is necessary to derive an uncomfortable display that the main effect display that is a moving image with a story is erased in the middle (the moving image with a story is not completed).

  In addition, when a specific character video is derived from the background video of layer 1, the variation display of the decorative design of layer 3 is displayed in a mini-display, but the decorative design is displayed thinly (semi-transparent). Alternatively, the display may be performed without changing the display mode, or the decorative symbol variation display may be made invisible. However, the information on the stop display of the decorative symbol is important for the player, and the decorative symbol variable display is performed so as not to disturb the visual recognition mode of the specific character display so that the specific character animation can be fully enjoyed. Is desirable.

  It should be noted that, in the variation display of the pattern in which the effect display of the layer 2 is not derived in the probability changing mode, the probability that the parts effect due to the change in the appearance of the effect handle 401 may be increased. In this case, the effect can be raised without changing the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  (F: Character introduction, winning character animation) In the above embodiment, in the jackpot state, the character introduction can be derived only in the first round of “15RS”, but may be derived in other rounds. Or may be derived even in other types of jackpot states. Moreover, you may comprise so that character introduction may be performed in multiple times during one big hit state. However, it is desirable that the character introduction corresponding to the character (winning character) appearing in the variable display (super reach production) in the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the occurrence of the big hit state is taught is included. It is desirable that it is performed at a timing that is as far as possible from the fluctuation display as much as possible. It is also possible to omit the character introduction in the big hit state.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot video (winning character video) of the winning character is specially treated so that it is derived as a jackpot video that does not overlap with the character introduction after the character introduction (first round) is completed. (It is processed so that it does not overlap with the non-permission display in the same way as the specific effect display), but the winning character video may be appropriately set without being distinguished from other jackpot videos. Good. However, as shown in the above embodiment, the impression from the big hit state teaching to the start, in particular, appears by connecting the variation display of the decorative symbols, the character introduction, and the winning character animation. The impression of the character can be strengthened (improved), and as a result, the game motivation can be improved.

  (G; specific payout number display) In the above embodiment, in the state from the occurrence of the big hit state to the transition to the normal mode (continuous change state), the game is paid out based on the balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. The number of balls (total number of payouts) is counted, the number is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and each time the total number of payouts increases by about 2500, a specific payout that teaches that the total number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number The number display is displayed in a large scale at the center of the decorative symbol display device 42, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, not only the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winnings to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b in the big win state, but also to other winning devices (start winning devices 33a and 33b, general winning devices 31 and the like) The number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning ball may be included in the count, or the number of game balls that have been paid out based on the player entering the winning device in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode may be included in the count. .

  Further, the specific payout number display may be derived in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode. In addition, the count of the total number of payouts may be configured not only to increase but also to decrease (subtract the number of game balls fired). In addition, for example, in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b, there is a case where “small win” may be won, and when the small win is won, the first variable winning device 32a, One of the second variable prize-winning devices 32b may be open for a short time (so as not to enter the specific pitching unit 145 of the second variable prize-winning device 32b). It should be noted that the derivation function of the specific payout number display can be omitted.

  In addition, the prediction of the specific payout number display is configured to be limited to one jackpot round, but it is predicted that the specific payout number display can be derived in a plurality of consecutive jackpot rounds, and the jackpot round is avoided. You may comprise so that a specific character animation etc. may be set. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the prediction of the specific payout number display is lost and the derivation timing of the specific character moving image needs to be shifted suddenly.

  (H: Timing example of overlap determination processing and example of the case where the specific character display and the notification display overlap) In the above embodiment, at the start of the jackpot state and at the start of the jackpot video after the jackpot state starts ( There is a setting that discriminates the overlap between the specific character display (specific character video) and the disallowed display at the start of each disallowed display at the start of the specific character video and avoids the overlap. Although it is configured to be performed, for example, processing for avoiding duplication may be performed only at the start of the jackpot state, or duplication avoidance may be performed only at the start of specific character display and at the start of disapproval display. It is good also as performing the process for this.

  In the above embodiment, when the notification display or the specific character display is determined to be overlapped at the start of the notification display or the specific character display, and the timing of deriving the specific character display is (rapidly) changed, You may comprise so that alerting | reporting display may be set to the aspect (specific character appears in alerting display, the audio | voice corresponding to alerting display becomes that of a specific character, etc.) equivalent to a specific character display. In this case, the notification display is in a mode corresponding to the specific character display, and the chance of visually recognizing the specific character display is increased, and although the specific character display mode is different from the original specific character display mode, You can enjoy it at the timing, and you can improve the image of the overlap.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the notification display and the specific character display overlap at the start of the notification display or the specific character display, the notification display is specified when the timing of derivation of the specific character display is changed suddenly You may comprise so that the derivation | leading-out timing of a character display may be set to the aspect which shows that the specific character display was displayed later. In this case, the player can be relieved by notifying the player that the specific character display will be derived later, instead of losing the opportunity to derive the specific character display.

  The jackpot state of the above embodiment is such that a disapproval effect is performed at least once in response to a predetermined round (at least a V winning challenge effect or a probable change promotion challenge effect is performed). There may be a jackpot state that is not performed).

  (I: Target of specific character display, specifying method) In the above embodiment, the specific character display in which the character selected by the player appears is specified as the specific effect display preferentially displayed over the other effect displays. Although it is configured, the target for the specific effect display is not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, by selecting a predetermined character, the character display in which the character appears is comprehensively specified as the specific character display. However, such a function may be omitted. However, it may be configured such that it can be set individually (for example, the character A in the big hit state, the character B in the last scene, etc.).

  Further, for example, when a predetermined effect display is derived on the decorative symbol display device 42, a predetermined operation input (specific input operation) is performed by the specific effect button 127, so that it is derived on the decorative symbol display device 42. The predetermined effect display may be specified as a specific effect display. For example, when the specific effect button 127 is operated during the jackpot state, the currently playing jackpot video (information on the jackpot video stored in the corresponding storage area of the combination storage area) is specified as the specific effect display. (Adapted from the next big hit state). Also, when the specific effect button 127 is operated, the displayed effect display is confirmed, and the effect display is specified as the specific effect display. However, when the plurality of effect displays are overlapped, the specific effect is displayed. When the operation of the button 127 is performed, it is possible to display a screen for selecting and inputting which one of them is to be displayed as a specific effect later, and display the guidance. Good (if there is no selection input operation, all are specified as a specific effect display for the time being).

  By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to specify the effect display that the player likes as the specific effect display. Therefore, it becomes possible to respond to more detailed needs, and the satisfaction with the game can be improved. For example, if a player likes a predetermined character other than a character that can be comprehensively specified as a specific character and wants to display the effect display from which the predetermined character is derived as the specific effect display, the player can display the specific effect display by himself / herself. You can specify one by one. In addition, it is also possible to immediately identify the specific character display by actually looking at information (reach production patterns, character details, etc. that each character appears) that could not be understood from the character selection screen alone (appearance) Remember the character, wait for the fluctuation display to be interrupted, display the character selection screen, check the character that appeared earlier and the character on the character introduction screen, and do not have to do the work of selecting and setting Therefore, the convenience can be improved.

  In addition, a specific effect information storage unit that stores information on a predetermined effect display specified as a specific effect display by performing a predetermined operation with the specific effect button 127 is provided, and the operation is stored in the specific effect information storage unit. The (all) production patterns that were derived at the time of the performance (the player does not know if the productions are duplicated, so the player will select them later). Time from (if pressed once, the specified time from the operation (if pressed again before the specified time elapses, it will look like it will be extended, then the specified time; there will be a maximum number of extensions) Is displayed as a specific effect display, and in the case of a long press, the specific effect display is displayed during operation.

  Furthermore, if the specific effect display is made a little before the operation, it is easy to set the target effect display as the specific effect display from the beginning. In addition, by confirming the effect pattern, which character is derived after the start ○ seconds. If it is configured to be able to acquire such information, it is possible to pinpoint from the derivation start timing to the derivation end timing of the character that appears most recently. That is, in the effect variation display of the above-described embodiment, the effect is set corresponding to the scene, and therefore information on the effect display of the scene in which the specific effect button 127 is operated is stored. Further, for example, when a predetermined character and a predetermined effect display are in one-to-one correspondence, that is, the predetermined character is displayed from the beginning to the end of the predetermined effect display (for example, scene 4). Is basically derived, a predetermined operation by a specific effect button is performed during the predetermined effect, so that the entire predetermined effect display is specified as the specific effect display. May be.

  Note that the currently displayed effect display can be grasped (for example, the character C flag and the character Z flag are set to ON when the character C and the character Z are displayed), and the specific effect button The effect display related to the effect display displayed when the predetermined operation by 127 is performed may be specified as the specific effect display. In addition, the display effect displayed in more detail can be grasped (for example, the reach of a predetermined character from which the mini character is derived, and the speech display C-21 of the character effect display of the character C is derived) It is also possible to grasp that the pattern B is derived, the premium reach is derived, and the like. In addition, even if it is a configuration that can individually set the specific character display while the effect variation display and the big hit state are progressing, a configuration that can specify the specific character display at the player's timing, or a comprehensive It is desirable to have a configuration capable of performing such identification. In this case, the user wants to change the specific character, but cannot wait at the player's timing, and has to wait for the target performance to be derived. ) Can be avoided.

  In addition, for example, the information stored in the specific effect information storage means may be configured to be erased sequentially from the oldest, or all of the information is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Alternatively, when all the information stored in the specific effect information storage means is to be erased, the power is turned on while operating the erase operation means (RAM erase switch 323). It is good as well. In addition, when performing a mobile linked game, the mobile communication terminal receives information that can be output from the gaming machine at the end of the game, stores the information in the server, and at the start of the next game, You may comprise so that the setting regarding the specific effect display of the game until the last time may be succeeded by inputting the information (a password is issued to a server and this password) including at least one part of information into the pachinko machine 10.

  The effect display during the input operation of the specific effect button 127 may be specified as the specific effect display, or twice within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) of the specific effect button 127. By detecting the above operation, the specific effect display may be specified, or a setting for enabling individual settings of the specific effect display based on the operation of the specific effect button 127 is possible. What is being performed may be used as a condition for the specific input operation. That is, in order to suppress that the effect display performed when the specific effect button 127 is operated unintentionally is placed as the specific effect, the specific effect is performed by one operation of the specific effect button 127. It is desirable that the display specification is not executed.

  In addition, in order to reduce the trouble of erasing the specific content of the previous player, based on the operation of the player, the operation of ending the mobile linked game, or after a certain period of time, the previous player Information that is specified and stored as a specific effect display may be configured to be erasable collectively. Further, in a state where there is a stock of specific effect display (for example, when the stock point is 5 points or more corresponding to the above embodiment), the specific input operation may not be performed.

  The target of the specific effect display is not limited to the character, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, the specific effect display may be set in association with a predetermined notice effect or a predetermined reach effect. In addition, if there are a plurality of buttons that can be operated by the player (the effect button 125 and the specific effect button 127), it becomes difficult to know which one should be operated. It is good also as comprising so that the visual recognition aspect of a button or its vicinity may change with a state and the operation invalid state which does not generate | occur | produce reaction operation even if it operates. For example, it may be configured such that the light emitting mode of the light-emitting means with a built-in button changes, or the button is configured to be able to move in and out, and the protruding amount becomes large in the operation valid state, or the attached portion in the operation invalid state You may comprise so that it may be immersed in (upper surface of the top plate 19). Furthermore, it is good also as providing the cap means which can change a state into the open state which can operate a button, and the closed state which cannot be operated.

  In addition, for example, when a plurality of story effects are set corresponding to each character and premium reach is selected, the story effects of the character specified as the specific character are derived in order. Also good. In this case, if a predetermined story effect is missed, the story effect must be completed before it is visually recognized next time. For this reason, by providing a configuration that avoids the overlap between the story effect (specific character effect) and the other effect display (non-permission display), the visual appearance of the story effect is obstructed by the other effect display, etc. The effect that can suppress this situation is more remarkably exhibited.

  (J; Character) The decorative symbol display device 42 of the above embodiment may be configured such that a character can appear in addition to the character that is the target of the specific character as the specific image object. In addition, by operating the specific effect button 127, the image being displayed on the decorative design display device 42 is saved, and the image is applied to the decorative design image or the character introduction image is derived during the period when the character introduction image is derived. It may be configured such that it can be selected instead of an image. Furthermore, when the special effect button 127 is operated during the reproduction of the big hit video, the special character video is specified, and decorative symbols that are not the target of the specific character are stopped and displayed to teach the occurrence of the big hit state In addition, a special character moving image may be derived as the winning character moving image. In this case, in a configuration in which a large number of characters appear, a player who wants to specify a character other than the specific character as a specific character while suppressing an increase in capacity and complexity of processing compared to a case where all characters are specified characters. Therefore, the character can be treated as much as the specific character as much as possible, and can be configured to obtain a certain level of satisfaction.

  In addition, when the player registers an effect display that the player wants to shoot in advance, when the corresponding effect display is actually derived, a predetermined guidance (for example, a photo opportunity or the like is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 42, or the effect is displayed). The handle 401 may be vibrated).

  (K: ranking of specific character display) In the above embodiment, ranking is performed regarding priority among the specific character display, and the rank of the specific character display and the other types of general effect display Depending on the combination, it may be configured such that whether the general effect display is discriminated as the permitted display and the non-permitted display that are allowed to overlap with the specific character display may be changed. In this case, among the specific character displays, those with a high derivation frequency or those with a small derivation are specified with a lower priority than those with a low derivation frequency or a large display. In the configuration in which the specific character display is comprehensively specified by setting the character, the production balance and the like can be improved.

  In addition, when performing a mobile linked game in which data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via the mobile communication terminal, the general effect display is determined to be either a permission display or a non-permission display. The reference may be changed according to the game amount of the player, or may be configured so that the player can set. For example, when the game amount of the player is small, as a specific character display, a cut-in effect that is only temporarily derived, a display that is only derived in a small area of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a game description However, when the game amount is large, the game description may not be displayed. In addition, the specific character is only drawn out at the same time as many other characters, only the name is displayed, etc. The specific character is almost inconspicuous, the relevance to the specific character is low, etc. The display may not be specified as the specific effect display. In addition, it may be configured such that ranking regarding the priority of a specific character can be performed by a player (to some extent).

  Further, “corresponding to the character that can be set as the specific character, character trajectory information (object image information) that can specify the display position of the specific character that is displaced with the progress of the presentation variation display and the jackpot video is stored in advance. A character trajectory information storage area (object trajectory information storage means). In this case, for example, it is possible to perform an effect display such as making a specific character close-up according to the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  (L: Non-specific character setting) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is not reset only when the power is turned off / on (the specific character at the time of power-off is taken over as the specific character after the power is turned on, and the RAM The pachinko machine 10 is reset by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the erase switch 323, and in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined character (character C in the above example) is set as a specific character. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, for example, it may be configured such that the specific character is reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or on, or in the initialization process. The specific character set when setting the specific character is not particularly limited. ) It may be determined by.

  Further, it may be configured such that the player can set not to specify a specific character by operating the effect button 125, the cross button 126, and the like. Furthermore, when the setting is performed, it may be configured not to perform duplication determination of the specific character display. In the case of adopting this configuration, it is possible to respond to a player's request that feels that the effect display related to the specific character display is distorted, or that the effect display (for any character) wants to be seen evenly. In addition, even if there is an intention to set a specific character display, it is possible to respond to a request such as wanting to set a specific character display after first looking at various display effects that can be specified as the specific character display (mobile interlocking). When playing a game, the game may be automatically advanced in such a flow). When this configuration is adopted, the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific character may not be provided individually, or the character corresponding to the “7” symbol may be set randomly or fixedly. You may comprise.

  (M; derivation advance notice of specific effect display) In the above embodiment, a specific effect advance notice teaching that the specific character display is derived at least when the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed is configured to be derived. May be. In this case, even when the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed and the specific character display is derived at an irregular timing, the specific character display derived at the changed timing can be surely visually recognized. it can. Further, for example, the configuration in which the specific effect notice effect is performed only when the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed, or the mode is different between the case where the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed and other cases. When adopting the configuration, it is possible to confirm that the specific character display is changed in the derivation timing.

  It should be noted that, by using a function capable of grasping in advance that the specific character display is derived, whether or not the derivation timing is changed (even if the derivation timing of the specific character display is not changed) When the specific effect notice effect is derived in advance of all the specific character displays, the specific effect display can be performed if the eyes are moved to the effect character means based on the specific effect notice effect even if the look is away from the effect character means. Can be thoroughly enjoyed from the beginning.

  The player may be configured to be able to set whether or not to permit the derivation of the specific effect notice effect. Further, when there is no difference in the meaning that the specific character display is derived between the case where the derived timing is changed and the case where the derived timing is not changed, the specific effect notice effect is, for example, the derivation timing is Derived only when it is changed, the player makes a special expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of occurrence of a big hit state is special) for the specific effect notice effect (with a specific character display accompanying) In order to avoid such a situation, it may be configured to be derived even in response to a specific character display whose derivation timing is not changed.

  (N: Guidance that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed) The specific timing change display that teaches that the derivation timing of the specific character display has been changed may be derived. In this case, it can be understood that the derivation timing of the specific character display has been changed. When the specific timing change display is derived before the original derivation timing, the specific timing change display is derived when deriving the specific character display with the derivation timing changed, and is derived after the original derivation timing. In such a case, the derivation may be performed at the original derivation timing. In this case, it is possible to grasp that the specific character display has been derived early, or that the specific character display is reserved later.

  (O: Measure when the specific character display is not derived for a certain period) In the above embodiment, the specific character display may be derived based on the fact that the specific character display is not derived for the specified period. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which although a particular character display is looked forward to, it is not derived too much, leading to a decrease in interest.

  The specified period is defined as one change (one game) from the start to the end of the change display of the special display devices 43a and 43b for teaching the result of the right / left lottery for determining whether or not to generate the big hit state. Examples include a case where a specified number of times have been performed, and a case where a jackpot state (of a predetermined type) has been performed a specified number of times. That is, for example, a counter capable of counting the number of times of fluctuation display (number of times of fluctuation) for which a specific character display has not been derived is provided, 1 is added according to the start of fluctuation, and the counter is reset based on the derivation of the specific character display. For example, if affirmative determination is made by determining whether or not the number of times exceeds 100, an effect pattern in which 5 stock points are added or a specific character display is derived in scenes 3 and 4 is obtained. The stock point may be added by 1 when the number of times of variation that is selected or the specific character display is not derived continues for 20 times.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when a specific character display is derived | led-out, you may comprise so that a stock point may be decremented by one. Furthermore, the specific character display that is derived when the specific character display is not derived for a certain period of time may be a rare pattern or a specific character display of a dedicated pattern. In addition, the point may be returned to the initial value when the specific character display is derived (the derivation setting is performed), or may be configured so that the point is reduced by the amount used. Of course, instead of increasing the stock points, the setting for deriving a specific character display may be made.

  (P; sub-specific effect display that is intentionally overlapped with the specific character display) In the above embodiment, a predetermined effect display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed in response to an input by the player operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126. The sub-specific effect display may be configured so that it can be specified (the function of specifying the sub-specific effect display of the sub-control device 262 corresponds to the sub-effect display specifying unit). Then, the effect display (sub-specific character display) specified as the sub-specific effect display is configured to increase the possibility that the effect display (specific character display) is derived redundantly as compared with other effect displays. May be. For example, in a case where a specific character, a rival character, and a close character are selected on the character selection screen, a “kakekko production” in which the specific character appears is selected, and a long version of super reach is selected. A pattern where rival characters fight to the end with a probability of% to 90% is selected (for example, in the short version, it is about 15%, which is the same as the selection ratio of other characters), and “two people tripod effect” in which a specific character appears is selected When a long version of super reach is selected, a pattern in which close characters are partnered with a probability of 80% to 90% is selected (for example, about 30% to 40% in the short version). Also good. In this case, by setting the display of the sub-specific character so that it easily overlaps with the display of the specific character, an effect that deepens the relationship (such as a relationship) between the specific character and the sub-specific character (Rival production, good friend production, etc.) can be set by the player, and fun can be further increased.

  In addition, the sub-specific character display may be selected more easily as a sub-effect than a character that is not specified. For example, in the cut-in production of scene 4 with a big hit, the appearance of a specific character is 40%, the appearance of a rival character is 30%, the appearance of a good friend character is 20%, and the appearance of other characters is 10%. In the cut-in production of scene 4 with variable display, the appearance of specific characters is 20%, the appearance of rival characters is 20%, the appearance of good friends is 20%, the appearance of other characters is 40% (others It may be set to about 7% per character).

  When the sub-specific character display overlaps with the specific character display (when the cut-in display of the sub-specific character that supports the specific character is more likely to be selected than the cut-in effects of other characters) Etc.) Similarly to the specific character display, a process for stocking the specific character display may be performed. However, even if the sub-specific character is displayed alone (in a state where the specific character display is not displayed), the overlap with the non-permission display is determined and the overlap is avoided as much as possible as in the specific character display. Is not done.

  (Q; Recording during a specific character effect) In the above embodiment, the sub-control device 262 includes progress information storage means capable of storing information related to the progress of a game performed at least in a state where the specific character display is derived. The information stored in the progress information storage means may be viewed on the decorative symbol display device 42 after the specific character display. In this case, an event occurring during the display of the specific character can be confirmed later. Therefore, the user can concentrate on the specific character display without hesitation. Note that, for example, a specific character display from the beginning to the end of a specific type of jackpot state, and a display that overlaps with the specific character display in the special character state is a permission display that is allowed to overlap with the specific character display ( It is an aspect that does not hinder the visibility even if it is a notification display), or is a specific character display, automatically after the jackpot state is finished, or after the jackpot state is finished, information in the jackpot state, For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, it may be configured to be able to derive a display for obtaining information such as whether a game ball has entered the upper limit in each round, or the time required for digestion in each round.

  (R: Layer of decorative symbol display device) In the above embodiment, five layers are provided in the decorative symbol display device 42. However, the setting of which number of layers is used to derive which display is particularly set. It is not limited and can be set for each model. For example, different cut-in effects are played back simultaneously in three layers, and the cut-in effect of which layer is finally changed while changing the layers that can be seen in the middle according to the operation of the effect button 125 and the expectation of jackpot It may be configured to produce an effect such as whether it has been confirmed.

  Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, a part of the non-specific character display is reproduced in a layer below the layer where the non-specific character display is reproduced in synchronization with the non-specific character display. It is possible to perform effects such as clipping and masking that make it possible to visually recognize the specified character display, and fade-in and fade-out display modes that sandwich the state where the specific character display overlaps with the non-specific character display. Good.

  (S: Stock for specific character display and conditions for exercising stock rights) In the above embodiment, the stock point is 5 points and the right to derive the specific character display is stocked once. For example, one point may be used for one stock. Further, the number of stockables is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the opportunity for collecting stock points can be set as appropriate for each model.

  Further, even when the specific effect button 127 is operated in a state where there is a stock, if it is determined that the derived specific character display overlaps with the notification display, the right of the stock may not be exercised. . In this case, the specific character display by exercising the stock right can be surely viewed without overlapping the notification display. Furthermore, the notification means can be surely recognized by the player. In addition, although it is good also as performing part production | presentation by the production | presentation handle 401 using stock, it is desirable not to perform in order to have you confirm the alerting | reporting information of alerting | reporting display firmly.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, it is good also as providing the rare specific production | presentation which is derived | led-out only when the right of the stock of a specific character display is exercised, or the possibility of being derived | led-out increases. In this case, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking the specific character display. In addition, the specific character display derived by exercising the stock has information on plus alpha (improvement related to the lottery or the like, the reliability thereof is improved, or compared to other specific character displays, It may be configured such that the performance is simply improved).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a highly accurate stock state in which the specific character display is easily stocked is provided (for example, by operating the effect button 125, the specific character display is sequentially derived, and the specific character display is likely to overlap. It may be) That is, for example, when the right to derive a specific character display is configured to be stockable multiple times and the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the stock highly accurate state is set at the start of the production variation display. In this case, during the fluctuation display, the guidance display is made to make the stock highly accurate state for the specified number of fluctuation display times, and the stock high accuracy state is set from the next effect change display until the fluctuation display is made for the specified number of times. You may comprise as follows. Further, during the time reduction mode at the time of the initial hit (after the big hit state of “8RN”), the stock high probability state may be set. In this case, it is possible to diversify the game play utilizing the configuration of stocking the right to derive the specific character display. In addition, for a player who wants to display a specific character, it is desirable to generate a jackpot, but it is desirable to close the end of the time shortening mode as much as possible. Furthermore, for the first hit, “8RN” is rather than “8RS”. It is possible to provide an interesting game with changing values such as favorableness.

  Further, the stocked specific character display may not be derived with a probability of 100% but may be derived when winning in the stock exercise lottery. For example, when an input for exercising the right is performed, guidance for prompting the operation of the specific effect button 127 is derived, and a stock exercise lottery is performed based on the operation of the specific effect button 127 (the winning probability is not constant). In addition, the winning probability may be determined at the time of stocking (in accordance with the type of display of the specific character stocked, the game situation at the time of stocking, etc.), or may be determined at the time of lottery. Furthermore, it may be configured to be able to derive an effect display for displaying the result of the stock exercising lottery (a display that causes the player to get out).

  (T; Stock Point Display) In the above embodiment, when the stock point display 465 indicating the stock point is displayed in the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 42 and 5 points are accumulated, the stock point for 5 points is displayed. The display is configured to display a specific character (special stock display), but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the special stock display may be derived when the stock is stocked a predetermined number of times, or the special stock display may be configured to move the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, a special stock display may be used to suggest a jackpot expectation degree or the like (the stock point display may be used before the special stock display is derived). In this case, while increasing the value of the stock point display 465 and visually recognizing the aspect of the stock point display 465, if the stock of the specific character display is used at this timing, an unusual specific character display is derived or ends successfully. It is possible to grasp that there is a high possibility that the specific character display is derived.

  In addition, in a state where the special stock display is derived, when the specific character display stock is performed, the special stock display mode may be changed. For example, a specific character as a special stock display performs a predetermined action, or changes such as a costume change. In this case, even after the stock of the specific character display reaches the upper limit, it is possible to ensure pleasure that the specific character display is stocked (to the opportunity to come).

  Further, for example, when the specific effect button 127 is operated with 6 points accumulated, 5 points may be subtracted to derive a specific character display, or all points may be consumed ( It may be configured such that a specific character display is derived (with the stock point being set to 0) (the more point usage, the more the specific effect display of a rare pattern or a dedicated pattern is derived). You may choose either.

  (U; interlocking with the hold icon and the stock point display) As the form of the hold icon 461, it may be changed to a normal hold icon 461, a prefetch hold icon 463 that suggests the contents of the effect change display, and a prefetch hold icon 463. If there is a derivation preparation hold icon (derivative preparation teaching means) that cannot be performed, and the specific effect button is operated in a state where the stock point display is displayed in a mode indicating less than 5 points, the stock point is decremented by 1, and derivation preparation is performed. The hold icon may be changed to the prefetch hold icon 463. In this case, the use value of the stock for the specific character display and the range of use can be expanded, and the function of stocking the specific character display can be used more effectively. Note that the prefetch hold icon 463 may be derived without going through the derivation preparation hold icon.

  (V: Use of notification of effect handle) In the above embodiment, information obtained by visually recognizing a winning device other than the decorative symbol display device 42 at least in a state where a specific character display is derived is used as an aspect of the effect handle 401. You may comprise so that it can transmit to a player by the change (the reaction mode transmitted with senses other than vision). For example, when a ball entering the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is detected during the big hit state, the effect handle 401 is slightly displaced up and down once and the specific variable ball of the second variable winning device 32b is entered. When a ball entering the unit 145 is detected, the effect handle 401 may be displaced (vibrated) a plurality of times up and down.

  That is, in order to advance the game, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to make the game balls enter the start winning devices 33a and 33b, and in the big hit state, the game is made to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. It is advantageous for the player to enter the ball efficiently. Therefore, although the display of the specific character that the player is looking forward to is derived, the behavior related to the (analog) part related to the progress of the game (for example, the game ball can be successfully entered into the start winning devices 32a and 32b. Or the like), there is a possibility that the eyes may be shifted over there, and there is a concern that this may lead to a situation where the specific character display or the like cannot be fully enjoyed.

  In this regard, according to this aspect example, even if the specific character display derived to the decorative symbol display device 42 is kept visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the entry into a predetermined winning device or the like by the reaction state. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball can be successfully entered into the predetermined winning device without moving the line of sight toward the predetermined winning device, and the specific character display and the accompanying sound can be displayed. As a result, the specific character display can be more thoroughly enjoyed.

  Conversely, in a situation where a reaction mode (vibration of the effect handle 401 indicating that a game ball is entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b) may occur, the reaction mode may occur. No situation occurs, and there is a situation where the configuration related to a predetermined prize-winning device must be looked at (the game ball being launched into the game area is not well aimed, and the game area or game ball is launched. It is possible to grasp that the ball is clogged in any of the configurations to be performed, or that there is no hand-held game ball, etc. It is possible to prevent a situation such as incurring profits.

  The reaction mode may be such that the line of sight can be confirmed while maintaining the specific character display of the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, so as to enter the visual field of the player who visually recognizes the sound effect and the specific character display. Examples include light emission by a light emitting means capable of emitting light, a specific effect display, or a display in the vicinity thereof, a tactile change of a part touched by a player, and the like. However, by setting the reaction mode to the production handle 401 (transmission by tactile change), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character display and the accompanying voice are disturbed by the reaction mode light emission or voice. The effect of having the user fully enjoy the character display is more reliably achieved. It is also possible to set a reaction mode other than entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, for example, a reaction mode corresponding to the passage of the through gate 34 (detection of the through gate switch 225). Is possible.

  In addition, the production handle 401 is provided with a pressure sensor. For example, in the character selection screen, the character selection cursor moves by detecting a predetermined pressure or more from one of the left and right sides of the production handle 401. It may be configured such that an operation such as gripping the effect handle 401 is performed, and the character indicated by the cursor is selected and determined by detecting a predetermined pressure or more from both the left side and the right side. Further, the force for gripping the effect handle 401 may be detected by a pressure sensor, and the result of the effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 may be changed according to the magnitude of the force.

  In addition, the content transmitted by the operation of the effect handle 401 is not particularly limited, and the occurrence of various error states may be taught. For example, a lamp corresponding to various error states and the like is provided above the effect handle 401 so that when the error state occurs, the effect handle performs an operation corresponding to each error state and the corresponding lamp is lit. May be. In this case, until the operation of the effect handle 401 is grasped, the player who wants to know the meaning of the operation of the effect handle 401 and the error content can check it by looking at the lamp.

  Note that the operation of the effect handle 401 may be changed according to the character appearing on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the effect using the effect handle 401 is performed. For example, before the character appearing on the decorative symbol display device 42 is announced, the effect handle 401 may be operated first so that the character that the player appears can be predicted. Also, changes in the feel of the production handle 401 (changes in hardness such as hard and soft, changes in shape such as thin, thick, large (open), small (closed), and deformation / displacement operations Etc.), it may be possible to derive a game to which the corresponding character is applied.

  (W: Guidance on number of hold by effect handle) Further, in the configuration in which the effect handle 401 is vibrated when entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the first variation display has an upper limit stored in the normal mode. And when the 4th change display is the upper limit of the second variation display in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode, the change in the aspect of the effect handle 401 is different from the case where the other hold storage is performed. May be performed.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid the waste that the game ball enters (over-wins) the start winning devices 33a and 33b in a state where the fluctuation display is not held even if the game balls are inserted into the start winning devices 33a and 33b. Can be made easier. In other words, for example, when the specific character display is derived in a situation where the variable display is not held, the line of sight remains in the specific character display and the game ball is continuously fired without fear of over winning. Can be held. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a state in which several variation displays are held as much as possible, and to advance the game smoothly.

  In addition, when performing the part effect in which the effect handle 401 is operated, an announcement may be made to notify that the part effect is started in a part other than the effect handle 401 such as the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when the production handle 401 is provided with production handle detection means (infrared sensor, optical sensor, etc.) for detecting that the player's hand is approaching or in contact with the production handle 401, there is no detection of the production handle detection means at the time of part production. Even if guidance for prompting the operation of the effect handle 401 is performed or the condition for deriving the action of the effect handle 401 in the parts effect is satisfied, the hand of the player approaches the effect handle 401 on the condition that the effect handle detecting means is detected. In other words, the production handle 401 may be configured to operate.

  (X: Modification of production handle, etc.) In the above embodiment, the production handle 401 is provided as a reaction mode means and a tactile transmission means capable of changing the mode so that a change can be sensed by touch, but another configuration is adopted. May be. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the effect handle 401 is provided in a substantially symmetrical position of the handle 18 for launching operation, but may be provided in another position. However, by providing the effect handle 401 at the position of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to reduce fatigue due to continuing touching the effect handle 401 as much as possible.

  Further, the configuration, installation position, operation, and the like of the effect handle 401 are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the effect handle 401 may be configured to be rotatable and slidable. Further, for example, the configuration for changing the outer shape of the production handle 401 is not particularly limited. You may comprise so that a moving part can appear and disappear. In addition, there are a moving part with a flat tip at the tip of the moving part that protrudes from the slit and a moving part that is substantially sharp. May be.

  (Y; dedicated parts) In the above embodiment, the player is embodied as a rubber part that is provided so as to cover the production handle 401 as the dedicated part 411 that can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 10 by the player. The configuration is not particularly limited to this, and the shape of the dedicated part, the position of the part mounting part to which the dedicated part can be mounted, the number of part mounting parts, and the like can be set as appropriate. Moreover, it is desirable that there are a plurality of variations in dedicated parts that can be attached to the same dedicated part. Furthermore, it is good also as providing the some part attachment part from which the exclusive parts which can be attached differ. It should be noted that even if the dedicated part 411 is not mounted, it is preferable not to affect the progress of the game. Furthermore, the dedicated parts 411 may be those that are not assumed to be touched by the player as an effect (that do not function as tactile transmission means).

  Specifically, for example, a plurality of animal characters appear in the effect of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a dedicated part in the shape of (part of) an animal is formed on the upper part of the front surface of the front frame 14. To move the dedicated part, change the lighting state, change the color (light emission means can be in either the dedicated part or the part mounting part), audio is output through the dedicated part or its vicinity You may comprise so that it may do. Further, for example, a special part may be attached to the front part of the upper plate 19 so that the special part can be slid to the left and right. In addition, when a dedicated part is used for decoration or the like, if the dedicated part is not attached to the part mounting portion, the processing for changing the mode of the dedicated part and the driving operation may be wasted. . In this regard, by checking the detection information of the attachment detection means that can grasp that the dedicated part 411 is attached to the part mounting part, the dedicated part is not attached to the part mounting part even though the dedicated part is not attached. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the process for changing the mode and the drive operation are executed. Therefore, simplification of control, power saving, suppression of deterioration due to use, and the like can be achieved.

  The attachment detection means may include a plurality of sensors or switches that can detect a predetermined part of the dedicated part 411 at a position where the player cannot see or touch it. Further, the attachment detection means may include part reading means capable of reading information on RFID (Radio frequency identification) such as an IC tag as part information means provided in the dedicated part 411. That is, it is possible to suppress a situation in which something is attached in place of removing the dedicated part 411 from the part attaching portion so as not to be understood.

  Note that the information stored in the dedicated part 411 is not particularly limited. When the dedicated part 411 corresponds to a predetermined character, the dedicated character 411 is only attached and the corresponding character is a specific character. You may comprise so that it may be set as. In addition, for the dedicated part 411, the player's total jackpot number and the total variable display count for the same model as the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the dedicated part 411 so as to replace the mobile linked game described later. Such game information may be stored, and such game information may be exchanged with the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the dedicated part, audio data storage means, audio output means, and audio control means electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 are provided (sound can be replaced with a display or used together). By clearing the predetermined game conditions (number of rotations, number of wins, appearance of target production) with the dedicated parts attached to (or the arrival of a predetermined date and time), it is stored in the audio data storage means. You may comprise so that reproduction | regeneration of predetermined audio | voice data may be permitted. In this case, it is possible to add new effects at any time in the dedicated parts. In addition, when the means for electrically operating in the dedicated part is provided, the power storage means is provided in the dedicated part, and the power storage means is charged by attaching the dedicated part to the pachinko machine 10 May be.

  Also, the mounting position and mounting direction of the dedicated part 411 can be adjusted so that it can be adapted to the height of the player, etc. (a plurality of parts mounting parts can be provided at predetermined intervals, or the part mounting parts can be displaced) Configured). For example, the dedicated part has the function of a speaker, is configured to be attached to the left and right of the front surface of the front frame 14, and is configured to be able to change the height and orientation so as to match the position of the player's ear. It is good. Note that the information may be stored in the dedicated part 411, and the above setting may be automatically performed only by attaching the dedicated part 411.

  In addition, by attaching the dedicated part 411 to the effect handle 401, the player's hand may be configured to be able to discriminate the operation of the effect handle 401 at a position away from the effect handle 401. In this case, for example, vibration of the production handle can be sensed with the left hand through the dedicated part while the left arm is placed on the armrest of the chair. In addition, the special part can be attached to the handle 18, and the right arm is placed on the armrest of the chair, and the handle 18 is operated with the right hand (the rotation operation of the rotary operation body 18a and the firing stop operation of the stop lever 18b). Of these, at least a rotation operation) may be possible. The dedicated parts are attached to and fixed to the base of the handle 18 (the base that protrudes forward from the front frame 14 and supports the rotary operation body 18a), and the rotary body 18a is rotatably supported by the parts main body. A rotation interlocking part that is attached and fixed to the base, an operation position for pressing the stop lever 18b, and a switch part that is displaceable between a non-operation position that is spaced apart from each other, and the player rotates the rotation interlocking part. Thus, the rotation operating body 18a may be rotated, and the stop lever 18b may be operated by operating the switch unit.

  In addition, the material of the dedicated part 411 is not particularly limited, and rubber, thermoplastic elastomer (olefin elastomer), sponge rubber, synthetic sponge, cloth, a combination of chain-like metal or resin, and the like are appropriately used. You can choose. As described above, the dedicated part 411 is formed into a bag shape with a material that can be elastically deformed, and a configuration in which the first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 of the effect handle 401 are appropriately displaced is adopted. Thus, the tension applied to the dedicated part 411 can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel effect that the feel (hardness, tension) of the dedicated part 411 changes.

  Further, in the dedicated part 411, an attachment part (holding frame 412) with the pachinko machine 10 and a contact part (bag-like part) touched by the player may be configured to be detachable. In this case, it is possible to reduce the cost on the player side by sharing the attachment part, or to wash the contact part (even if there is an electronic component in the attachment part).

  In addition, you may comprise so that an exclusive part can be attached with respect to the site | part which another player touches. For example, the part touched by the handle of the handle 18, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the ball removal button 123, the ball removal lever 25, and the like can be given. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 can be further attached to the pachinko machine 10 or can be satisfied by a player who is particularly concerned about hygiene. Further, for example, it indicates that a jackpot state occurs (a signal that is output from the sub-control device 262 and changed to a corresponding visual appearance is input in some percent when the jackpot state occurs) Notification means (notification lamp or the like) may be attached as a dedicated part. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a notification means, not only the case where a signal is sent in parallel to the external notification means as a dedicated part and the provided notification means, but the provided notification means, There may be a case where another signal is sent to the external notification means, or a signal is sent only to the external notification means.

  Moreover, it is desirable that the dedicated part 411 is configured to be foldable. For example, the bent part (which may be made of solid rubber or slightly foamed rubber) that is thinner than other parts on the top, bottom, left, and right of the dedicated part 411 extends forward and backward, and the front part (protruding direction front end part) is bent. It may be configured in the same manner as the unit, and may be configured to be folded once in the horizontal direction and folded once in the vertical direction.

  (Z: Attachment detection means) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the attachment detection means and the sub-control device 262 are configured to be able to grasp the type of the dedicated part 411 attached to the effect handle 401, and If the control device 262 determines that the first dedicated part is attached to the effect handle 401, the control device 262 changes the mode of the first dedicated part to a mode corresponding to the first dedicated part, When it is determined that a second special part different from the first special part is attached, the aspect of the second special part is changed to a form corresponding to the second special part different from the aspect change of the first special part. It may be configured to be possible. In this case, a different function can be given to each type of the dedicated part 411 (differentiating each dedicated part 411 by different operations of the production handle 401), and by attaching the dedicated part 411 to the pachinko machine 10. Can be further improved.

  Whether the first dedicated part or the second dedicated part is determined is based on a difference in detection due to a difference in shape (for example, a plurality of detection sensors are provided in one part mounting portion, The RFID tag such as an IC tag may be embedded in the dedicated part 411, and information such as the IC tag may be read (IC tag reader as a part reading means at or near the effect handle 401) Etc.) may be determined. In this case, only by attaching the dedicated part 411, the type or the like of the dedicated part 411 attached to the effect handle 401 can be determined, and the mode of the dedicated part 411 or the like can be changed to a corresponding mode. Therefore, the convenience can be improved and the interest in attaching the dedicated part 411 can be further enhanced.

  For example, when the cover of the front frame 14 is made of a translucent white translucent resin, a three-color LED or the like is mounted behind the cover, and a blue dedicated part is attached to the part mounting portion, the three-color LED May change to an emission color mainly composed of blue, and when the dedicated red part is attached to the part mounting portion, the three-color LED may change to an emission color mainly composed of red. In addition, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, a game area in which a game ball can move, and in the case of a slot machine, the entire front or almost the whole of a variable display area in which a rotating body such as a reel is installed is transmissive display. If it is configured to be covered with the means (organic EL display etc.) and the dedicated part is attached to the part mounting part, the display for decoration corresponding to the dedicated part in the transmissive display means (frame background (such as a frame) of the corresponding motif) Display, display of corresponding characters, etc.) may be derived.

  Furthermore, it is not limited to the configuration in which either the first dedicated part or the second dedicated part can be mounted on the same part mounting part (the structure of the mounting part is common). May be configured such that only the first dedicated part can be mounted, and the second part mounting portion may be configured such that only the second dedicated part can be mounted. . In this case, the first part mounting portion only needs to be able to operate corresponding to the first dedicated part, and the second part mounting portion only needs to be able to operate corresponding to the second dedicated part. In addition, when adopting the configuration, when a special part other than the first special part is attached to the first part attachment part, and a special part other than the second special part is attached to the second part attachment part. In some cases, it may be configured to be able to derive a notification that the dedicated parts to be installed are wrong.

  In addition, the dedicated part 411 attached to the production handle 401 corresponds to the specific character, and after the big hit state (big hit round) starts, the specific character video and the specific character video are not allowed. If the display overlaps and the derivation timing of the specific character video is changed later, if there is no time to derive the specific character video before the end of the final round, specify In the period when the character video is supposed to be performed, another jackpot video (a jackpot video other than the specific character video) is derived, and a part effect as a specific effect may be performed.

  (Aa; cooperation between dedicated part and decorative design display device) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401, based on the detection of the attachment detection means, You may comprise so that the attachment reaction effect as an attachment reaction aspect corresponding to the said attachment may be performed. In other words, in the above-described embodiment, when the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401, the attachment lamp 417 is lit, but not only that, but the sub-control device 262 is based on the detection of the attachment detection means. The decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to derive an attachment reaction display corresponding to the attachment of the dedicated part 411 or an attachment reaction sound.

  In particular, by attaching the dedicated part 411 to the effect handle 401 after first inputting the password of the mobile linked game, the attachment reaction display corresponding to the character specified by the player included in the password and the attachment reaction sound are displayed. It may be configured to be derived. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 includes information about which character the dedicated part 411 corresponds to, and the pachinko machine 10 can read such information (an IC tag and a reader may be used or the dedicated part 411 is engaged). The shape of the part 413 is changed for each type of the dedicated part 411, and the difference in the shape is read on the pachinko machine 10 side (a plurality of sensors for detecting each responsible part of the engaging part 413 or the dedicated part 411 is attached. Furthermore, the dedicated part 411 may be rotated once, and may be read by a plurality of switches that are turned on by each responsible portion of the engaging portion 413).

  In this case, for example, a character corresponding to the dedicated part 411 appears on the decorative symbol display device 42 to display a greeting of the store visit or display of enthusiasm for the game. Thus, the start of the game can be excited and the interest in attaching the dedicated part 411 can be further enhanced. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the production in which the decorative symbol display device 42 and the like and the dedicated part 411 cooperate.

  When the dedicated part 411 is removed from the effect handle 401 (for example, when the dedicated part flag indicating the state where the dedicated part 411 is attached is switched from on to off), the mounting lamp 417 is turned off. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to derive a display corresponding to the removal of the dedicated part. In this case, for example, the character corresponding to the dedicated part 411 can say goodbye, and the game can be finished with good mood.

  Furthermore, you may comprise so that the aspect of a specific character display may differ with the state in which the exclusive parts were attached to the parts attachment part, and the state in which it is not attached. In this case, the aspect of the specific character display specified by the player can be changed by attaching the dedicated parts. Accordingly, the derivation of the specific character display and the interest in dedicated parts can be further enhanced.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in order to specify a specific character, an input for selecting a character on the character selection screen by operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 is performed, but a dedicated part is attached to the part mounting portion. However, you may comprise so that it may become input operation to the pachinko machine 10 by the player for specifying a specific character display. In this case, it is possible to save the labor of input operation for specifying the specific character display, and to increase the mood of the game to the gaming machine that changes to the corresponding mode by attaching the dedicated part 411.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the specific character display and the notification display overlap, or when the specific character display overlaps, the right to derive the specific character display is stocked. Instead of or in addition to the stock, a part effect that changes the mode of the dedicated part 411 may be performed. In this case, when the specific character display that the player is looking forward to seeing overlaps with some display, the aspect of the dedicated part 411 changes instead of the reduced visibility of the specific character display. . For this reason, the fall of the interest by the visual recognition of a specific character display being prevented can be suppressed. In addition, as part production derived | led-out at the time of the overlap of a specific character display, when it overlaps with a specific character display, it comprises so that the behavior relevant to a specific character display may be performed, and when it overlaps with a notification display, it is related to a notification display. It may be configured to perform a behavior (behavior suggesting content if it is a production, behavior such as a handshake for resumption promise or resumption if it is an error notification or the like).

  (Bb: Locking of dedicated parts) In the above embodiment, it is possible to provide a locking means that makes it impossible to remove the dedicated parts 411 attached to the effect handle 401. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a hole is provided in the engaging portion 413 and the engaging portion 413 is engaged with the engaged portion 414 so that the lock bar is inserted into the hole portion of the engaging portion 413. Good. Further, for example, after the dedicated part 411 is attached, before or after the lock is performed, an unlock password input screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (configured to be locked by password input). The input screen is deleted when the input is completed. Also, the decorative symbol display device 42 can be operated by operating the release button 416, by performing a corresponding selection operation on the menu screen of the decorative symbol display device 42, or by performing an operation of terminating the mobile linked game. A screen for entering the unlock password may be displayed on the screen, and the lock may be released when the correct password is entered. In addition, it is desirable to provide a configuration that can be removed even if the password is forgotten, such as a predetermined operation on the back side of the inner frame 12. Further, the function of releasing the lock state of the dedicated part 411 constitutes the lock release means.

  As described above, by providing a lock function for the dedicated part 411, the dedicated part 411 is purposely removed to prevent the theft of the dedicated part 411 in order to leave the toilet for a short time such as going to the toilet or buying a drink. The situation of carrying around can be avoided. In addition, it is possible to put on a game hall prepared by the antitheft measures, and to improve convenience.

  The configuration of the locking means and the unlocking means is not particularly limited, and the key can be removed by attaching the dedicated part 411, and a key hole for releasing the locked state by inserting the key and performing a predetermined operation is provided. Also good. In this case, although it is possible to suppress annoying acts such as taking away only the key, it is difficult to deal with the loss, so that the lock state may be switched by inputting a password or a combination of inputs of the cross button 126. desirable. Also, as a locking means, in a normal state, the release button 416 or the dedicated part 411 is placed in a housed state so that contact from the outside is prohibited, and when the predetermined effect is performed, the dedicated part 411 is removed. It is good also as a thing of the structure which makes it an exposure state (for example, it becomes a substantially dome shape in the accommodation state) so that the contact from the outside is possible when operation / input is performed.

  In addition, when the production handle 401 is not used (in the state where the parts production is not performed), the production handle 401 is in a state where the production handle 401 cannot be contacted (covered with something like a cover). Etc.), it is possible to suppress mischief of the effect handle 401, damage to the effect handle 401, and the like.

  (Cc: Detection of operation on the effect handle) A pressure sensor capable of detecting that pressure is applied to the effect handle 401 of the above embodiment may be provided. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production handle 401 is destroyed by making a warning sound when a force is applied to the production handle 401 roughly. The pressure gauge and pressure storage means for storing the measurement value of the pressure gauge are provided. When a predetermined effect is performed based on the value stored in the pressure storage means, or when the effect handle 401 is damaged, the It can be used as a material for identifying the factor (in combination with a surveillance camera installed in the game hall).

  Further, the production handle 401 may be configured to be displaceable within a range in which a substantially hemisphere is drawn like a joystick and each posture can be detected, or a gyroscope may be mounted on the production handle 401. Good. In this case, more various effects can be derived. Further, for example, a plurality of contact detection points made of a conductive material are provided on the surface of the effect handle 401 so that the contact detection points touched by the player can be specified, or the surface portions of the effect handle 401 are separated from each other by two layers. It is possible to detect which part of the production handle 401 has been operated by making the structure and the first layer on the surface side flexibly deformed according to the operation and making it possible to identify the part that has contacted the second layer. You may comprise.

  (Dd: Damage to the production handle) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, only the engaged portion 414, the cover member 406, or the first slide member 402, the second slide of the production handle 401. The slide member 403 may be configured to be detachable separately from other parts. That is, it is possible to improve the convenience in replacing parts by making it possible to replace a part that is relatively easily damaged or deteriorated, such as being worn when the dedicated part 411 is attached or detached, or used. For example, if the malicious player performs a mischief such as filling a foreign object with respect to the engaged part 414 engaged with the engaging part 413 of the dedicated part 411, the dedicated part 411 cannot be used, or Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which work until reuse (for example, removal of the filling) becomes difficult.

  In addition, in order to suppress the mischievous action to the production | presentation handle 401, when things other than the exclusive parts 411 are attached to the production | presentation handle 401 based on the information grasped | ascertained by the attachment detection means, corresponding information is shown to a pachinko machine. 10 may be configured to output to the outside of 10 or to derive a corresponding mode in the pachinko machine 10.

  (Ee; operation input by line of sight) A line-of-sight input means that enables input based on the movement of the player's eyes may be provided. In this case, it is possible to perform a predetermined input based on the player's will even in a state where both hands of the player are buried (the right hand is operating the handle 18 and the left hand is operating the effect handle 401). Therefore, the range of things that can be done in production is widened, and improvement in production performance can be achieved.

  A light projecting unit capable of irradiating light (infrared rays) toward a player located in front, a light receiving unit that detects light emitted from the light projecting unit and reflected by the player's eyeball, and the light receiving unit On the basis of the detected information, it is possible to provide a line-of-sight detection means comprising an analysis means for analyzing the position and line-of-sight angle of the player's eyes. That is, the pachinko machine 10 side determines where the player is looking, that is, what information the player is trying to obtain, or what operation the player is trying to perform. Can do. For this reason, for example, even if the player does not move his / her hand, it is possible to detect the player's line of sight and execute corresponding processing. As a result, a relatively large amount of information can be provided to the player while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

  In addition, by configuring so that a game menu operation or the like can be performed without moving the hand at all, for example, a dedicated part 411 attached to the effect handle 401, a drink, a portable communication terminal, etc. are held in the hand. It is possible to make a quick selection in a state where the user is present, or to make a selection in a situation where the user does not want to use his hand as much as possible, such as hurting his hand. Therefore, even in situations where the use of hands is refrained, the same operability can be realized, and the convenience can be improved. Furthermore, even a player who feels embarrassed with a predetermined selection / determination act can make a selection / determination secretly and without much effort. Therefore, even a shy or troubled player can fully enjoy the game.

  in addition. When the specific character display is derived when the player looks away or closes his eyes, the effect handle 401 may be configured to perform the target motion.

  (Ff; Input from Effect Handle) In the above embodiment, a predetermined input (such as a displacement operation) to the effect handle 401 may be input to the sub-control device 262. In this case, by performing a predetermined operation on the effect handle 401 (after setting the operating range of the effect handle 401 according to the effect, depending on the direction in which the effect handle 401 is displaced according to the player's operation, etc. The display mode on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like can be changed, and more various effects related to the dedicated parts 411 can be performed.

  Further, a thermometer may be provided in the effect handle 401 so that the temperature of the player can be measured and input to the sub-control device 262. For example, in combination with information on a real-time clock capable of measuring the date and time, the character may give a topic about physical condition or weather.

  (Gg; display in front of game area) In the front of the game area (glass unit 137), a transmissive display device (such as a transmissive liquid crystal display device) may be provided so as to cover almost the entire front of the game area. Good. For example, in a game area (in the current situation), in a range in front of an area where a game ball is unlikely to pass, it corresponds to a predetermined effect display (parts effect) or a predetermined game state (probability change mode). Thus, the display of the transmissive display device may be performed. For example, in the part effect, it is possible to derive an effect as if the predetermined character is confronted with the display of the predetermined character of the transmission type display device and the dedicated part 411 (the effect handle 401). Further, in a state where the trajectory of the game ball is not fixed (the handle 18 moves more than a predetermined amount within a predetermined period), the transmissive display device may be configured not to display.

  (Hh; only the specific character display is displayed by the player's operation) In the above embodiment, when the specific effect button 127 (changeable to other operation inputs) is operated in a state where the specific character display is derived. May be configured such that displays other than the specific character display (other layers) are not displayed.

  (Ii: production change by handle operation) The first winning device and the second winning device (those that are not a winning device but a through gate are acceptable) that have the same value (prize ball, etc.) of the information that detected the game ball. A plurality of other than the above may also be provided), and different presentation displays may be selected depending on whether the player has entered the first winning device or the second winning device. In this case, it is possible to provide a new effect in which the effect display is changed at the winning destination of the game ball, instead of a direct operation to the effect button 125 or the like. In addition, it is desirable that the first winning device and the second winning device can be distinguished by operating the player's handle 18. In this case, it is possible to select an effect display that changes depending on the winning place, not with randomness, but with the player's will.

  (Jj: production means) The number, shape, and type of display means for production are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 42, a movable display device may be provided. Further, a dot matrix display device, an EL display device, or the like may be mounted.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, between the functional position located in the front (of a display part) of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 as an effect display means, and the retreat position which remove | deviates from the front (of a display part) of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 It is also possible to provide a movable accessory (movable accessory) as an effect means capable of displacing and to displace the movable accessory to a functional position in response to a button effect or the like. Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the specific character display on the decorative design display device 42 overlaps with the disapproval display on the decorative design display device 42. The effect as the position may be “non-permitted display” and may be set so as not to overlap with the specific character display. In addition, it is not necessary to display all the effects having the movable combination as a functional position as a disapproval display. For example, the movable combination may be displaced to the functional position as part of the specific character display. For example, a button effect period that prompts the operation of the effect button 125 is set during a part of the specific character display period, and during that period, the moving image of the specific character display does not proceed and the effect button 125 is operated. Can move to the functional position, and after the movable accessory is displaced to the retracted position, or after the reaction effect display on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the movable accessory is not displaced to the functional position (button You may comprise so that a specific character animation may advance after the production period ends.

  In addition, a light guide plate is provided in front of the game area, a light source that allows light to enter the light guide plate is provided, the light source is caused to emit light according to a predetermined trigger, and a predetermined display mode is visually recognized on the light guide plate. It may be configured. In addition, regarding the display of the light guide plate, it may be configured to avoid duplication with the specific character display when setting non-permission display or the like for each model and setting the non-permission display.

  (Kk) A mode and a display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 and an effect using the hold icon 461 (the content of the change information is grasped when the change information is stored on hold, and the hold icon A corresponding pre-production (such as a suggestion of jackpot expectation) in the form of 461 can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, the hold icon 461 is configured not to teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display based on a winning ball. The hold icon 461 may be configured to have information indicating whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the first variation display or the second variation display, or may be configured in such a manner. Good.

  (Ll) Further, in the above-described embodiment, proximity detection means (for example, proximity detection or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative symbol display device 42 and connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub-control device 262) Further, a proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light emitting part and a light receiving part may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold icon 461 is based on detection of the finger or the like. You may comprise so that it may change or move. In this case, interest in the hold icon 461 can be improved.

  (Mm) In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the timing of the firing of the launching device 60 (launch interval), but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. You may comprise so that timing (interval of discharge) may be measured. In this case, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main controller 261.

  (Nn) In the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, functions of augmented reality and virtual reality (mixed reality) may be provided. That is, when a player installs an AR application provided on a server or the like of a gaming machine manufacturer on a mobile communication terminal and points the mobile communication terminal to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the AR application is activated, shooting of the mobile communication terminal is performed. A virtual image object (character movie or the like) added by the function of the AR application is synthesized with the image of the pachinko machine 10 taken by the means (camera), and the display means (display such as liquid crystal) of the mobile communication terminal To be displayed. In addition, a marker that allows the AR application to recognize the type and location of the image object to be derived can be displayed, for example, on the decorative symbol display device 42, and a marker display that can display a marker in the vicinity of the effect handle 401 Means may be provided. Then, when the mobile communication terminal is pointed to the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated so that the marker is included in the shooting range, for example, the character is displayed as if it jumped out in front of the decorative symbol display device 42, Further, when the mobile communication terminal is directed to the effect handle 401, the character hand may be displayed as if it appeared at the position of the effect handle 401.

  Also, for example, by wearing virtual reality goggles (VR headset) brought by the player and positioning the VR headset with the pachinko machine 10 by a method such as reading a marker, basically, In areas other than the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (game area, upper plate 19, handle 18, lower plate 15, etc.), an image related to the motif of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an underwater image) is displayed, and the world of the motif is displayed. A simulated experience of moving is provided. An image related to the event (marine life such as fish) is displayed at the position of the effect handle 401, and the effect handle 401 performs a corresponding operation.

  When the effect handle 401 is relatively displaced, a marker is provided on the effect handle 401 so that the virtual image object does not deviate from the effect handle 401. In addition, if a VR headset is attached and the VR function is turned on, the player's sensitivity to reality will decrease, so the mechanical error of the pachinko machine 10 and earthquake detection using the vibration detection function, etc. Is preferably displayed (notified) on an image visually recognized by the player via the VR headset. Further, the virtual reality is displayed in the range of about 180 degrees with the decorative symbol display device 42 as the center (vertex) and looks back (or the marker is removed from the shooting range when the shooting of the marker is set as the display condition). ) Etc., it is desirable to configure so that the real world can be seen.

  (Oo: Mobile linked game) In the above embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine manufacturer or the like via a communication portable terminal or the like owned by the player (so-called mobile game). You may comprise so that an interlocking game) can be performed. Further, when the mobile linked game is terminated, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the portable communication terminal, and the portable communication terminal In the configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of occurrences of the variation display counter for counting the number of variations of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile linked game may include information indicating various counter values. Furthermore, information on the total number of game balls fired, the type of effect that has been derived, the number of times, the number of times that the player has operated the effect button 125 during the button effect, etc. are included in the two-dimensional code. Also good. In this case, the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp the gaming situation.

  The value of the counter is erased by being two-dimensionally encoded, and the other values are accumulated (even if the power is turned off) (the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch 323). ) It's good. Moreover, you may comprise so that a player can select from several types about the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo feather | blade member 431 (with respect to the player who is performing a mobile interlocking game).

  (Pp) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the jackpot round in which the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 32b is made into an open state is set to the 8th round, the order and frequency | count of the jackpot round in which the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 32b is made into an open state Is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the second round and the seventh round may be jackpot rounds in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened.

  Moreover, a state (“latency mode”) that is a high probability state and a low entry state may be provided. Furthermore, the jackpot state to which the latent mode is given is not a jackpot that can be expected to increase the number of game balls (so-called “bonus with a ball”), the opening time of the first variable winning device 32a is short, and the number of jackpot rounds It is good also as a big hit (so-called "no big hit big hit") where there is little increase of game balls. For example, the first variable prize-winning device 32a may be configured to be opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and after that is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. In addition, the first variable winning device 32a is provided with a small hit state that is opened and closed in a pattern similar to the big hit state in which the latent mode is given (winning with a predetermined probability when the big hit state does not occur). It is good. In this case, since it becomes difficult to understand the assignment of the latent mode, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the latent mode is provided.

  In addition, when the “latency mode” is a big hit, the decorative symbol is not a doublet but a specific combination on the active line (chance symbol combination, for example, “3 in the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas” ”,“ 4 ”,“ 1 ”may be stopped and displayed). Further, as the stage of the decorative symbol display device 42, there is provided a “precursor stage” that shifts after the end of the big hit state of the “latent probability mode” and after the end of the “small hit” state. However, it may be configured such that the production balance or the production content changes (for example, it is easy to select production patterns that are usually difficult to select).

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning lottery varies, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high pitched state (after the jackpot state is given) The above-described configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of variations are provided. Furthermore, the winning probability in the winning support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second start winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model.

  (Qq) In the above embodiment, the order in which the second variation display that has been suspended after the first variation display that has already been suspended is digested before the first variation display is changed. The second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display so as to move back and forth, but the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, Regardless of whether the second variation display is based on the game ball entering the second start prize device 33b, the game ball enters the first start prize device 33a and the second start prize device 33b. In order, the corresponding variation display may be suspended, and the variation display previously suspended may be digested in order.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, it was based on the case where it wins by the big hit in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the 1st starting winning device 33a, and the winning to the 2nd starting winning device 33b The jackpot type distribution ratio that can be given differs depending on whether or not the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, but it may be configured to be the same. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of winning balls based on entering the first start winning device 33a is the same as the number of winning balls based on entering the second starting winning device 33b. May be larger than the other.

  Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display cannot be stored on hold.

  (Rr) In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 261 performs the normal process (see FIG. 10) after the main process (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a structure. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of normal processing in the above embodiment is performed. For example, in timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, The flag which shows generation | occurrence | production of ON is mentioned. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (Ss) In the above embodiment, when the special symbol variation display is started, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and the result of the confirmation process (a success / failure flag) It is also possible to determine whether or not to generate a big hit state according to the state, etc., and a variation display pattern or the like.

  (Tt) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided, and an effect mode corresponding to the date and time information of the real-time clock may be derived. Further, it may be configured such that a production that is easy to select changes depending on time and date (a table for a production that is easy to select changes). For example, a real-time clock is provided in the sub-control device 262 and a plurality of settlement time setting tables that are referred to when it is decided to lengthen the settlement effect are provided, and the time when the decision effect is lengthened is in the morning. If there is, the first settling time setting table is referred to, and if it is afternoon (until the evening), the second settling time setting table is set in which a longer time than the first settling time setting table is easily set. If the closing time of the game hall is approaching (for example, after 21 o'clock), the third settlement is easier to set than the first settlement time setting table or the first settlement time setting table. You may comprise so that a time setting table may be referred. A real-time clock is provided in the main controller 261, and a plurality of change time determination tables referred to when determining the change times of the special display devices 43a and 43b are provided, and it is relatively short at night (for example, after 21:00). You may comprise so that it may become easy to select the variation time determination table in which variation time is easy to set.

  (Uu) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed between a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows entry into the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into the specific area ( Variable entry means comprising wing members), specific entry means and non-specific entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and detection of a game ball entering the specific entry means Specific entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) to be detected, special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and game balls entering the special start means are detected. A special start detection means for controlling and a main control means for performing opening / closing control of the variable pitching means, and when a game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is designated as the specific pitching means and the non-specific pitching means. Regardless of which ball is entered, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player. The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, is a small hit state in which the variable pitching means is opened once or plural times for the first time, or the variable pitching means is set to the first time Whether or not to generate a jackpot state where a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the open state for a longer second time or a predetermined number of game balls enter the open variable winning means, and this is repeated a specified number of times. If you win a lottery in the winning lottery, you will generate a small win status, if you win a big hit in the lottery lottery, and if there is a detection of specific entry detection means The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a big hit state is generated and a big hit state is generated when detection of the special entry detection means is performed in the small hit state.

  In addition to pachinko machines, various ball games, similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as revolving game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines May be.

  The basic configuration of the slot machine (rotating game machine) includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button), and the confirmed identification at the time of the stop The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In the case where the present invention is embodied in a slot machine having an effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the operation of the start operation means and the stop operation means is performed in a state where the specific character display is derived by the effect display means. It is determined whether or not the effect display derived to the effect display means is permitted to overlap with the derived specific character display, and a process corresponding to the determination result is performed. And

  As a basic configuration of a gaming machine (ball-use rotation type gaming machine) in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, “a variable in which identification information is confirmed and displayed after an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed. Display means, and dynamic display of identification information is started due to operation of a start operation means (for example, an operation lever), due to operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button), or for a predetermined time Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped by the passage and the confirmed identification information at the time of the stop is the specific identification information. And using a ball as a game medium (shared with a game ball of a pachinko machine), a predetermined number of balls are required for starting the dynamic display of the identification information, and a special game state is generated. The game machine ", which is configured as a number of balls are paid out Te.

  (Vv: Probability Change Mode Transition Conditions, etc.) In the above embodiment, two variable winning devices 32a and 32b are provided, but one may be used. Further, the arrangement and number of the first start winning device 33a, the second start winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, etc. are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately arranged for each model.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, on condition that a game ball enters into the specific pitching part 145 of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 32b in a jackpot state, the right to be provided with probability change mode after the jackpot state is obtained is obtained. Although it is configured, when it is associated with a predetermined jackpot type (for example, “15RS” and “8RS”) and the jackpot state of the predetermined jackpot type is won, the probability change mode is set after the jackpot state ends. The right to be granted may be obtained. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set for the probability variation mode. However, for example, the probability variation mode may be maintained until a big hit state occurs.

  (Ww; simultaneous variation) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing variable display, the other variable display is not performed (waiting). However, the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be executed simultaneously. In other words, if there is a hold for each of the first variation display and the second variation display, the corresponding variation display is executed (except during the hit state). It should be noted that, in a state where the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the big hit state is being performed, the variation display overlapping the variation display may not be newly started. Furthermore, when one of the fluctuation displays is stopped and displayed in a manner that teaches the occurrence of the big hit state, even if the other fluctuation display is changing, the other fluctuation display is interrupted (resume after the jackpot state ends) ) Or deleted.

  Further, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the variable display by the decorative symbols respectively corresponding to the first variation display and the second variation display (hereinafter, the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display) are simultaneously performed. Either one (second variation display or the one that is stopped first) may be preferentially displayed, or both are visible and only one is visible. You may comprise so that it may switch suitably to the state performed.

  Furthermore, the effect variation display from which the specific character display is derived may be preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, at the start of one of the first effect change display and the second effect change display, it is determined whether or not the other effect is changing. Confirm whether it is derived, do not display one of them in negative determination, check whether the specific character display is derived in the other effect variation display in affirmative determination, do not display one when derived, If not derived, one may be displayed (the aspect of the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched from the other effect variation display to one effect variation display somewhere). In this case, the chance of deriving the specific character display can be increased.

  It should be noted that whether or not the specific character display is derived in the other effect variation display is not only a visual display condition of one effect variation display (in the case of a big hit, it is assumed that it goes through a back and forth reach reach). Whether or not the front / rear reach is derived may be used as a visual display condition of one effect variation display.

  In addition, the specific character display is derived in one of the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display, and the occurrence of the big hit state is taught in the other effect variation display that overlaps with the one effect variation display. In the case where the one effect variation display ends later than the other effect variation display, the one effect variation display is shortened to the end timing of the other effect variation display (forced termination). When the one effect variation display ends earlier than the other effect variation display, the one effect variation display is extended to the end timing of the other effect variation display. Also good. In this case, it is possible to suggest / teach that the jackpot state has been won by utilizing the specific character display. Therefore, it can suppress that a specific character display replaces another effect display.

  In addition, the specific character display includes an extension effect display used when extending the first effect change display and the second effect change display, and a shortening effect display used when shortening. It is good also as having been prepared. In this case, it is possible to suddenly extend or shorten the effect variation display from which the specific character display is derived while suppressing the sense of incongruity (leading to a mode of suggesting / teaching the winning of the big hit state).

  In addition, in a high pitched state, the first variation display and the second variation display may be configured to have a relatively short variation time, or only the second variation display may have a relatively long variation time. You may comprise so that it may be set short. Further, the second variation time may be set to be relatively long in the low entry state, and the first variation time may be set to be relatively long in the high entry state. In addition, it is good also as performing the remaining time display which suggests or teaches the remaining time of the 1st variation time and the 2nd variation time.

  (Xx) In the above embodiment, the big win state is generated only when the big win is won in the winning lottery performed when the game balls enter the start winning devices 33a and 33b. You may comprise so that a big hit state can be generated with the condition apparatus of. For example, if the big win is not won in the win / fail lottery, a small lottery is performed, and if the big win is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened and entered into the second variable winning device 32b. Even when the game ball that has been struck enters the specific ball entry unit 145, a big hit state is generated in which the first variable prize-winning device 32b is opened (the game ball enters the specific ball entry unit 145). It is also possible to apply to a gaming machine in which the right of occurrence (continuation) of a big hit state is granted instead of the probability variation mode.

  Further, for example, in the first winning / losing lottery based on the first start winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is won with the first probability, and the normal mode and time reduction are achieved. In the time reduction mode in which the time reduction mode is given as the first ratio among the modes, the winning support lottery is easy to win, and the second variable winning device 32b is easy to enter the second start. In the second winning / losing lottery based on the winning entry to the winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b that has been opened and opened with the second variable winning device 32b being opened with the second probability. Game machines that have entered the specific ball entering portion 145 at the second rate and a big hit state occurs (the first variable winning device 32a continues to the big hit state where the first variable winning device 32a is opened). It is also possible to apply. In addition, when adopting the configuration, it is possible to win a small hit state in the time saving mode and to play a game ball in the specific pitching portion 145, compared to a case where a big win state is won in the first win / fail lottery or the second win / fail lottery It is easier to generate a big hit state by entering the ball and generating a big hit state. Also, if you win the small hit state and enter a game ball in the specific ball entry part 145, the time is shortened. The jackpot type to which the mode is given can be easily selected.

  (Yy: Method for creating a moving image) In the above embodiment, a moving image is generated by reading moving image data whose contents from the beginning to the end are determined in advance. However, a 3DCG (three-dimensional computer) that performs rendering in real time. Like a graphics animation, a moving image corresponding to a situation may be generated in real time (for example, a key frame is created whenever necessary to connect images). Also, it is not necessary to use a configuration that uses multiple layers, but only a video that is visible is played back (a video is generated at any time, or a key frame is created again if there is a change). Alternatively, a plurality of layers may be conceptual, and image objects may be combined as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 covers the first moving image reproduced in the predetermined layer with the second moving image reproduced in the upper layer as a visible display. Although the visual aspect of the display device 42 is configured to switch from the first moving image of the predetermined layer to the second moving image of the upper layer, the timing of switching the first moving image without using a plurality of layers Then, the reproduction (generation) of the first moving image may be stopped and the reproduction (generation) of the second moving image may be started. In addition, if it is not possible to secure enough time to prepare for switching from the first video to the second video (when switching occurs suddenly), at the switching timing, It may be configured to read out fixed data with a small amount of information such as a moving image (which can be displayed immediately) and derive it for the time being. In addition, at the time of the switching, a movable accessory that appears in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be in a protruding state. As described above, when a cut-in effect is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 or a movable accessory is popped out, the expectation of a special game state that is advantageous to the player is changed (game) Therefore, in order to switch the video without changing the expectation for the special advantageous state, the cut-in is performed as in the above embodiment. It is desirable to move from a moving image to a moving image without interposing a production or the like. Moreover, even if it does not use a plurality of layers, it may be configured to generate a plurality of videos at the same time and display any one of them, or when a video that is not visible is also visible. It can be configured so that it can grasp how far it has progressed, and when a visible video is switched, it may be configured to be viewed from there (at least the video pattern and the video It is sufficient if there is information on which timing the image should be generated from.

  (Zz: effect setting during the jackpot state) When the effect setting of the jackpot state performed at the start of the jackpot state, "character introduction image", "hit character video", "V winning challenge effect", and "probability promotion challenge effect ”Is determined, the derivation timing of“ specific payout number display ”is predicted (estimated), the derivation timing of“ specific character video ”is determined, and the derivation timing of“ pending consecutive challenge effect ”is further determined. The order of determining the derivation timing is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, the derivation timing of the specific character video is set so as to avoid the derivation timing of the specific payout number display, but the specific payout is set after the derivation timing of the specific character video is set first. The derivation timing of the number display may be predicted, and when both overlap, the derivation timing of the specific character video may be changed.

  However, in the effect display, when the derivation timing overlaps, it is desirable to determine the derivation timing of the one that does not change the derivation timing (the one with higher priority) first. In addition, you may comprise so that a probability change promotion challenge effect may be derived | led-out only when the mini game in a jackpot state is successful.

  In the above embodiment, the derivation timing of the specific character video is also derived at a predetermined timing in the same manner as the “character introduction image”, “V prize-winning challenge effect”, and “probability promotion challenge”. (For example, in the jackpot state of “15RS”, it is set as the third jackpot moving image, and in the jackpot states of “8RS” and “8RN”, it is set as the first jackpot moving image). Furthermore, after setting the derivation timing of the specific character video, if the effect display set with higher priority than the specific character video is set so as to overlap the specific character video, the specific character video is moved one after. It is vacant by shifting the specific character video and the processing for determining whether or not duplication with the specific character video overlaps the non-permitted display that is not permitted at the derivation timing of the shifted destination. And a process of executing another character moving image during the specified period. And in the case where it is determined that there is an overlap, if the effect display determined to be overlapping is an effect display with a higher priority than the specific character video, a process of shifting the specific character video in the next order, A process for determining whether or not to overlap with the disapproval display and a process for setting another character video (for example, selected by lottery) instead of the shifted specific character video are performed. The process of shifting the specific character moving image later is continued until the setting of the specific character moving image is performed or the confirmation of the final round of the jackpot round is completed.

  However, in order to suppress the number of processes such as shifting the derivation timing as much as possible, it is desirable to set the specific character moving image from the beginning at a timing that does not overlap with the non-permitted effect as in the above embodiment.

  In addition, when the effect display that is determined to overlap with the specific character video after the derivation timing of the specific character video is shifted, the priority display is lower than the specific character video. A process for shifting the low effect display to a timing that does not overlap with the specific character video (or a process for canceling the low-priority effect) and a setting process for deriving the specific character video at the previous timing of shifting.

  For example, at the start of each jackpot round, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability that a specific payout number will be derived for the jackpot round. When it is determined that the moving image is derived, the derivation timing of the specific character moving image may be changed (for example, shifted to the next timing).

  (Aaa: production setting during normal gaming state) Even in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the total number of acquired balls may be displayed and the specific payout number display may be derived. In addition, it is good also as changing the derivation time (length) of specific payout number display according to a condition. Furthermore, the derivation timing of the specific payout number display may be shifted backward if it is within a predetermined time.

  Further, when an upper limit of the number of changes is set in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode, a predetermined remaining number of times (for example, the remaining half, the remaining 10 times, 3 times, 2 times) is displayed at the beginning of the effect change display. , Last etc.) may be derived so as to derive a remaining number display. The remaining number display is a display in which the derivation cannot be stopped, and when it is overlapped with the specific character display, for example, both are displayed in a visually recognizable manner (stock points may be accumulated. , Parts production may be added). In addition, it is good also as changing the derivation time (length) of remaining number display according to a condition.

  In addition, regarding the effect change display (change information) that is put on hold, does it overlap with the specific character display to generate elements that may require some setting changes (specific payout display, remaining number display, etc.)? It may be configured to determine whether or not. In this case, the process related to the derivation of the specific character display when setting each effect variation display can be made relatively smooth.

  (Bbb; specific inclusion display in which a specific effect display is derived at any timing) In the above embodiment, as the specific inclusion display in which the specific character display is derived at any timing, the effect variation display and the jackpot state are Although illustrated, the target of specific inclusion display is not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, a result display derived when a state advantageous to the player (such as a big hit state, a high pitched state, a high probability state, etc.) is completed (the number of big hits stacked without sandwiching the normal mode, the start of the big hit state) The number of game values acquired from the transition to the normal mode is displayed, etc.), the jackpot state opening effect, the jackpot state specific ending effect, the success screen derived when the predetermined effect is successful, A specific character display may be derived in at least a part of the derivation period on an acquisition screen or the like when a predetermined game value or a predetermined privilege is obtained.

  (Ccc; introduction to jackpot state, hit character) In the above embodiment, the opening effect is configured such that a pattern corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots is selected from among a plurality of patterns. With regard to the production, a pattern corresponding to the winning character may be selected / reproduced, or a specific character appears in the opening production (always or in a lottery or when a predetermined condition is satisfied) Only). Further, along with the display of the specific character and the hit character, the voice may correspond to the specific character and the hit character, or only the voice may correspond to the specific character and the hit character. In addition, in a configuration in which a winning character (special teaching related display) is derived in the opening effect, a configuration in which a winning character moving image or a character introduction image is used as the winning character may be omitted.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the character introduction image in which the hit character appears and the hit character animation are derived only in the big hit state of “15RS”, but are also derived in the big hit state of “8RS” and “8RN”. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a possibility of being derived (a predetermined condition is satisfied or determined by lottery). Further, when the introduction image of the character corresponding to the “hit character” is omitted, the “hit character video” may be set as the first jackpot video. Furthermore, a configuration (a setting of hit character moving image) in which a pattern corresponding to a winning character is selected as a character introducing image or a jackpot moving image that is visually displayed from the beginning after the character introducing image ends may be omitted.

  In addition, the effect display related to the winning character derived with the start of the big hit state is not particularly limited. For example, instead of the character introduction image, the desired change is displayed in the effect variation display. After the display is derived, a display that introduces the state of the subsequent hit character may be derived as the moving image corresponding to the first round or the first jackpot moving image. Furthermore, although the effect variation display in which the jackpot is taught and the effect display at the start of the jackpot state are associated with each other by the hit character, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and can be linked to each other. I just need it.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the hit character animation as a 2nd special teaching relevant display and the disapproval display given priority over a specific character animation overlap, it is made to change later the derivation timing of a hit character animation. However, it may be configured to be derived redundantly. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the specific character moving image can be derived in the big hit state is narrowed with the change in the timing for deriving the winning character moving image or the disapproval display. Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the character introduction image as the first special teaching related display and the non-permission display (first non-permission display) having a higher priority than the specific character display overlap. Since neither of the derivation timings can be changed, it is assumed that they are derived in duplicate (in the case of non-permission display with low priority, they may be overlapped, or the derivation timing of non-permission display) May be changed).

  (Ddd: specific character video) In the above embodiment, in the jackpot video derived in the jackpot state, the jackpot video (specific character video) in which the specific character appears is limited to one time, and the specific character, the hit character, Are matched, the hit character video is counted as a specific character video and the setting of a separate specific character video is skipped. However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. . For example, the specific character moving image may be derived a plurality of times during the big hit state (for example, the number of times may be determined by lottery). In other words, the number of executions of the specific character animation is determined, and until the number of counters storing the number of times is basically “0” (if there is no time to perform the specific character) You may comprise so that the setting of a character moving image may be performed. Also, after starting the big hit state, it is found that the “hit character video”, “V winning challenge presentation”, “specific payout display”, and “probable change promotion challenge production” overlap with the “specific character video” However, when the destination of the “specific character video” (the time to be derived) cannot be secured, the specific character video may be omitted (a non-specific character video is applied instead).

  In addition, as the number of derivations of the specific character movie increases, the association increases the possibility that the probability variation mode is given after the end of the jackpot state (for example, the expectation is increased by two derivations, and the derivation is performed three times. (Confirmed). In this case, in a situation where “probability promotion promotion effect” can be performed (a situation where definitive teaching as to whether or not the probability change mode is given after the end of the jackpot state is not given in the decorative symbol display device 42), the “specific character New enjoyment can be added to the “video” being derived.

  Furthermore, there may be a pattern in which all jackpot videos are specific character videos. Further, even if the “specific character” is derived from the “hit character video”, the “hit character video” may not be determined as the “specific character video” (in this case, the jackpot where the specific character appears) The video is derived twice). Moreover, it is good also as providing the moving image which can be derived | led-out only when it specifies as a specific character. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of moving images spoken by a character are prepared for each character, and a moving image spoken by a specific character is derived during the jackpot state.

  In addition, when a predetermined character becomes a winning character and continuously appears on the effect variation display, opening effect, and character introduction screen, the character is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device. Also good. In other words, after the decorative design is stopped with a double eye in the last scene of the production variation display, it becomes a special aspect in which only the display character jumps out of the last scene, the decorative design is erased, and the opening presentation is started. Even if the hit character continues to be displayed in the position as it is or in the range of natural movement from that position, and even if the first round character introduction screen is displayed (for a while), it is configured to continue to be displayed May be.

  (Eeee: rounding up the production display) In the above embodiment, at the start of the specific character display and at the start of the disapproval display, if the specific character display and the disapproval display partially overlap, It is configured to take measures such as changing the derivation timing of one of them, omitting (discontinuing) the disapproval display, or stocking the specific character display, but the overlap between the specific character display and the disapproval display Depending on the degree, the system can be configured to take different measures (determine whether to stop the specific character display or to cancel the specific character display and reset the same specific character display). May be.

  Hereinafter, a non-permission display (specific effect) in which the derivation timing is not changed when it is determined that the non-permission display and the specific character display (specific effect display) overlap at least partly in the overlap determination process. The display side derivation timing is changed) is referred to as “first non-permission display”, and the refusal display where the derivation timing is changed (the derivation timing on the specific effect display side is not changed) is “second non-permission display”. An example of the embodiment will be described.

  (Eeee-1) For example, regarding the specific character display derived in the effect variation display or the big hit state, if there is a timing that it is sufficient if it can be viewed so far, the display after the timing is cut. You may comprise.

  More specifically, when the button effect requesting the operation of the effect button 125 is the specific character display, the specific character display prompts the operation of the effect button 125 and waits for the operation of the effect button 125. The effect button 125 remains active even if the button valid period elapses when the operation of the effect button 125 is effective as a derivation trigger for the reaction effect. And a state of performing a no-operation effect that is derived when it is not operated. The sub-control device 262 is switched on / off at the start of the reaction effect and the no-operation effect (or when a specified time elapses from the start) (for example, turned on at the start of the specific character display, the reaction effect, And a progress determination flag (which is turned off at the start of the no-operation effect).

  Then, at the start of the first disapproval display, if the specific character display is being derived and it is determined that the specific character display and the first disapproval display overlap, the progress determination flag is checked and specified. It is determined whether or not the character display has completed a reaction effect or a no-operation effect (these correspond to specific programs) (the determination function corresponds to a progress determination unit). Therefore, when it is determined that the specific character display has completed the reaction effect or no operation effect, the setting for stopping the specific character display is made, and both the reaction effect and the no operation effect are completed. If it is determined that the specific character display is not performed, the specific character display is stopped and the specific character display is derived again (for example, the timing is shifted to the next order, searching for a timing that does not overlap with the first non-permitted display) Is set).

  By configuring as described above, when the specific character display has not completed the specific program (for example, the reaction effect or the no-operation effect), that is, the degree of overlap is large and the main part of the specific character display is still When the specific character display is not finished, the specific character display is once ended. However, the derivation timing of the same specific character display is set again so that the specific character display can be viewed again.

  On the other hand, when the specific character display has completed the specific program, that is, when the degree of overlap is small and the main part of the specific character display has already ended, the specific character display is stopped there, The visual aspect is switched to the first non-permission display. For this reason, although most of the specific character display is over, the last part of the specific character display overlaps with the first non-permitted display, so that the specific character display is derived again ( For example, a situation in which the same specific character display is derived across the first non-permission display) can be avoided. Therefore, basically, the last part of the specific character display within a range that does not affect the contents, etc., based on the concept that the specific character display and the first non-permission display are visually recognized from the beginning to the end. By enabling cutting, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific character display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of a series of effect display including the specific character display and the first non-permission display is relatively smooth. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to repeated display of the same specific character.

  For example, in the case where the video of character A, which is the jackpot video derived second after the start of the jackpot round in Layer 1 in FIG. 56, is regarded as the “specific character video”, the progress of the jackpot round is the same. When progressing faster than the progress of the figure, the 5000 achievement display as the first disapproval display may overlap with the moving image of the character A. Then, at the start of the 5000-shot achievement display, it is determined whether or not the moving image of the character A (specific character display) is being derived. If the determination is affirmative, whether or not the specific program for the character A has been completed. You may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine. Also, regarding the determination of whether or not the specific program has been completed, at the start of the display of the specific character, as in the case of the specific character video, a specific program (such as a series of actions, etc. that you want to see only this, or a predetermined For information that can grasp the timing of completion (such as teaching information), a progress determination timer that can measure the time until the completion of the specific program is provided. A value corresponding to the time until the specific program is completed may be set for the progress determination timer at the start of the specific character moving image. In this case, when the first non-permission display is started, if the overlap between the first non-permission display and the specific character display is confirmed and the value of the progress determination timer is “0”, the specific character display is stopped. Such processing is performed. It should be noted that the jackpot moving image or the like is preferably a moving image that does not give a sense of incongruity even if it is cut in consideration of the possibility that the last part (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, etc.) may be cut.

  (Ee-2) Further, in the first non-permission display, the sub-control device 262 derives a specific display (display indicating that the V-winning challenge effect or the probability change promotion challenge effect is successful) (or Provided with a requirement determination flag that is switched on and off (for example, turned on at the start of the first non-permission display and turned off at the start of a specific display) after a specified time has elapsed from the start of the display) It is good.

  In this case, at the start of the specific character display, an overlap determination process is performed to determine whether or not the specific character display overlaps with the first non-permission display. , Determining whether or not the specific display (corresponding to the requirement program) is completed (the determination function corresponds to the requirement determining means), and determining that the specific display (teaching) is not completed If it is determined, the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed so as not to overlap with the first non-permission display, and when it is determined that the specific display is completed, the first non-permission display is stopped. To do.

  By configuring as described above, it is determined that the first non-permission display is started at a timing overlapping with the specific character display in a situation where the derivation of the specific character display after a predetermined time has been determined in advance. The first disapproval display has not completed the requirement program (for example, an indication indicating that the V prize challenge production has been successful) (that is, it has not been taught that the V prize challenge production has been successful), that is, When the degree of overlap is large, the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed so as not to overlap with the first non-permitted display so that the entire first character display and the specific character display can be surely seen. I am going to do that.

  On the other hand, the first non-permission display has completed the requirement program, that is, the degree of overlap is small, and the display that should be viewed with the first non-permission display has already been displayed (information to be transmitted is transmitted In the case of (finished), the first non-permission display is stopped and the visual appearance is switched to the specific character display. For this reason, since the last part of the first non-permission display overlaps with the specific character display even though the necessary portion of the first non-permission display is over, the derivation timing of the specific character display It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is necessary to change (a period in which a specific character display can be derived is set and, in some cases, the derivation timing of other effect displays is changed). Accordingly, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific character display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of a series of effect display including the specific character display and the first non-permission display is made relatively smooth. The effect is further exhibited.

  (Eee-3) Further, in the configuration of (eee-1), when the second non-permission display is started, it is determined that the second non-permission display and the specific character display overlap, and by the progress determination flag, When it is determined that the specific character display has not progressed to the specific program, the derivation timing of the second non-permission display is changed, and when it is determined that the specific character display has progressed to the specific program The specific character display may be stopped. In this case, the process of changing the derivation timing of the second non-permission display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of a series of effect display including the specific character display and the second non-permission display is relatively smooth. Can be.

  (Eeee-4) In the above embodiment, the specific character moving image is derived by reading out the effect display data of 15 seconds determined as the time from the start to the end of the jackpot moving image. The effect display data for the jackpot video may be data that can derive a series of effect displays longer than the time determined as the time from the start to the end of the jackpot video.

  That is, in the configuration of (eeee-1), when the first disallowed display overlaps for a specific character video that has not yet completed the specific program, the specific character video is canceled (forced termination), and the first After the disapproval display ends, the specific character video that has been canceled is derived. Here, when the canceled specific character moving image is derived from the beginning again, there is a concern that the beginning portion of the specific character moving image is repeated, leading to a decrease in interest.

  In this regard, the specific character video as the regular specific effect display is used as the regular specific effect display storage means as a series of effect displays longer than a certain time (for example, 45 seconds) of the jackpot video as the regular effect display. It is derived based on a part of the regular specific effect display data stored in the regular specific effect display storage area. Further, a progress storage area is provided as progress storage means for storing the progress of the specific character video at the time when the specific character video ends. And based on the memory | storage information of a progress memory area, the period specific effect display data memorize | stored in the period specific effect display storage area are read, and it comprises so that a specific character animation may be started.

  When this configuration is adopted, each jackpot video (regular specific effect display data) is not something that can be completed in one derivation time of the jackpot video, and this makes it uncomfortable regardless of where it is interrupted or where it is restarted. The production display is less. Furthermore, when the first non-permission display is duplicated for a specific character video that has not yet completed the specific program, the specific character video is canceled (forced termination), and after the first non-permission display ends, the specific character The moving image can be derived from the continuation of the place where it was canceled or from its vicinity (for example, a little before). For this reason, by repeating the beginning part of the same periodic specific effect display, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest is reduced, and the specific character video whose derivation timing has been changed is displayed in the first disallowed display. Even if it is derived at the start timing of the first jackpot video after the end, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest.

  (Fff; sample display) In the above embodiment, a sample of specific character display may be derived. For example, by selecting the sample display of each character on the character introduction screen and performing an input operation, a part of the specific character display is derived in a manner that overlaps with a display that would normally be disallowed display. You may comprise.

  (Ggg; production using specific character display) In the above embodiment, the specific character moving image is basically derived once in the jackpot state as the first production display. When setting a character video, it is determined whether or not the (variable) big hit is included in the fluctuation display that has been put on hold (whether it is a so-called “hold run”), Then, if it is determined, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to perform the setting for not deriving the specific character moving image. In addition, when not deriving a specific character moving image in response to the holding sequence, it is desirable that the holding sequence challenge effect is not derived or is not succeeded. Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the specific character moving image is not derived in response to the reservation sequence, a specific character animation having a pattern that is not selected when the reservation sequence is not performed may be derived. In addition, in the jackpot state in which the game is held continuously (hold game series special game state), a specific character is set as the hit character, and the jackpot video is only a specific character video (even if the number selected as the jackpot video is increased) ), A specific character moving image having a pattern that is not selected (for example, a different visual aspect, etc.) may be derived if it is not the big hit state of the holding sequence.

  It should be noted that the hold continuous challenge production in the above embodiment is set at the start of the jackpot state and suggests / teaches that the variation information that is held at the start of the jackpot state includes a bonus game. Although it was a thing, it included in the variation information that is held at the time when the hold consecutive challenge production is derived (that is, the variation display that is held after the start of the jackpot state is also included in the judgment) It may be suggested or taught that

  In addition, when the “15RS” jackpot state is “holding ream”, there are cases where the character introduction image does not correspond to the winning character, or the character introduction image (first round) is visually recognized from the beginning. It may be configured such that a case where a hit character moving image corresponding to the winning character is not selected as the jackpot moving image that can be derived may occur. Furthermore, when the hit character is not introduced in the character introduction image, the hit character video is set more than usual as the big hit video after the break, or is not normally set, or the set ratio is low You may comprise so that a hit character animation may be set. In addition, when a jackpot video of a character other than the hit character is derived as a jackpot video that is derived from the beginning after the character introduction image (the first round), as any of the subsequent jackpot videos The hit character animation may be derived (at a timing that is not originally derived). Further, the hit character moving image derived at a timing different from usual may be configured so that the visual appearance is different from usual.

  In addition, in the said example (ggg), although the content taught by the production (unusual production) different from usual is set as "holding continuous", another thing (for example, a probability change mode is provided after a big hit state) Etc.) may be taught. In addition, the discomfort production is not intended for the round period in the big hit state, but the production fluctuation display in the normal mode or the time reduction mode and the start to end of the probability variation mode, and the teaching target is the occurrence of the big hit state or the reach state May occur. That is, for example, in the effect variation display, a specific effect period is provided such that the specific character display is derived at least once, and in the effect variation display in which the jackpot teaching is performed in spite of the specific effect period. You may comprise so that the unnatural feeling effect that a character display is not derived | led-out may be derived | led-out.

  In addition, for example, in the jackpot state or effect variation display, the appearance of a specific character is associated with the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player, such as giving a probability variation mode, holding a ream, or generating a jackpot state. The first mission effect display may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the specific character display is surely visually recognized, and the effect of preventing the specific character display from overlapping with other effect display as in the above-described embodiment is further exhibited.

  Further, for example, in the big hit state or the effect variation display, the specific character display is derived at least once, and the timing at which the specific character display is derived or the number of times the specific character display is derived is advantageous for the player. It is good also as performing the 2nd mission effect display in which generation | occurrence | production of a state is matched. For example, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of patterns of the upper limit of the time reduction mode, the upper limit of the time reduction mode may be set to increase as the derivation of the specific character video is delayed in the big hit state. Further, for example, the greater the number of appearances of the specific character display in the effect variation display, the higher the jackpot expectation may be configured. Further, for example, in the effect variation display, the jackpot expectation is increased as the specific character display is derived at a later timing, and the effect button 125 is operated after starting the effect variation display. A roulette effect that suggests the timing at which the specific character display is derived may be performed. By the way, when the second half of the super reach production (final production) is selected than when the first half of the super reach production is suggested, the jackpot expectation is higher, suggesting the later than the super reach (floating suspension) In such a case, it may be configured to teach that an effect that appears to have once failed succeeds in reverse, that is, that the occurrence of a jackpot state has been confirmed.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the display of the specific character is associated with the suggestion of the predetermined state is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a part of the round period of the jackpot state. .

  (Hh: Setting of jackpot video) In the above embodiment, at the start of the jackpot state, a plurality of jackpot video patterns derived in order are respectively determined, but the jackpot (like the background video in the probability variation mode) is determined. A jackpot video that is longer than the time length of the state may be prepared in advance, and at the start of the jackpot state, it may be configured to determine where the jackpot video starts. For example, a jackpot movie of character A, a jackpot movie of character B, a jackpot movie of character C, a jackpot movie of character D, a jackpot movie of character E, a jackpot movie of character F, a jackpot movie of character H, and a jackpot of character I The moving images are displayed in order, and are configured to return to the jackpot moving image of the character A after the jackpot moving image of the character I, and at the start of the jackpot, it is possible to determine which jackpot moving image starts from the lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured to store the jackpot video that was displayed last in the previous jackpot and to start from the jackpot video in the current jackpot state.

  Furthermore, as the setting of the jackpot video in such a configuration, for example, when the length of the round period of the 8-round jackpot state is approximately three to five of the jackpot video, it is predetermined with the start of the round period. When the big jackpot video is started, there is usually a case where the specific character video is not derived during the jackpot state.

  In this regard, the specific character moving image may be configured to be set as the first or second jackpot moving image that reliably falls within the big hit state round period. That is, it is determined whether or not the specific character video is set as the first or second jackpot video (re-setting unnecessary determination process), and the specific character video is originally the first or second jackpot. If it is set as a movie, it can be left as it is. On the other hand, if a non-specific character video character is set as the first or second jackpot video, the specific character video is set to the first or second jackpot video by lottery. Determine whether to force setting.

  For example, in addition to the combination storage area, a compulsory moving image storage area for storing a specific character moving image pattern to be forcibly set is provided, and a compulsory moving image flag is provided in each storage area of the combination storage area. Set the forced video flag for the storage area of the combination storage area that is supposed to forcibly set the video, and turn on the forced video flag for the storage area of the corresponding combination storage area at the start of each jackpot character video If it is set, as the forced setting process, the specific character video stored in the forced video storage area is first derived (and the forced video flag is turned off), and then the forced video flag is turned off. The jackpot character moving image in the storage area may be derived.

  In this case, the specific character moving image is derived without any interruption from the beginning to the end almost always once in the big hit state. For this reason, it is possible to reliably increase the chances of deriving the specific character video that the player is looking forward to. Therefore, the specific character animation can be more thoroughly enjoyed even in a configuration in which the production is diversified and a lot of production patterns are provided. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

  Also, if the specific character video is originally set to either the first or second jackpot video, the process of setting the specific character video to either the first or second jackpot video (Forced setting process) is not performed. For this reason, simplification of a process etc. can be achieved. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the flow of effect display (big hit video) during the original round period as much as possible.

  Further, the jackpot moving image replaced with the specific character moving image is shifted in the subsequent order. For this reason, it is possible to maintain the flow of effect display (big hit video) during the original round period as much as possible. Moreover, although the player could not set the display as the specific character, but the next favorite presentation (character) is omitted by being replaced with the specific character video, the interest is lowered. Such a situation can be avoided.

  It should be noted that the derivation of the jackpot moving image replaced with the specific character moving image may be skipped in such a manner that the specific character moving image is overwritten. Further, if the specific character video is set in an order other than the order in which the specific character video is almost always included in the round period but is likely to be derived, it may be left as it is, or the specific character display is omitted ( Skip). In addition, for example, in a configuration in which it is possible to select not to select a specific character, it is determined whether or not a specific character is set after the jackpot video setting (pattern determination processing) (forced determination processing is performed). When it is determined that it has been set, a setting (such as forced setting processing) that is derived so that the entire specific character video is always within the jackpot round period as described above is made, and a negative determination is made In addition, such a process may be skipped.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, after the setting of the hit character video and the specific character video, the other jackpot video is set. However, after the setting of the big hit video, the setting of the specific character video is performed. May be configured to be performed. Further, in the case of adopting the above-described (hhh) configuration for the reservation sequence, the specific character moving image may not be derived in a big hit state. That is, for example, when it is determined that there is a reserved run, when the order of the specific character video is derived in the jackpot state, the specific jackpot video is not derived and the next jackpot video is derived, or The jackpot video to be replaced with the specific character video may be set at random.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived with the progress of the variable display and the special game state, and there are many players who visit the game hall looking forward to seeing the specific effects.

  By the way, in general, diversification of production has been attempted by increasing the types of production, changing the combination of production, etc., but specific production that players are looking forward to, There is a concern that when an effect that is the centerpiece of a gaming machine is hindered by other effects or the like, the interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely viewing an effect to be visually recognized by a player. .

Means A-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes
Effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display;
A prohibition period specifying means capable of specifying a specific display prohibition period that applies to the specific display prohibition condition based on a specific display prohibition condition that prohibits the derivation of the specific effect display set in advance;
Regarding the setting of the specific inclusion display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing, the specific display prohibition period in the specific inclusion display is specified, and any of the periods not corresponding to the specific display prohibition period in the specific inclusion display A game machine in which the setting for deriving the specific effect display is performed at such timing.

  According to the means A-1, it is possible to avoid the specific effect display being derived during the specific display prohibition period. That is, for example, when the specific effect display is an effect display that the player wants the player to visually recognize, the specific effect display may be other effects (duplication of effect display, projection of the movable accessory effect display means forward, etc.). To avoid problems such as not being able to demonstrate the full value of the specific performance display or being fully enjoyed (for example, different from what you expected in a promotional video, etc.) be able to. Further, for example, when the specific effect display is an effect display with a high player's willingness to view, the situation where the specific effect display is obstructed by other displays and the player accumulates stress can be avoided. As a result, a specific effect display that is preferably viewed by the player can be surely viewed, and a game that makes effective use of the specific effect display can be developed.

  Furthermore, when the specific content display is started, a period that does not correspond to the specific display prohibition period (a timing at which the derivation of the specific effect display is permitted) is specified, and the specific effect display is set to be performed in the period. For this reason, for example, at the stage where the specific effect display is started, in order to avoid the overlap between the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period, the occurrence of a situation such as changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display is suppressed. Can do. Therefore, smooth progress of the specific content display can be achieved. Furthermore, it can be visually recognized through the specific effect display (without interruption).

  The “specific effect display” may be set in advance for each model of the gaming machine (for example, an effect display in which an image object used as a motif of the gaming machine is derived, a promotion video, etc.). (Such as recommended display), it may be specified by the player, may be configured to be specified by the player's game history (game information so far), or randomly on the gaming machine side Alternatively, it may be configured to be identified in association with the date and time.

  Means A-2. The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein a predetermined effect display in the effect display means can be specified as the specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by a player.

  According to the means A-2, the effect display on the effect display means can be brought close to the player's preference, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

Means A-3. The specific inclusion display is constituted by a composite effect constituted by connecting a plurality of effect displays,
The gaming machine according to means A-1 or A-2, wherein the specific display prohibition period can be set in correspondence with each display of the combined effects.

  According to the means A-3, it is possible to easily specify the specific display prohibition period, and it is easy to set the derivation timing of the specific effect display while avoiding the specific display prohibition period.

Means A-4. As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a non-permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, wherein the specific display prohibition period is a derivation period of the non-permission display.

  According to the means A-4, it is possible to prevent the specific effect display and the non-permission display from overlapping. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the visibility of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is reduced due to the overlap between the specific effect display and the disapproval display.

Means A-5. The non-permission display includes a first non-permission display and a second non-permission display,
In the overlap determination process, when the overlap between the specific effect display and the first non-permission display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed to avoid the overlap,
In the duplication determination process, when duplication between the specific effect display and the second non-permission display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the second non-permission display is changed to avoid the duplication. A gaming machine according to means A-4.

  According to the means A-5, a display that does not shift the timing, or a display that has a small range in which the timing is shifted, is performed in synchronization with the behavior of other gaming machines (such as the timing of the movement of the movable member). By setting as 1 non-permission display, it is possible to avoid duplication with the specific effect display while avoiding a situation where the derivation timing of the first non-permission display is changed. On the other hand, the display that can give some flexibility to the derivation timing is set as the second non-permitted display, so that the specific effect display is given priority over the second non-permitted display, and the specific effect display is derived. It is possible to ensure a certain period of time.

  It should be noted that “the first disapproval display may be a notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time”. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the information obtained from the notification display becomes old due to a delay in the derivation timing of the notification display, and the value is diminished, meaningless, or contradictory.

Means A-6. In the first non-permission display, when setting the specific inclusion display, the derivation timing is determined prior to the specific effect display, and the derivation period is the specific display prohibition period,
In the setting of the specific content display, the second non-permission display is determined at a derivation timing after the specific effect display, and the derivation timing is a period during which the specific effect display is displayed in the specific content display. The gaming machine according to means A-5, characterized in that the timing is any one of periods not corresponding to the above.

  According to the means A-6, the specific effect display is set at a timing avoiding the first non-permission display in which the derivation timing is determined before the specific effect display (the first non-permission display is the specific effect display). Priority is set over display). On the other hand, with regard to the second disallowed display that can give some flexibility to the timing of derivation, the timing of derivation should not overlap with the derivation timing of the specific effect display after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is determined. Is determined (the second disapproval display is set to have a lower priority than the specific effect display). Therefore, in the specific inclusion display, the period during which the specific effect display is derived can be more reliably ensured by giving priority to the specific effect display over the second non-permission display (without changing the derivation timing). Furthermore, the timing at which the specific effect display is derived can be narrowed down to some extent, and the player who understands the derivation timing and is looking forward to the specific effect display should be sufficiently equipped with the specific effect display (do not miss from the beginning, Ready for shooting).

Means A-7. A period payout total counting means for counting the total number of game values paid out to the player in a predetermined period;
A specific payout number display that teaches that the number of game values counted by the total payout number counting means has reached a specified number is derived,
The derivation period of the specific payout number display is configured as the specific display prohibition period,
A specification for calculating a timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total counting means is likely to reach a specified number in the predetermined period in which the number of game values is counted by the period payout total counting means With a payout number display timing calculation means,
At the start of the specific content display, the specific payout number display timing calculation means predicts a timing at which the specific payout number display is likely to be derived in the specific content effect display, and any period that does not overlap with the timing The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized in that a setting for deriving the specific effect display is performed at the timing.

  According to the means A-7, the specific payout number display timing calculating means can calculate the timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means is likely to reach the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with the possibility of overlapping the derivation timing of the specific effect display almost in accordance with the prediction of the timing at which the specific payout number display is derived.

Means A-8. At the start of the specific effect display, an overlap determination process is performed as to whether or not the specific effect display overlaps at least a part of the specific display prohibition period,
When it is determined by the overlap determination process that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is changed. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means A-7.

  According to the means A-8, after the specific inclusion display is started, that is, after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, at least one schedule of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is set. By changing, it can be grasped at the start of the specific effect display that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap. Therefore, when the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period are likely to overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period can be changed (immediately before the start of the specific effect display). Thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period from overlapping.

Means A-9. At the start of the specific display prohibition period, an overlap determination process is performed as to whether or not the specific display prohibition period overlaps at least a part of the specific effect display,
When it is determined by the overlap determination process that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is changed. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-8.

  According to the means A-9, after the specific inclusion display is started, that is, after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, at least one schedule of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is set. By changing, it can be grasped at the start of the specific display prohibition period that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap. Therefore, if the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period are likely to overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period can be changed (immediately before the start of the specific display prohibition period). It is possible to more reliably prevent overlap between the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period.

  Means A-10. In any one of means A-1 to A-9, characterized in that it comprises a period specifying means that makes it possible to specify the specific display prohibition period in the specific inclusion display and a period other than the specific display prohibition period. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A-10, it is relatively easy to determine whether or not the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap, and further, it is determined that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap. In such a case, it is possible to simplify the process in the case where the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is changed so as to avoid the overlap.

Means A-11. Among the effect displays that can be derived in the specific content display, comprising a specific effect display specifying means that enables specifying the effect display that can be the specific effect display in the specific content display this time,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-10, wherein when the display of an effect other than the specific effect display is set in the specific content display, the specific effect display specifying means is referred to. .

  According to the means A-11, it is possible to avoid a situation where the specific effect display is processed as an effect display other than the specific effect display and overlaps with the specific display prohibition period.

  Means A-12. A mission effect in which the specific effect display can be selected as one of the effect displays derived within the period, and the occurrence of the state advantageous to the player is associated with the deriving of the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-11, wherein a display is provided.

  When adopting the configuration of the means A-12, it is preferable that the specific effect display is surely visually recognized, and the above-described effect of preventing the specific effect display from overlapping with other effect displays is further achieved. Become.

  B. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived with the progress of the variable display and the special game state, and there are many players who visit the game hall looking forward to seeing the specific effects.

  By the way, in general, diversification of production has been attempted by increasing the types of production, changing the combination of production, etc., but specific production that players are looking forward to, There is a concern that when an effect that is the centerpiece of a gaming machine is hindered by other effects or the like, the interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely viewing an effect to be visually recognized by a player. .

Means B-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display,
As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a non-permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited,
Whether or not at least a part of the specific effect display and the non-permission display overlap when the specific effect display is started in the specific content display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing Duplication determination processing is performed,
When it is determined that the specific effect display and the non-permission display overlap by the overlap determination process, one derivation timing of the specific effect display and the non-permission display is changed. To play.

  According to the means B-1, since it is determined whether or not the specific effect display overlaps with the disapproval display at the start of the specific effect display in the specific inclusion display, the disapproval display is being derived. Then, it is possible to grasp that the specific effect display is duplicated by a new start, or that the specific effect display is duplicated with a disapproved effect that starts after a predetermined time after the specific effect display is started. Become. Therefore, it is possible to more surely understand the overlap between the specific effect display and the non-permission display, and change the timing of deriving at least one of the specific character and the non-permission display. It is possible to more reliably avoid duplication of the specific effect display and the disapproval display by changing or disabling the disapproval display. As a result, a specific effect display that is preferably viewed by the player can be surely viewed, and a game that makes effective use of the specific effect display can be developed.

  In particular, even when there is a difference between the derivation timing of the specific effect display and the derivation timing of the disapproval display with the progress of the specific content effect, the specific effect at the start timing of the specific effect display. Whether or not the display overlaps with the non-permission display can be ascertained with certainty, and if it can be ascertained, it is possible to take sufficient measures to avoid duplication as described above.

  Means B-2. In the specific inclusion display, when the non-permission display is started, an overlap determination process is performed to determine whether or not at least a part of the non-permission display and the specific effect display overlaps. A gaming machine according to means B-1.

  According to the means B-2, at the start of the disapproval display in the specific inclusion display, since it is determined whether or not the disapproval display overlaps with the specific effect display, the specific effect display is being derived. Then, it is possible to grasp that the non-permission display is duplicated when it is newly started, or that it is duplicated with the specific effect display that starts after a predetermined time after the non-permission display is started. Become. Therefore, it is possible to more surely understand the overlap between the specific effect display and the non-permission display, and change the timing of deriving at least one of the specific character and the non-permission display. It is possible to more reliably avoid duplication of the specific effect display and the disapproval display by changing or disabling the disapproval display.

  In particular, even when a deviation occurs between the derivation timing of the specific effect display and the derivation timing of the disapproval display as the specific inclusion effect progresses, the disapproval is performed at the start timing of the disapproval display. Whether or not the display overlaps with the specific effect display can be reliably grasped, and if it can be grasped as well, it is possible to sufficiently take measures to avoid duplication as described above.

Means B-3. The non-permission display includes a first non-permission display and a second non-permission display,
In the overlap determination process, when the overlap between the specific effect display and the first non-permission display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed to avoid the overlap,
In the duplication determination process, when duplication between the specific effect display and the second non-permission display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the second non-permission display is changed to avoid the duplication. A gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2.

  According to the means B-3, a display that does not shift the timing that is performed in synchronization with the behavior of other gaming machines (such as the timing of the operation of the movable member) or a display that has a small range in which the timing is shifted is By setting as 1 non-permission display, it is possible to avoid duplication with the specific effect display while avoiding a situation where the derivation timing of the first non-permission display is changed. On the other hand, the display that can give some flexibility to the derivation timing is set as the second non-permitted display, so that the specific effect display is given priority over the second non-permitted display, and the specific effect display is derived. It is possible to ensure a certain period of time.

  Even if the disapproval display and the specific effect display are derived at a determined timing, if the start and end triggers (update conditions) are different, the derivation timing of the disapproval display and the specific effect display Deviation occurs in the derivation timing. For example, when the specific effect display is an effect display that is updated after a lapse of a certain time, the disapproval display is an effect display that is updated when a certain time elapses or a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the time until the predetermined condition is satisfied is not constant, the specific effect display and the non-permission display are initially set not to overlap, but the timing is shifted so as to overlap. Such a situation may occur.

  Means B-4. In the duplication determination process, when the overlap between the specific effect display and the first non-permission display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed and the specific effect display is derived. The game machine according to means B-3, wherein another effect display having the same time scale as the specific effect display is set during the specified period.

  According to the means B-4, the effect display is uncomfortable by simply omitting the specific effect display from what the display effect in which the specific effect display and the first disapproval display overlap is derived. Can be avoided. Further, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed, and the display mode in which the specific effect display does not overlap with the disapproval display can be enjoyed purely.

Means B-5. The specific inclusion display is constituted by a composite effect constituted by connecting a plurality of effect displays,
The specific effect display can be set corresponding to each effect display of the composite effect,
In the overlap determination process, when it is determined that the specific effect display and the first non-permission display overlap, the specific effect display is changed to the timing of the effect display one after. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-3 and B-4.

  According to the means B-5, it is possible to easily specify the period of the non-permission display, and it is possible to easily set the derivation timing of the specific effect display. In addition, for example, when the overlap between the specific effect display and the first non-permission display is found at the start of the specific effect display or the first non-permission display, the specific effect display is set to a subsequent timing. It is necessary to change, but if the timing after the change is overdone, it becomes impossible to derive a specific effect display within the specific inclusion display period in the case where a change is necessary again. There is a concern that In this regard, according to the means B-5, when there is a need to change the derivation timing of the specific effect display, the concern is suppressed by setting the derivation timing of the specific effect display immediately after the initial derivation timing. can do.

  Means B-6. In the overlap determination process, when it is determined that the specific effect display and the first non-permission display overlap, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed and derived within the period of the specific inclusion effect. When the period cannot be secured, in the period when the specific effect display is to be stopped and the specific effect display should be derived, an effect display different from the specific effect display is derived, The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, wherein a specific effect related to the canceled specific effect display is derived.

  According to the means B-6, even when there is no time to change the derivation timing of the specific effect display, the specific effect related to the specific effect display can be visually recognized. Therefore, the specific effect display and the first non-permission display overlap, so that the specific effect display is not derived, and the interest of the player who was looking forward to the specific effect display is reduced. Such a situation can be suppressed.

  Means B-7. As a specific effect related to the canceled specific effect display, the visual aspect of the first non-permitted display is changed to a visual aspect related to the canceled specific effect display. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means B-7, even if the specific effect display overlaps with the first non-permitted display and cannot be visually recognized, the first non-permitted display is related to the visual aspect related to the specific effect display (for example, canceled). It is not a specific effect display itself, but a visual aspect that can be treated as a specific effect display), so that a situation in which a player who was looking forward to the specific effect display is less interested is suppressed. Can do. In addition, the visual aspect of the first non-permission display can be enjoyed as a rare effect display.

  Means B-8. In the case where the specific effect display and the permission display overlap, the visual recognition when the visual aspect of the permission display in a period overlapping with the specific effect display is derived without overlapping with the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, wherein the gaming machine is changed to a specific mode different from the mode.

  According to the means B-8, the effect of the specific effect display such as making the specific effect display easier to see and emphasizing the specific effect display can be enhanced.

  Means B-9. Regarding the setting of the specific inclusion display, a setting is performed in which a period during which the non-permission display is derived in the specific inclusion display is specified and the specific effect display is derived at any timing of the period during which the non-permission display is not derived. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8.

  According to the means B-9, at the start of the specific inclusion display, a period during which the non-permission display is not derived (timing at which the derivation of the specific effect display is permitted) is specified, and the specific effect display is derived during that period. For example, in order to avoid the overlap between the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period at the stage where the specific effect display is started or when the non-permission display is started, the derivation of the specific effect display is performed. Generation | occurrence | production of the situation of changing timing etc. can be suppressed. Therefore, smooth progress of the specific content display can be achieved.

  C. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480). In addition, various effects are derived as the variable display and the special game state progress.

  By the way, the effects that are derived along with the progress of the change display and the special game state are one-shot, and when they are flashy, the impression tends to be thin. In particular, in recent years, the production of gaming machines has become flashy, and there is a need to be able to leave an impression of the game individually.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of deriving a more impressive performance.

Means C-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player can be performed is determined whether or not to generate a special game state. Main control means for generating a special gaming state;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
Production display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
In the effect display means, in the gaming machine in which the effect change display is performed corresponding to the change display of the identification information of the special display means, and the effect display during the special game state is performed corresponding to the special game state,
A special teaching related display related to a predetermined effect display derived from the effect variation display of the effect display means performed in response to the variation display of the special display means that taught the occurrence of the special gaming state is the special display A gaming machine derived from at least one of a timing for notifying the start of the special gaming state and a timing for starting the special gaming in the effect display during the gaming state.

  According to the means C-1, it is possible to connect display effects related to each other from the teaching of the occurrence of the special gaming state to the beginning of the special gaming state, and the special feeling of excitement when the occurrence of the special gaming state is taught is special. It can be connected smoothly to the gaming state. Therefore, in a situation where the special game state is won and the special game state is started, it is possible to derive a more impressive production and improve the production effect. Furthermore, by visually recognizing the special teaching-related display at the beginning of the special gaming state, it is possible to invite to the recollection of how the occurrence of the special gaming state was taught in the production variation display, the production variation display, and the special game The effect of the effect display during the state can be synergistically enhanced.

  In addition, the display mode related to the predetermined effect display of the effect variation display in which the teaching of the occurrence of the special game state is performed is derived from the effect variation display to the beginning of the special game state. The state is switched from the normal game state where the normal game is played to the special game state.For example, in the same game state, the effect display is monotonous compared to a configuration where only a long effect display is derived. While avoiding, the impression with respect to the effect display can be strengthened.

  In the pachinko machine, “the timing for notifying the start of the special game state” corresponds to “the period of the opening effect”, and “the timing for starting the special game” is the time at the start of the round period (the first round). Is equivalent to.

Means C-2. The special teaching related display includes a first special teaching related display performed at the timing of the start of the special game and a second special teaching related display performed after the first special teaching related display,
The effect display during the special game state is connected to a regular effect display having a constant length from the start to the end, the first effect display that is performed from the start to the end of the period in which the special game is performed, There is a second effect display that is performed in one period of the period during which the special game is performed and the length from the start to the end is variable,
The first special teaching related display is the second effect display,
The second special teaching related display is the regular effect display,
At the start of the second special teaching related display, it is determined whether or not the second special teaching related display and the first special teaching related display overlap, and it is determined that there is no overlap in the determination. In the case where the second special teaching related display is started and it is determined that the second special teaching related display overlaps, the start of the second special teaching related display is postponed, and instead of the second special teaching related display The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein another periodical effect display is started.

  According to the means C-2, the second special teaching related display is performed after the first special teaching related display. Therefore, the special teaching related display can be made more impressive. Moreover, duplication of the first special teaching related display and the second special teaching related display is avoided. That is, the second special teaching related display is derived by overlapping with the first special teaching related display. For example, the second special teaching related display is not visible even though the first half of the second special teaching related display is not visible. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the teaching-related display is treated as being derived. Therefore, the first special teaching related display and the second special teaching related display can be more fully enjoyed respectively. Furthermore, after the first special teaching related display, the interval until the second special teaching related display is started does not exceed the length of one specific effect display. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the interval between the second special teaching related display is too wide and the relationship is weakened. In addition, the second special teaching related display is a regular presentation display of the first special display, which makes it easy to specify the period of the second special teaching related display, and discriminates the overlap with the first special teaching related display. Can be made easier.

Means C-3. The sub control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player,
The gaming machine according to means C-1 or C-2, wherein in the special game state effect display, the specific effect display and the special teaching related display are set so as not to overlap.

  According to the means C-3, it is possible to avoid the overlap between the special teaching related display and the specific effect display, and the special teaching related display and the specific effect display interfere with each other in the visual aspect, or It is possible to avoid a situation in which one is not visually recognized (cancelled) by the other. Therefore, each of the specific effect display selected by the player and the special teaching related display can be further enjoyed.

  Moreover, since the effect display which is the target of the special teaching related display is derived from the effect variation display to the beginning of the special gaming state as in the above-described means C-1, the display of the special teaching related display is conscious. Affixed (notices). Therefore, in the special gaming state, if the special teaching related display is interrupted for some reason or the visual recognition is disturbed, there is a concern that it may be offended. In this respect, since this means avoids the overlap between the special teaching related display and the specific effect display, it is possible to suppress such a concern, and to enjoy the special game state effect display in the special game state more easily. be able to.

  Means C-4. When the special game state effect display is set, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed when the specific effect display and the special teaching related display overlap. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means C-4, the start timing of the special teaching related display can be held. Therefore, due to the change of the start timing of the special teaching related display, the interval between the start timing of the special teaching related display and the start timing of the special gaming state (special game) is widened greatly. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the relevance with the predetermined effect display derived from the effect variation display in which the gaming state is taught is weakened.

Means C-5. The number of times of the specific effect display derived in the effect display during the special gaming state is determined,
When the special display related to the special instruction is set as the special teaching related display when the special display related to the special teaching is displayed, the special display related to the special teaching is displayed. The game machine according to means C-3 or C-4, wherein display is included in the number of times of the specific effect display, and the setting of the specific effect display is performed.

  According to the means C-5, the number of times of deriving the specific effect display of the special game state effect display is limited to some extent, thereby maintaining the enjoyment by deriving the specific effect display in the special game state effect display at a predetermined level. be able to. For example, by allowing the specific effect display to be derived at least once during the special game state, the player looking forward to the specific effect display can look forward to the occurrence of the special game state. It can be suppressed that the variation in the number of times of deriving the specific effect display becomes large, or that the specific effect display is bored because the specific effect display is excessively derived each time. Furthermore, it is possible to suggest the possibility of giving a state advantageous to the player, etc., depending on the number of derivations of the specific effect display. Further, even when the specific effect display is derived in the frame of the specific teaching related display, since the specific effect display is counted as being performed, it is possible to reliably control the number of derivations of the special effect display.

Means C-6. As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a non-permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited,
The means C- is characterized in that the special teaching related display and the non-permission display are derived as they are even when at least a part of the special teaching related display and the non-permission display overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of 3 to C-5.

  According to the means C-6, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the specific effect display can be derived in the special game state effect display is narrowed with the change of the derivation timing of the special teaching related display or the disapproval display. Can do. When the second special teaching related display of the means C-2 is a specific effect display like the means C-5, the second special teaching related display is avoided so as to avoid duplication with the non-permission display. The derivation timing of at least one of the teaching related display and the non-permission display may be changed.

Means C-7. An information acquisition means for acquiring success / failure related information related to the success / failure lottery when the condition establishment detection means is detected;
A holding storage unit having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the success / failure related information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the success / failure related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means,
The predetermined success / failure-related information corresponds to the special gaming state at a stage prior to execution of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined success / failure-related information stored in the holding storage means. A pre-reading process for determining whether or not there is,
In the special gaming state, when the predetermined success / failure related information stored in the holding storage means corresponds to the special gaming state, the setting for prohibiting the derivation of the special teaching related display is configured to be executable. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-6.

  According to the means C-7, since the special teaching related display that is supposed to be derived is not derived, it is possible to give a feeling of joy on the contrary. In other words, it is possible to create an interesting situation that makes the user happy even if the special teaching related display is derived or not, and can improve the interest. It should be noted that “when the setting for prohibiting the derivation of the special teaching related display is made, the special teaching related display is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the special teaching related display is originally set in the special gaming state. It may be configured to be derived (in a different manner).

  D. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  By the way, in general, diversification of production has been attempted by increasing the types of production, changing the combination of production, etc., but specific production that players are looking forward to, There is a concern that when an effect that is the centerpiece of a gaming machine is hindered by other effects or the like, the interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely viewing an effect to be visually recognized by a player. .

Means D-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display,
As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a non-permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited,
When at least the non-permission display is started, an overlap determination process is performed as to whether or not at least a part of the non-permission display and the specific effect display overlaps,
The non-permission display includes a first non-permission display and a second non-permission display,
In the overlap determination process, when the overlap between the first non-permission display and the specific effect display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed to avoid the overlap,
In the duplication determination process, when duplication between the second non-permission display and the specific effect display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the second non-permission display is changed to avoid the duplication,
At the start of the first non-permission display, when the specific effect display is being derived and the overlap determination process determines that the non-permission display and the specific effect display overlap, the specific effect display Has a progress determination means for determining whether or not the computer has completed the specific program,
If the progress determining means determines that the specific effect display has completed the specific program, a setting is made to stop the specific effect display, and the specific effect display completes the specific program. When it is determined that the specific effect display is not made, the specific effect display is stopped and the setting for deriving the specific effect display is performed again.

  According to the means D-1, when it is likely that the non-permission display that is not permitted to overlap with the specific effect display and the specific effect display overlap, the specific effect display and the disapproval display are displayed. By changing the derivation timing of at least one of them, the overlap between the specific effect display and the non-permission display is avoided. For this reason, one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is omitted, or one or both are difficult to recognize because the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the specific effect display and the disapproval display are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand.

  In addition, according to the means D-1, when it is determined that the specific effect display is being derived at the start of the first non-permitted display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited and the derivation timing is not changed. Need to adjust the derivation timing on the specific effect display side to avoid duplication. Therefore, according to this means D-1, when the specific effect display has not completed the specific program, that is, when the degree of overlap is large and the main part of the specific effect display has not yet ended, Although the specific character display is once ended, the same specific effect display is set again so that the specific effect display can be viewed again.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect display has completed the specific program, that is, when the degree of overlap is small and the main part of the specific effect display has already ended, the specific effect display is stopped there, The visual aspect is switched to the first non-permission display. For this reason, although most of the specific effect display is over, the last part of the specific effect display overlaps with the first non-permitted display, so that the specific effect display is derived once again ( For example, a situation in which the same specific effect display is derived across the first non-permission display) can be avoided. Therefore, basically, the last part of the specific effect display within the range that does not affect the contents, etc., based on the concept that the specific effect display and the first non-permission display are visually recognized from the beginning to the end. By enabling cutting, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of a series of effect displays including the specific effect display and the first non-permission display is relatively smooth. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to repetition of the same specific effect display.

Means D-2. Completion of determining whether or not the first disapproval display has completed the requirement program when it is determined that the first disapproval display and the specific effect display overlap when starting the specific effect display With a discrimination means,
When the completion determining means determines that the first non-permission display does not complete the requirement program, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, and the first non-permission display displays the requirement program. The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the first disapproval display is canceled when it is determined that the processing is completed.

  According to the means D-2, in a situation where the derivation of the specific effect display after a predetermined time has been determined in advance, it is determined that the first non-permission display is started at a timing overlapping with the specific effect display. If the first disapproval display does not complete the requirement program, that is, if the degree of overlap is large, the first disapproval display and the specific effect display should be surely visually recognized. The derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed so as not to overlap with the first disapproval display.

  On the other hand, if the first non-permission display has completed the requirement program, that is, the degree of overlap is small, and the display that should be viewed with the first non-permission display has already been displayed (the information to be transmitted is Then, the first disapproval display is stopped and the visual appearance is switched to the specific effect display. For this reason, although the necessary portion of the first disapproval display is over, the last part of the first disapproval display overlaps with the specific effect display. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is necessary to change (a period in which a specific effect display can be derived is set and the derivation timing of other effect displays is changed in some cases). Therefore, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of a series of effect display including the specific effect display and the first non-permission display is made relatively smooth. The effect is further exhibited.

Means D-3. When the second non-permission display is started, it is determined that the second non-permission display and the specific effect display overlap, and
When the progress determining means determines that the specific effect display has not progressed to the specific program, the derivation timing of the second non-permission display is changed, and the specific effect display proceeds to the specific program. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein when it is determined that the specific effect is displayed, the specific effect display is stopped.

  According to the means D-3, a flow of a series of effect display including the specific effect display and the second disapproval display while reducing the process of changing the derivation timing of the second disallowed display and simplifying the process. Can be made relatively smooth.

Means D-4. From the start of the period in which the special game is performed, the specific content display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing is connected to a regular effect display with a fixed length of time from the start to the end. There is a first effect display that is performed until the end, and a second effect display that is performed in one period of the period during which the special game is performed and the length from the start to the end is variable,
The periodic specific effect display, which is the specific effect display configured as the periodic effect display, is stored in the periodic specific effect display storage means as a series of effect displays longer than a certain time length of the periodic effect display. Derived based on a part of the specific effect display data,
A progress storage means for storing a progress status of the periodic specific effect display at the time when the periodic specific effect display ends;
Means D, wherein the periodic specific effect display data stored in the periodic specific effect display storage means is read out based on the storage information of the progress storage means, and the periodic specific effect display is started. A gaming machine according to any one of -1 to D-3.

  According to the means D-4, each periodic specific effect display (periodic specific effect display data) is not completed in one derivation time of the regular effect display, and by this, where it is interrupted and where it is resumed from. However, it is an effect display with little discomfort. Further, when the first disapproval display overlaps with the periodic specific effect display that has not yet completed the specific program, the periodic specific effect display is canceled (forced termination), and after the first disapproval display ends, The periodic specific effect display can be derived from the continuation of the place where it was canceled or the vicinity thereof. For this reason, after the periodical specific effect display is stopped and the first disapproval display ends, the beginning part of the same periodical specific effect display is repeated as in the case where the periodical specific effect display is derived again from the beginning. It is possible to avoid the situation that the interest is lowered. Moreover, since it is avoided that the beginning part of the same periodic specific effect display is repeated, when the first disapproval display overlaps with the periodic specific effect display that has not yet completed the specific program, the periodic specific display is performed. After the effect display is stopped (forced termination) and the first disapproval display ends, the periodic specific effect display is derived at the start timing of the first regular effect display after the end of the first disapproval display. Can be avoided.

  E. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived with the progress of the variable display and the special game state, and there are many players who visit the game hall looking forward to seeing the specific effects.

  By the way, in general, diversification of production has been attempted by increasing the types of production, changing the combination of production, etc., but specific production that players are looking forward to, There is a concern that when an effect that is the centerpiece of a gaming machine is hindered by other effects or the like, the interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely viewing an effect to be visually recognized by a player. .

Means E-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display (in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player),
In the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disapproval display in which the overlap with the specific effect display is not permitted are derived in an overlapping manner. In such a case, the derivation timing of at least one of the specific effect display and the non-permission display is changed so that the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the non-permission display do not overlap. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the means E-1, when the non-permission display that is not permitted to overlap with the specific effect display is likely to be derived at a timing overlapping with the specific effect display, among the specific effect display and the non-permission display By changing at least one of the derivation timings, overlap between the specific effect display and the non-permission display is avoided. For this reason, one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is omitted, or one or both are difficult to recognize because the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the specific effect display and the disapproval display are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand.

  Therefore, the derivation of the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to is inhibited by the derivation of the disapproval display, and the situation where the player accumulates stress can be avoided, and the disapproval display can be visually recognized. it can. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the specific effect sound derived | led-out with the specific effect display may be handled similarly to a specific effect display. That is, when it is determined that the sound that is at least partially overlapped with the derivation period of the specific effect sound is “non-permission sound”, the specific effect sound and the non-permission sound are not overlapped, and The derivation timing of at least one of the non-permitted voices may be changed. In addition, the input to the gaming machine by the player for specifying the specific effect display is not particularly limited. For example, the effect display unit can be configured to derive a setting screen for the specific effect display, and the player A mobile linked game in which a specific effect display can be set in accordance with an operation of an effect operating means provided to be operable, or data is exchanged between a gaming machine and a server via a portable communication terminal. When performed, the password issued by the server may be input to the gaming machine so that the storage of the specific effect display of the previous game is reflected in the current game.

  Further, “in the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the permission display derivation period in which the overlap of the specific effect display is permitted are derived in an overlapping manner. In this case, at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the permission display may be derived in an overlapping manner. In addition, the “permission display” may be a display that does not cover (substantially) the specific effect display, does not cover the specific effect display, and looks like the specific effect display can be seen through. The “non-permitted display” may be a display that covers the specific effect display (the subject) and the whole or a main part so that the corresponding part (entire or part) of the specific effect display is not visible.

  Means E-2. In the case where the disapproval display derived in duplicate with at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display is a notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time, The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the permission display derivation timing is not changed.

  According to the means E-2, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the information obtained from the notification display becomes outdated due to a delay in the derivation timing of the notification display, and the value is diminished, meaningless, or contradictory. can do. For example, when a notification display that teaches the total number of game values paid out to a player within a predetermined period is postponed and the notification display is derived, the contents of the notification display and the game value actually paid out are displayed. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the number is far from being separated. Also, for example, when a notification display for guiding a specific operation that can cause a player to achieve a specific condition is postponed and the notification display is derived, it means that the specific operation is performed. It is possible to avoid a situation where the user is no longer able to complete the process. Therefore, the information on the notification display can be obtained reliably at the original timing, and the game can proceed with peace of mind based on the information on the notification display.

  In addition, the notification display for which the overlap with the specific effect display can be determined can be set for each model of the gaming machine, for example, teaching that the right such as the special gaming state has been acquired, the special gaming state is started. For example, teaching that the special gaming state has ended, teaching that the variation display of the identification information has ended, teaching regarding the number of game values paid out to the player, and the like. Moreover, it is good also as "the notification display which is a permission display exists". That is, for example, as one type of specific effect display, there is a super specific effect display whose derivation timing cannot be changed, and when it is determined that the super specific effect display and the notification display overlap, the notification display is permitted. You may comprise so that it may change so that it may become a display.

  In addition, as a notification display, a teaching that a predetermined gaming state has been assigned / shifted, a teaching that a condition set as a break (small target) in progressing the game has been achieved, and an error state are displayed The teaching of what happened is mentioned. Further, “in the state where the specific effect display is derived, when the notification display that is the non-permission display is derived, the specific effect display is interrupted and the notification display is derived, From where the specific effect display was interrupted after the end of the notification display, or from where it was returned before the interrupted position (from a timing slightly before the interrupted timing, or at the beginning of the specific effect display It is also possible to be resumed. In other words, when the derivation of the specific effect display is determined but not derived, it is possible to change the derivation timing of the entire specific effect display. When the notification display is given priority and the notification display is given priority, the specific effect display is interrupted. Even in such a case, the specific effect display can be enjoyed as much as possible by suspending and resuming as described above. In addition, a guidance display that teaches resuming the interrupted specific effect display, a guidance display that displays (countdown) the time until restart of the interrupted specific effect display, and the like may be derived. In this case, it can be relieved that the specific effect display is resumed, or a situation such as missing the opening portion without noticing that the specific effect display has been resumed can be suppressed.

  Means E-3. Regarding the permission display that is allowed to be overlapped with the specific effect display, the display mode can be changed between the case of overlapping with the specific effect display and the case of not overlapping with the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to E-1 or E-2.

  According to the means E-3, although it is better for the player to visually recognize even if it overlaps with the specific effect display, in the display mode as it is, a permission display (for example, the visual effect of the specific effect display is excessively hindered) The special display means is derived from the start to the end of the variation display of the identification information, and the concern in the case of deriving the final variation display that suggests or teaches the result of the lottery can be eliminated. Further, the specific effect display can be viewed in the original display mode.

Means E-4. In the effect display means, in the gaming machine in which the effect change display is performed corresponding to the change display of the identification information of the special display means, and the effect display during the special game state is performed corresponding to the special game state,
Priority effect display which is an effect display in which a predetermined display object derived from the effect change display of the effect display means performed corresponding to the change display of the special display means that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state is displayed The game machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-3, wherein the game machine is configured to be derived in accordance with the start of the effect display during the special gaming state.

  According to the means E-4, it is possible to connect the effect display related to each other from the teaching of the occurrence of the special gaming state to the beginning of the special gaming state, and the special feeling of excitement when the occurrence of the special gaming state is taught is special. It can be connected smoothly to the gaming state. Therefore, in a situation where the special game state is won and the special game state is started, it is possible to derive a more impressive production and improve the production effect. Furthermore, by visually recognizing the priority effect display at the beginning of the special game state, it is possible to invite to the recollection of how the occurrence of the special game state was taught in the effect change display, the effect change display, and the special game state The effect of the medium effect display can be synergistically enhanced.

Means E-5. The priority effect display includes a first priority effect display and a second priority effect display performed after the first priority effect display.
In the special game state, an opening period in which an opening effect is taught that teaches that a special game with an increased probability of game value being given based on a predetermined operation of the player is started, and the special game is There are a round period to be performed and an ending period in which an ending effect is taught to teach that the special gaming state is ended,
The special game state production display is connected with a regular production display having a fixed length from the start to the end, and a first production display that is performed from the start to the end of the round period and a period of the round period. There is a second effect display with a variable length from the start to the end,
The priority effect display is derived at least once as the regular effect display of the first effect display,
Combination storage means for storing a combination of the regular effect displays derived as the first effect display;
A priority effect display storage means for storing the priority effect display derived as the first effect display;
The first priority effect display is the second effect display, and is derived with the start of the round period,
The second priority effect display is the regular effect display. During the round period, the first priority effect display ends, and the periodic effect display that has been derived in duplicate with the first priority effect display is displayed. The gaming machine according to means E-4, wherein the second priority effect display is derived when the game ends.

  According to the means E-5, the second priority effect display is derived while the memory of the first priority effect display is new. As a result, the special display means for teaching the occurrence of the special gaming state. The significance of the effect display (effect display at the time of winning) displayed on the effect display means in accordance with the stop display of the fluctuation display of can be enhanced. Therefore, the effect display at the time of winning can be made more interesting, and the game performance can be improved.

  Moreover, it is comprised so that duplication with a 1st priority production | presentation display and a 2nd priority production | presentation display may be avoided. For this reason, the situation where the 1st priority production | presentation display and the 2nd priority production | presentation display inhibit a mutual visual aspect can be avoided. In particular, the priority effect display is an effect display connected to the effect variation display, and since it is conscious (notice), if the priority effect display is interrupted for some reason or the visual recognition is disturbed, the mood is displayed. There is concern about harm. In this respect, since the first priority effect display and the second priority effect display are avoided in this means E-5, such a concern can be dispelled, and the special game state effect display is more enjoyable. I can have you.

Means E-6. The round period is composed of a plurality of individual rounds,
The gaming machine according to means E-5, wherein the first priority effect display is set corresponding to the first individual round.

  According to the means E-6, it is possible to easily grasp the derivation period of the first priority effect display, and it is possible to easily determine the overlap between the first priority effect display and the second priority effect display.

  Means E-7. It is determined whether or not the priority effect display and the specific effect display overlap, and if it is determined that the priority effect display overlaps, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of 4 to E-6.

  According to the means E-7, the specific effect display and the priority effect display can be more reliably enjoyed.

Means E-8. A specific display-containing production incorporated so that the specific production display is derived at a prescribed timing,
Means E-1 to E in which determination processing is performed to determine whether at least a part of the non-permission display and the specific effect display overlaps when the specific display-containing effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of -7.

  According to the means E-8, if it is a specific display inclusion effect, the specific effect display of the specific display inclusion effect and the non-permission display are duplicated before the specific effect display of the specific display inclusion effect is derived. The determination can be made, and the process of changing the derivation timing of the non-permitted display or the specific effect display can be performed before the specific effect display of the specific display-containing effect is derived. Thereby, for example, when it is grasped before the specific effect display is started that the specific effect display of the specific display containing effect and the disapproval display overlap, the disapproval display and the specific effect display Not only a method of shifting the derivation period to a later timing but also a method of shifting to a previous timing. Therefore, for example, even if trying to shift the timing of the specific effect display overlapping with the notification means so as not to overlap, there is no room for deriving the specific effect display so as not to suffer from the notification display in the specific display containing effect, It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is difficult to shift (at least a part is omitted). Moreover, the discomfort display and the discomfort of the display in which the derivation period of the specific effect display is changed can be suppressed. Furthermore, when adopting the configuration of the means E-2, the notification display as the disapproval display is derived while the specific effect display is being derived, and the specific effect display is interrupted as much as possible. Can do.

Means E-9. A period payout total counting means for counting the total number of game values paid out to the player in a predetermined period;
A specific payout number display that teaches that the number of game values counted by the total payout number counting means has reached a specified number is derived,
A specification for calculating a timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total counting means is likely to reach a specified number in the predetermined period in which the number of game values is counted by the period payout total counting means The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-8, comprising payout amount display timing calculation means.

  According to the means E-9, the specific payout number display timing calculating means can calculate a timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total counting means is likely to reach a specified number. Therefore, in accordance with the prediction of the timing at which the specific payout number display (corresponding to the notification display of the means E-2) is derived, the specific effect display is derived at a timing at which there is almost no possibility of overlapping with the specific payout number display. Can be set to. For this reason, duplication with the specific effect display is found for the first time at the time of derivation of the specific payout number display, and processing for changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display becomes necessary, or the change destination cannot be secured. It is possible to avoid such a situation.

  Means E-10. When the non-permission display and the specific effect display are started, a determination process is performed to determine whether at least a part of the non-permission display and the specific effect display overlaps. A gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-9.

  According to the means E-10, since the overlap determination is performed at the timing when the non-permission display or the specific effect display is actually started, for example, the timing of deriving the non-permission display or the specific effect display is determined in advance. However, after that, even if the timing of the disapproval display or the specific effect display changes suddenly, it is possible to take measures to avoid duplication. Therefore, the above-described effect of avoiding the overlap between the non-permission display and the specific effect display is more reliably achieved.

Means E-11. An effect display for displaying the specific image object is specified as the specific effect display by performing input for specifying a predetermined image object (character) displayed in the effect display means as the specific image object (specific character). And
Among the effect displays determined to be derived by the effect display means, the apparatus includes derivation period grasping means capable of grasping a derivation period of the specific effect display from which the specific image object is derived. A gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-10.

  According to the means E-11, the effect display in which the specific image object is displayed is comprehensively specified as the specific effect display only by specifying the predetermined image object (character) as the specific image object (specific character). It becomes. Therefore, for a player who plays a game aiming at the effect display of the specific image object, the setting for specifying the specific effect display becomes simple, and the game can be started smoothly without stress. In addition, since the setting for specifying the specific effect display becomes simple, more players can enjoy the function of the specific effect display. In addition, the derivation period grasping means can surely grasp the derivation period of the specific effect display from which the specific image object is derived, and reliably determines whether or not the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap. can do.

  It should be noted that, among the specific effect displays, rankings relating to priority are performed, and the general effect display and the specific effect display are combined with the rank of the specific effect display and the type of the general effect display. It may be changed that it is discriminated whether the display is permitted or not permitted to be duplicated. In this case, among the specific effect displays from which the specific image object is derived, those with a high derivation frequency or small ones are set with a lower priority than those with a low or large display. In particular, in the configuration in which the specific effect display is comprehensively specified by setting the specific image object, the effect balance and the like can be improved.

  In addition, when performing a mobile linked game in which data is exchanged between a gaming machine and a server via a mobile communication terminal, the general effect display is determined to be either the permission display or the non-permission display. The standard of whether or not to be played may be changed according to the game amount of the player, or may be configured so that the player can set. For example, when the game amount of the player is small, as a specific effect display, a cut-in effect that is only temporarily derived, a display that is only derived in a small area of the effect display means, and a game commentary display Are displayed in duplicate, but when the game amount is large, the game description may not be displayed. In addition, the specific image object (specific character) is only derived at the same time as many other image objects (characters), or only the name is displayed. An effect display such as a low relevance may not be specified as a specific effect display. In addition, the player may be ranked (to some extent) with respect to the priority of the specific image object.

  Further, “corresponding to an image object that can be set as the specific image object, object trajectory information that makes it possible to specify the display position of the specific image object in the effect display means that is displaced as the specific effect display progresses is stored in advance. It is also possible to provide the object trajectory information storage means. In this case, for example, it is possible to perform an effect display such as making a specific character close-up according to the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Means E-12. It has specific operation means that can be operated by the player,
When the predetermined effect display is derived in the effect display means, a predetermined operation input of the specific operation means is performed, whereby the predetermined effect display derived in the effect display means is displayed as the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-11, characterized in that it can be specified as a display.

  According to the means E-12, the effect display that the player likes can be specified as the specific effect display. Therefore, it becomes possible to respond to more detailed needs, and the satisfaction with the game can be improved. For example, in the configuration like the above means E-8, when a user likes a predetermined character other than a character that can be comprehensively specified as a specific character and wants to set the effect display from which the predetermined character is derived as the specific effect display The player can specify the specific effect display one by one by himself.

  In addition, a specific effect information storage unit that stores information of a predetermined effect display specified as a specific effect display by performing a predetermined operation by the specific operation unit is provided, and the operation is performed in the specific effect information storage unit. (All) production patterns that were derived at the time of the release (you don't know if the productions are duplicated, so you will have to choose later), after the production patterns are derived Time (if pressed once, there is a specified time from the operation (if pressed again before the specified time elapses, it will look like it will be extended, then there will be a specified time; there will be a maximum number of extensions) In the case of a long press, the specific effect display may be stored while the operation is being performed.

  Furthermore, if the specific effect display is made a little before the operation, it is easy to set the target effect display as the specific effect display from the beginning. In addition, by confirming the effect pattern, which character is derived after the start ○ seconds. If it is configured to be able to acquire such information, it is possible to pinpoint from the derivation start timing to the derivation end timing of the character that appears most recently. Further, for example, when a predetermined character and a predetermined effect display are in a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the predetermined character is basically derived from the beginning to the end of the display of the predetermined effect. In the case of continuing, a predetermined operation by the specific operation means may be performed during the predetermined production, and the whole of the predetermined production display may be specified as the specific production display.

  In addition, for example, the information stored in the specific effect information storage means may be configured to be erased sequentially from the oldest, or may be erased when the gaming machine is turned off. In the case where all the information stored in the specific effect information storage means is erased, the power may be turned on while operating the erase operation means. In addition, when performing a mobile linked game, the mobile communication terminal receives information that can be output from the gaming machine at the end of the game, stores the information in the server, and at the start of the next game, It may be configured to take over the settings related to the specific effect display of the game up to the previous time by inputting information including at least a part of the information (password is issued to the server and inputting the password) to the gaming machine.

  Means E-13. The configuration according to any one of means E-1 to E-12, characterized in that the specific effect display is not specified (a process for discriminating overlap with the non-permission display is not performed). Gaming machine.

  According to the means E-13, it is possible to meet the demand of the player who feels that the effect display related to the specific effect display is distorted or that the effect display is desired to be seen universally. Further, even if there is a willingness to set a specific effect display, it is possible to respond to a request such as wanting to set a specific effect display after first looking at various effect displays that can be specified as the specific effect display.

  Means E-14. Means E-1 to E are characterized in that at least when the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, the specific effect notice effect that teaches that the specific effect display is derived can be derived. The gaming machine according to any one of -13.

  According to the means E-14, even when the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed and the specific effect display is derived at irregular timing, the specific effect display derived at the changed timing is surely ensured. Can be visually recognized. In addition, for example, the configuration in which the specific effect notice effect is performed only when the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, or when the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, and in other cases, the aspect is different. When adopting the configuration, it can be confirmed that the specific effect display is changed in the derivation timing. Furthermore, when the specific effect notice effect is derived corresponding to all the specific effect displays, even if the eye is away from the effect display means, it is specified if the eyes are moved to the effect display means based on the specific effect notice effect. You can definitely enjoy the production display from the beginning.

  The player may be configured to be able to set whether or not to permit the derivation of the specific effect notice effect. Further, when there is no difference in the meaning that the specific effect display is derived between when the derived timing is changed and when it is not changed, the specific effect notice effect is, for example, the derivation timing is Derived only when it is changed, the player makes a special expectation for the specific effect notice effect (with the specific effect display accompanying) (for example, the expectation degree of occurrence of the special game state is In order to avoid a situation such as being misunderstood that it is specially high, it may be configured to be derived even in response to a specific effect display whose derivation timing is not changed.

  Means E-15. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-14, wherein a specific timing change display that teaches that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed can be derived.

  According to the means E-15, it can be understood that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed. When the specific timing change display is derived before the original derivation timing, the specific timing change display is derived at the time of deriving the specific effect display with the derivation timing changed, and is derived after the original derivation timing. In such a case, the derivation may be performed at the original derivation timing. In this case, it is possible to grasp that the specific effect display has been derived early, or that the specific effect display is reserved later.

  Means E-16. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-15, wherein the specific effect display is derived based on the fact that the specific effect display is not derived for a predetermined period.

  According to the means E-16, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user is looking forward to the specific effect display but is not derived too much, leading to a decrease in interest.

  The specified period is defined as one change (one game) from the start to the end of the change display that teaches the result of the lottery determination for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. For example, when a (predetermined) special game state is performed a specified number of times.

  In addition, there is provided a specific effect point storage means in which points are added or subtracted because the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period, and the points stored in the specific effect point storage means are greater than or less than a specified point In such a case, the right to derive the specific effect display may be given. Furthermore, the specific effect display derived in accordance with the points of the specific effect point storage means may be a specific effect display of a rare pattern or a dedicated pattern. In addition, the configuration may be such that the point is returned to the initial value when the specific effect display is derived (the derivation setting is performed), or may be configured such that the point is reduced by the amount used.

Means E-17. The sub-control means includes sub-effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a sub-specific effect display in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player,
The means E-1 to E-16 are characterized in that the effect display specified as the sub-specific effect display is more likely to be derived in duplicate with the specific effect display than the other effect display. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means E-17, by setting the sub specific effect display so as to easily overlap the specific effect display, the relationship (such as a cause) is established between the specific effect display and the sub specific effect display. The player can set a deepening effect, and the fun can be increased.

Means E-18. In the case where the non-permission display derived in duplicate with at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display is a general effect display that is the effect display other than the specific effect display,
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-17, wherein the derivation timing of the general effect display is changed, and the derivation timing of the specific effect display is not changed.

  According to the means E-18, an opportunity for deriving the specific effect display can be ensured, and when the specific effect display is derived, the overlap with the general effect display or the like is avoided and the specific effect display is fully enjoyed. I can have you. Furthermore, since the derivation timing of the specific effect display is maintained (in the case where it was originally overlapped with the general effect display), the situation where the specific effect display is not derived at the timing of the defect is suppressed. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of such a situation.

Means E-19. At least a progress information storage means capable of storing information related to the progress of a game performed in a state where the specific effect display is derived;
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-18, wherein the information stored in the progress information storage means can be browsed after the specific effect display.

  According to the means E-19, an event that occurred during the specific effect display can be confirmed later. Therefore, the user can concentrate on the specific effect display without hesitation. Note that, for example, a specific effect display is made from the beginning to the end of a specific special gaming state, and a display that overlaps the specific effect display in the special gaming state is a permission display that is allowed to overlap with the specific effect display (notification) Even if it is a display, it is a mode that does not hinder the visibility so much, and after the special game state is finished, from the menu screen etc., information on the special game state, for example, if it is a pachinko machine, the number of game balls is limited to each round It may be configured to be able to derive a display from which information such as the time required for digestion of each round can be obtained.

Means E-20. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guiding a game ball fired by the launching means;
And a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in a game area,
At least in a state where the specific effect display is derived, a reaction mode means capable of deriving a reaction mode corresponding to a predetermined ball entering means (which can be transmitted with a sense other than vision) The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-19, which is provided separately from the effect display means.

  In order to advance the game, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and in the special game state, the game ball is efficiently put into the variable ball entry means. It is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. Therefore, although the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to has been derived, the behavior related to the (analog) part related to the progress of the game (for example, whether the game ball can be successfully entered into the start ball entry means? Etc.), there is a possibility that the eyes may be shifted there, and there is a concern that the specific effect display or the like cannot be fully enjoyed.

  In this regard, according to the means E-20, even if the specific effect display derived to the effect display means continues to be visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the entry into the predetermined entry means by the reaction mode. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball can be successfully entered into the predetermined entry means without shifting the line of sight toward the predetermined entry means, and as a result, the specific effect display is displayed. You can enjoy more.

  Conversely, in a situation where a reaction mode may occur, the reaction mode does not occur at all, and a situation in which the configuration related to a predetermined entry means must be looked at (launched in the game area) The game ball is not aimed well, the game area or the structure that launches the game ball is clogged, or there is no game ball on hand, etc. By making the game progress without noticing these, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

  Note that the reaction mode only needs to be able to be confirmed while keeping the line of sight in the specific effect display, for example, by the light emitting means capable of emitting light so as to enter the visual field of the player who visually recognizes the sound effect and the specific effect display. Examples include light emission, specific effect display, display in the vicinity thereof, change in the sense of touch of a part touched by the player, and the like. In addition, as the ball entry means, a start ball entry means in which the winning / losing lottery is performed by entering the ball, a variable that is made open so that a game ball moving in the game area can enter when a special game state occurs. Examples include ball entry means.

Means E-21. A starting entrance means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
A start ball detection means as the condition establishment detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entering means;
When the detection of the start ball detection means is performed, the success / failure lottery is performed,
An information acquisition means for acquiring success / failure related information related to the success / failure lottery when the start ball detection means is detected;
A holding storage means having a predetermined plurality of storage areas capable of storing the success / failure-related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the success / failure related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means),
The reaction mode is configured to be derived based on the detection of the start ball detection means,
The reaction mode derived based on the detection of the start ball detection means is a state in which the success / failure related information is stored in a predetermined number or more of the predetermined plurality of storage areas of the holding storage means. The game machine according to means E-20, characterized in that the mode is different between the case where the start ball detection means is detected and the other cases.

  According to the means E-21, even if a game ball is entered into the starting entry means, it is not possible to store the corresponding information on the appropriateness in the reservation storage means (the upper limit of the variable display hold has been reached). It is possible to easily avoid waste such as a game ball entering (over winning) the starting ball entering means. In other words, for example, when the specific effect display is derived in a situation where the variable display is not held, the line of sight remains in the specific effect display and the game ball is continuously fired without fear of over winning. Can be held. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a state in which several variation displays are held as much as possible, and to advance the game smoothly.

  Means E-22. The game machine according to means E-20 or E-21, wherein the reaction handling means is sound output means capable of outputting a sound effect as the reaction mode.

  According to the means E-22, the corresponding event can be grasped without moving the line of sight at all, and the specific effect display is inhibited as in the case where the effect display means derives the display corresponding to the reaction mode. Can be avoided.

  Means E-23. The reaction mode means is a tactile sensation transmission unit that is provided at a position where the player can touch and acts on a tactile sensation (changes the mode so that a change can be felt by tactile sense). The gaming machine according to any one of means E-20 to E-22, wherein the game machine is a change in the mode of tactile transmission means.

  According to the means E-23, the corresponding event can be grasped without moving the line of sight at all. Furthermore, the player can be instructed to enter the entry means without completely obstructing the specific effect display and the accompanying sound.

Means E-24. Provided at a position where the player can operate, and provided with a launch operation means for launching a game ball by the launch means based on the player's operation,
The gaming machine according to means E-23, wherein the tactile sensation transmitting means is provided in a bilaterally symmetrical position of the firing operation means or a position in the vicinity thereof in the gaming machine.

  According to the means E-24, the hand (left hand) opposite to the hand operating the firing operation means (generally, the left hand) is positioned so that it does not get tired even if it is touched for a relatively long time (can be reached without moving to the shoulder). Position). Therefore, while the specific effect display is derived, it is possible to keep touching the tactile sensation transmitting device relatively easily, and the function of the tactile sensation transmitting device can be fully utilized.

Means E-25. The right to derive the specific effect display is configured to be stockable,
The means according to any one of means E-1 to E-24, wherein a right for deriving the stocked specific effect display can be exercised in accordance with an input to a gaming machine by a player. Game machines.

  According to the means E-25, the right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked, and the enjoyment can be found in new game play such that the specific effect display is derived at his own timing. In addition, for example, when a specific effect display is derived and an urgent display such as notification of an error state is derived, the visual appearance of the specific effect display is inevitably hindered. By using a configuration that allows stocks to be stocked, the use of such stocks can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the deterioration of the visibility of the specific effect display due to some display overlapping with the specific effect display, ensuring the gameability of enjoying the specific effect display, As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences. In addition, since the effect display to be stocked is a specific effect display, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked, and various effects attached to it are derived. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player makes the game easy due to the derivation (too much) of the useless effects.

Means E-26. A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching device is guided; and
First starting entrance means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and second starting entrance means,
A first start entrance detection means as the condition establishment detection means capable of detecting a game ball entering the first start entrance means;
Second starting entrance detecting means as the condition establishment detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entering the second starting entrance means;
Variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means and second variable entry means configured to be able to change the state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter) Variable pitching means),
Whether or not to generate a special game state (first special game state) that opens the variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means) when the first start ball entry detection means performs detection. The first special game generating means as the main control means for performing the (first) winning / losing lottery and generating the special gaming state (first special gaming state) when the (first) winning / losing lottery is won. When,
A first special display means as the special display means for performing a first variation display by a first special symbol for teaching a result of the (first) success / failure lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
When the detection by the second starting entrance detection means is performed (the first winning / losing lottery), the special game state (the second variable entrance means) that opens the variable entrance means (second variable entrance means) (2) A special lottery (whether a small hit) is generated or not (second) winning lottery, and when the (second) winning lottery is won, the special gaming state (the second special gaming state) ) To generate the second special game generation means as the main control means,
Second special display means as the special display means for performing the second variation display by the second special symbol that teaches the result of the (first win / fail lottery and the second) pass / fail lottery performed by the second special game generating means. When(,
A specific entrance portion into which a game ball entering the second variable entrance means can enter;
Specific entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered in the specific entry part;
An accessory special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when detection by the specific entrance detection means is performed),
The first variation display in the first special display means and the second variation display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel,
The sub-control unit is configured to execute control based on signals from the first special game generation unit and the second special game generation unit,
The effect display means is configured to be able to derive an effect display related to the variable display of the first special display means and the second special display means,
The effect display means is configured to be able to derive a first change corresponding effect display corresponding to the change display of the first special display means and a second change corresponding effect display corresponding to the change display of the second special display means. As
In the effect display means, a first display state in which only the first variation-corresponding effect display is derived among the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display, and the second variation-corresponding effect. It is configured to be changeable to the second display state from which only the display is derived,
In the first display state, when the second variation corresponding effect display from which the specific effect display is derived is set, the second variation corresponding effect display can be derived even while the first variation corresponding effect display is derived. Composed (,
In the second display state, when the first variation corresponding effect display from which the specific effect display is derived is set, the first variation corresponding effect display can be derived even while the second variation corresponding effect display is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-25, wherein the gaming machine is configured).

  According to the means E-26, in the configuration in which the first variation display and the second variation display are performed in parallel, the opportunities for deriving the specific effect display can be increased.

Means E-27. The specific effect display is derived in one of the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display, and the other variation-corresponding effect display that overlaps with the one variation-corresponding effect display. When teaching the occurrence of a special gaming state is performed,
If the one variation response effect display ends later than the other variation response effect display, the one variation response effect display is shortened to the end timing of the other variation response effect display (forced termination). ,
When the one variation-corresponding effect display ends earlier than the other variation-corresponding effect display, the one variation-corresponding effect display is extended to the end timing of the other variation-corresponding effect display. A gaming machine according to means E-26.

  According to the means E-27, it is possible to suggest / teach that the special game state is won by utilizing the specific effect display. Therefore, it can suppress that a specific effect display replaces another effect display.

  Means E-28. The specific effect display includes an extension effect display used when extending the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display, and a shortening effect display used when shortening. A gaming machine according to means E-27, characterized in that is prepared.

  According to the means E-28, the fluctuation corresponding effect display from which the specific effect display is derived is suddenly extended or shortened while suppressing a sense of incongruity (this leads to a mode of suggesting / teaching a special game state win). It becomes possible.

  F. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  By the way, in general, diversification of production has been attempted by increasing the types of production, changing the combination of production, etc., but specific production that players are looking forward to, There is a concern that when an effect that is the centerpiece of a gaming machine is hindered by other effects or the like, the interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely viewing an effect to be visually recognized by a player. .

Means F-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display (in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player),
When it is determined that the non-permission display that is not permitted to overlap with the specific effect display and the specific effect display are overlapped, the timing for deriving the specific effect display can be changed,
In the effect display means, when the specific effect display is derived, an image of the non-specific effect display that is an effect display other than the specific effect display is generated together with the generation of the image of the specific effect display. The gaming machine is configured to display an effect display other than the specific instead of the specific effect display.

  According to the means F-1, when the specific effect display and the non-permission display overlap, the overlap can be avoided by changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display. For this reason, one or both of the specific effect display and the disapproval display are difficult to recognize due to the overlap between the specific effect display and the disapproval display (the specific effect display and the non-permission display). It is possible to avoid such a situation that permission displays are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, the viewing of the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to (or the interest is improved by having the player visually recognize) is obstructed by the derivation of the disapproval display, and the player accumulates stress. Such a situation can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

  In addition, when a specific effect display image is generated, an alternative effect display image as a non-specific effect display that can be switched from the specific effect display is also generated, so the timing of deriving the specific effect display is changed. When there is a need to do this, it is possible to smoothly switch from the specific effect display to the alternative effect display during the period when the specific effect display is supposed to be displayed. In other words, for example, after the setting of the specific effect display is performed, if it is determined to derive the non-permitted display that overlaps the specific effect display, the content of the specific effect display is changed (redoed). There is a concern that the control burden of the control means will be greatly increased, or the risk of occurrence of a predetermined defect (such as deviation) in the specific effect display will increase. Furthermore, for example, the process of deleting (generating) moving image data generated as a specific effect display and replacing it with another moving image data (specification / selection / determination / generation of a selection target) may be difficult. is there.

  In this regard, in this means F-2, when the alternative effect display is prepared in advance, the specific effect display and the disapproval display are suddenly overlapped, and the derivation timing of the specific effect display is to be changed. In addition, instead of the specific effect display, the alternative effect display can be displayed relatively smoothly and can be immediately switched from the non-display state to the display state. Thereafter, by deriving the specific effect display that has been made invisible so as not to overlap the non-permitted display, the specific effect display overlapping with the non-permitted display looks like being derived at a later timing. Therefore, the processing when the display timing of the specific effect display is suddenly changed can be performed relatively smoothly, and even if the display timing of the specific effect display is changed, the display mode in the effect display means Can proceed smoothly.

Means F-2. When the specific effect display is set, an alternative effect display of at least the same length as the non-specific effect display from the start to the end of the specific effect display can be displayed instead of the specific effect display. Settings are made,
The specific effect display is visible, the alternative effect display is invisible, and the alternative effect display is visible and the specific effect display is invisible. The gaming machine according to means F-1, which is characterized in that

  According to the means F-2, by making the non-display state, the alternative effect having a length longer than the specific effect display without causing the specific effect display to be visually recognized in the period in which the specific effect display is scheduled to be displayed visually. The display is visually recognized, and the hole of the effect display due to the absence of the specific effect display can be completely filled. Further, the specific effect display can be made completely invisible by setting the non-display state. For this reason, for example, it can be confirmed that most of the specific effect display overlaps with the disapproval display but only a part is visible, and that the specific effect display is performed, but it is not a satisfactory mode. It is possible to avoid a situation in which interest is lowered due to the fact that a part can be visually recognized. In addition, since the timing of the end of the alternative effect display can be made the same as the timing of the end of the specific effect display when the specific effect display has been performed, the specific effect display performs the subsequent progress of the effect display. It can be connected smoothly without changing the case.

  In addition, “the above-mentioned effect display that can be regarded as the specific effect display has a plurality of patterns having the same time and different aspects, and the start at which the effect display that can be regarded as the specific effect display is started can be grasped. It is good also as providing the timing grasping means. In this case, the alternative effect display can be relatively easily and accurately synchronized with the specific effect display.

Means F-3. The specific content display from which the specific effect display is derived at any timing is configured to set the effect display of the entire specific content display at the start of the specific content display,
At the start of the specific effect display and the non-permission display, an overlap determination process is performed to determine whether or not the specific effect display and the non-permission display overlap.
In the overlap determination process, when it is determined that the specific effect display and the non-permission display do not overlap, the display state is set, and it is determined that the specific effect display and the non-permission display overlap. In this case, the non-display state and the processing for setting the re-effect display that is the same specific effect display as the specific effect display that is made invisible are performed. .

  According to the means F-3, the setting of the specific effect display again in the non-display state is performed only in the non-display state. For this reason, control can be simplified compared with the case where the specific effect display is again set in advance.

Means F-4. When the re-production display is derived, the generation of the non-specific production display image is performed together with the generation of the alternative production display image,
It is configured to be able to display an effect display other than the specific instead of the re-effect display,
When the re-production display is started, in the overlap determination process, when it is determined that the re-production display and the non-permission display do not overlap, the re-production display is displayed visually, the re-production display, When it is determined that the non-permission display overlaps, the re-production display is made invisible, the non-specific production display is visibly displayed, and the re-production display that is made invisible is set again. The gaming machine according to means F-3, characterized in that:

  According to the means F-4, even if the re-effect display is duplicated with the non-permission display (even if the previous timing at which the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed is also duplicated with the non-permission display), the re-effect display is visible. The display can be postponed further, and the player can visually recognize the original specific effect display of the re-effect display without overlapping the disapproval display.

F-5. When the non-permission display determined to overlap with the specific effect display is a notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. ,
If the non-permission display determined to overlap with the specific effect display is other than the notification display, the derivation timing of the non-permission display is changed. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means F-5, since the notification display is not derived at the original timing (the notification display is delayed), the information by the notification display does not match the actual situation (for example, the information becomes old). Etc. can be avoided. In addition, if the non-permission display that overlaps the specific effect display is a display that allows the derivation timing to be shifted, the derivation timing of the non-permission display is changed. Thus, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player who has measured the derivation timing eats the shoulder watermark.

Means F-6. The right to derive the specific effect display is configured to be stockable,
The right to derive the specific effect display is stocked when it becomes impossible to display the specific effect display without overlapping the non-permission display. The gaming machine according to any one of F-5.

  According to the means F-6, the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked instead of being able to display the specific effect display without overlapping the non-permission display. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by not being derived. In addition, since the effect display to be stocked is a specific effect display, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked, and various effects attached to it are derived. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player makes the game easy due to the derivation (too much) of the useless effects.

  Means F-7. The gaming machine according to means F-6, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to exercise the right to derive the stocked specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by a player.

  According to the means F-7, it is possible to stock up the right to derive the specific effect display, and to have fun in new game play such as deriving the specific effect display at his own timing.

  G. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived with the progress of the variable display and the special game state, and there are many players who visit the game hall looking forward to seeing the specific effects.

  By the way, in general, various effects are diversified by deriving different effects in an overlapping manner or changing the combination of effects derived in a predetermined period (for example, one fluctuation display). However, if a specific performance that the player is looking forward to is disturbed by another performance or is not performed as usual, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of developing a game that respects the hobbies and preferences of the player. .

Means G-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a display related to a predetermined effect in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player,
In the effect display means, in the derivation possibility period, which is a period during which the specific effect display specified in accordance with the player's input can be displayed, the specific effect display is included among the effect displays including the specific effect display. When the non-specific effect display is selected and the non-specific effect display is derived, the image of the specific effect display is generated together with the generation of the non-specific effect display image. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the means G-1, in the derivation possibility period in which the specific effect display may be displayed, when the effect display other than the specific effect display is derived instead of the specific effect display, the image of the effect display other than the specific is displayed. Not only the generation but also the generation of the image of the specific effect display is performed. For this reason, based on the determination after the start of the derivation possibility period, the display mode visually recognized on the effect display means is switched from the non-specific effect display to the specific effect display, or the specific effect display is switched to the non-specific effect display. Can be performed relatively smoothly.

  For example, when switching the content of a video, in order to earn time for generating the switching destination video (at least the beginning part), still images (and those that are not very fine, those with poor image quality) are sandwiched or produced Even if the display means is not temporarily covered with a movable accessory, the display can be smoothly switched without deteriorating the appearance. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which image generation of a plurality of patterns of effect display proceeds simultaneously, it is possible to appropriately change which of the plurality of patterns of effect display that are reproduced at the same time. Therefore, in the derivation possibility period, the specific effect display can be displayed immediately at any time, and the opportunity for the specific effect display to be derived is increased, and the switching between the specific effect display is made smooth, Variations in derivation of the specific effect display can be increased, or switching between the specific effect display and the non-specific effect display can be performed on an ad hoc basis depending on whether or not a predetermined condition has passed after the start of the derivation possibility period. Furthermore, it is possible to derive a dramatic effect that changes in real time in relation to the specific effect display as compared to a configuration in which the content of the video is all determined at the start of the video. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

Means G-2. The effect display means includes a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image,
When both the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display image are generated in the derivation possibility period, the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display image are in different layers. The game machine according to means G-1, wherein reproduction is started at the same time.

  According to the means G-2, the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display are simultaneously started to be reproduced using a plurality of layers (for example, the effect display means is reproduced only when the specific effect display is not visible). Therefore, regarding the display of the effect display means, switching between the effect display other than the specific effect display and the specific effect display can be performed relatively easily and smoothly. Furthermore, even if the effect display other than the specific effect display and the specific effect display are suddenly switched, the degree of progress of the effect display can be adjusted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contradiction, a great sense of incongruity, etc. in the effect display. In addition, display modes such as clipping and masking that allow the specific effect display to be visually recognized in a part of the non-specific effect display, and fade-in and fade-out states that the specific effect display overlaps with the non-specific effect display appear thin Can be derived.

Means G-3. The effect display means reproduces a main layer in which a moving image is reproduced, a back main layer in which a moving image synchronized with the moving image in the main layer is reproduced, a moving image shorter than the moving image in the main layer, or a still image. And a back sublayer on which a moving image or still image synchronized with the moving image or still image of the sublayer is reproduced,
The back main layer is arranged above the main layer (player side), the sub layer is arranged above the back main layer, and the back sub layer is arranged above the sub layer. A gaming machine described in means G-2.

  According to the means G-3, it is possible to reduce the amount of images to be generated in each layer, and to reduce the burden in the case where an image having a different pattern of an image to be reproduced in a predetermined layer is reproduced in another layer. it can.

Means G-4. Providing production operation means that can be operated by the player,
The means G-1 to G-3 are configured such that the specific effect display can be derived based on an operation of the effect operation means during the derivation possibility period in which the non-specific effect display is derived. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means G-4, the function capable of switching between the specific effect display and the non-specific effect display can be sufficiently exhibited as the effect display.

Means G-5. The right to derive the specific effect display is configured to be stockable,
Any one of means G-1 to G-4 is configured such that the right to derive the stocked specific effect display can be exercised in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player. Game machines.

  According to the means G-5, it is possible to stock up the right to derive the specific effect display, and to have fun in new game play such as deriving the specific effect display at his own timing. In addition, for example, when a specific effect display is derived and an urgent display such as notification of an error state is derived, the visual appearance of the specific effect display is inevitably hindered. By using a configuration that allows stocks to be stocked, the use of such stocks can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the deterioration of the visibility of the specific effect display due to some display overlapping with the specific effect display, ensuring the gameability of enjoying the specific effect display, As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences. In addition, since the effect display to be stocked is a specific effect display, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked, and various effects attached to it are derived. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player makes the game easy due to the derivation (too much) of the useless effects.

  In addition, when the specific effect display is derived by exercising the right to derive the stocked specific effect display after the predetermined effect display in the middle of the derivation possibility period is started, Thus, in the derivation possibility period, since the specific effect display is scheduled to be reproduced (along with the non-specific effect display), the stock right of the specific effect display can be exercised smoothly. Furthermore, even after the derivation possibility period is started, the specific effect display corresponding to the derivation possibility period can be immediately derived, for example, to derive the specific effect display only with a slight delay in timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the video is interrupted or the image is disturbed because it is not possible to cope with this, or the display is switched to the specific effect display. Therefore, the function of stocking the specific effect display and exercising the stock right at the player's timing can be fully exhibited.

  Means G-6. Means G- is configured such that the right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked when the specific effect display and the specific effect display overlap (specified number of times; one to a plurality of times). 5. The gaming machine according to 5.

  According to the means G-6, it is possible to have the feeling of gaining, not the feeling that the specific effect displays overlapped and lost. Therefore, the game of enjoying the specific effect display can be further improved, and the interest can be improved.

  It should be noted that the specific effect display that is difficult to see due to the plurality of specific effect displays being derived is stocked (the right to derive the same specific effect display as the derived effect is granted) The right to derive the specific effect display may be stocked, and when using the stocked right, the specific effect display of the aspect according to the situation at that time may be derived. Good.

  Means G-7. In the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disapproval display in which the overlap with the specific effect display is not permitted are derived in an overlapping manner. In this case, the derivation timing of at least one of the specific effect display and the non-permission display is changed so that the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the non-permission display do not overlap. Or the gaming machine according to means G-5 or G-6, wherein the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked.

  According to the means G-7, by changing one derivation timing so that the specific effect display and the non-permission display do not overlap, the specific effect display can be fully enjoyed, and the overlap However, since the specific effect display is stocked, it is possible to suppress the generation of an emotion that the specific effect display and the non-permission display are duplicated and lost. Therefore, the game of enjoying the specific effect display can be further improved, and the interest can be improved.

  Means G-8. Means G-5 to G- are characterized in that, when the right to derive the stocked specific effect display is exercised, the specific effect display in a mode corresponding to the game situation at that time is set and derived. 8. The gaming machine according to any one of 7.

  According to the means G-8, it is possible to add pleasure such as how to derive the right to derive the specific effect display at this timing. Therefore, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking the specific effect display.

  Means G-9. Derivation of the specific effect display derived when the right to derive the stocked specific effect display is exercised when an operation to exercise the right to derive the stocked specific effect display is performed The right to derive the stocked special effect display when it is determined that at least a part of the period and the derivation period of the notification display that needs to be taught in real time overlap with each other. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-8, characterized by not exercising.

  According to the means G-9, the information on the notification display can be surely recognized by the player. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the notification display is overlapped with the specific effect display derived using the stock and the mode of the specific effect display is obstructed.

  Means G-10. The specific effect display is provided with a rare specific effect display which is derived only when the right to derive the stocked specific effect display is exercised or which is likely to be derived. A gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-9.

  According to the means G-10, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking the specific effect display. In addition, in the specific effect display derived by exercising stock, compared to other specific effect display, information on plus alpha (improvement related to the lottery etc. is performed, its reliability is improved, It may be configured such that the performance is simply improved).

  Means G-11. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-10, characterized in that a stock high-accuracy state in which the specific effect display is easily stocked is provided.

  According to the means G-11, it is possible to diversify the game play utilizing the configuration of stocking the right to derive the specific effect display.

  It should be noted that the stocked specific effect display may not be derived with a probability of 100% but may be derived when winning in a predetermined lottery. For example, when an input for exercising the right is performed, guidance for prompting the operation of the specific effect button 127 is derived, and a lottery is performed based on the operation of the specific effect button 127 (the winning probability may not be constant). Also, the winning probability may be determined at the time of stocking (in accordance with the type of the specific effect display stocked, the game situation at the time of stocking, etc.), or may be determined at the time of lottery.

  Means G-12. Means G-5 to G-11 are configured to be able to derive a specific effect stock display indicating that the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked (holds the right). A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means G-12, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user does not notice the function that the specific effect display is stocked or does not notice that the specific effect display is stocked.

  It should be noted that “in the specific effect stock display, it is possible to teach or suggest the result of the success / failure lottery (the expected degree of winning in the special gaming state)”. In this case, while enhancing the value of the specific effect stock display and visually recognizing the aspect of the specific effect stock display, if the stock of the specific effect display is used at this timing, an unusual specific effect display is derived or ends successfully. It is possible to grasp that there is a high possibility that the specific effect display is derived.

  Means G-13. When the right to derive the specified effect display for the specified number of times is stocked, the specified effect stock display itself indicating the state in which the right to derive the specified effect display for the specified number of times is stocked The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-12, wherein the gaming machine is derived as a special stock display corresponding to the specific effect display.

  According to the means G-13, the specific effect display can be stocked and the enjoyment can be found in the special stock display mode, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

  Means G-14. In a state where the special stock display is derived, when the opportunity to stock the right to derive the specific effect display comes, the special stock display changes to a corresponding mode (for example, a character as a special stock display Performs a predetermined action). A gaming machine according to means G-13.

  According to the means G-14, even after the special stock display is derived, it is possible to ensure pleasure that the specific effect display is stocked (to the opportunity to come).

  Means G-15. In a state in which the right to derive the specific effect display for a specified number of times is stocked, the right to derive the stocked specific effect display can be exercised without any input from the player to the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-14.

  According to the means G-15, for example, the stock of the specific effect display is automatically exercised at an appropriate place corresponding to the consumption of the stock (corresponding to the variable display with a high expectation of occurrence of the special gaming state). By doing so, avoid the situation where the right to derive the specific effect display is only stocked, the right is not exercised, and the stock function for enjoying the specific effect display is not utilized well. Can do. In particular, the means G-13 is configured to be automatically consumed because it is expected that the stock will not be consumed because the special stock display disappears when the stock is consumed. In this way, the player can consume the stock without hesitation, and the special stock display can be kept displayed for a long time, so that the situation where the appreciation is lost can be suppressed and the value of the special stock display can be increased. Can do.

  Means G-16. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-15, wherein the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked based on the fact that the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period.

  According to the means G-16, it is possible to suppress a situation in which although the user is looking forward to the specific effect display and is not derived too much, the interest is lowered.

  The specified period is defined as one change (one game) from the start to the end of the change display that teaches the result of the lottery determination for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. For example, when a (predetermined) special game state is performed a specified number of times.

  In addition, there is provided a specific effect point storage means in which points are added or subtracted because the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period, and the points stored in the specific effect point storage means are greater than or less than a specified point In such a case, the right to derive the specific effect display may be given. In addition, a configuration in which the point is returned to the initial value when the specific effect display is derived (the derivation is set) (the more the point usage amount, the more the specific effect display of the rare pattern or the dedicated pattern is derived) Or may be configured so that points are reduced by the amount used.

Means G-17. An information acquisition means for acquiring success / failure related information related to the success / failure lottery when the condition establishment detection means is detected;
A holding storage unit having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the success / failure related information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the success / failure related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means,
In the stage before the change display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined success / failure related information stored in the hold storage means is performed, the aspect of the hold display corresponding to the predetermined success / failure related information is: Any one of means G-5 to G-16, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive a hold-ahead look-ahead effect that is a specific aspect that suggests the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the hold display. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means G-17, the use of the stock, such as exercising the right to derive the stocked specific effect display in a situation where the expectation for the occurrence of the special gaming state can be expected by the reserved pre-reading effect, etc. Convenience and the like can be improved.

Means G-18. Corresponding to the predetermined hold display displayed by the hold display means, a derivation preparation teaching means (for example, a derivation preparation state in the hold display means) indicating that the prefetch hold effect can be derived. With the ability to derive a derivation readiness indicator to show that
In the derivation preparation state, when the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked, the hold display is changed to the specific effect display by exercising the right to derive the stocked specific effect display. The gaming machine according to means G-17, wherein the reserved pre-reading effect that can be set to the specific mode is derived.

  For example, the player may not want to exercise the right to derive the specific effect display that is stocked unless the situation is such that there is an expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state due to the presence of a pre-reading effect. However, there is a concern that the use of stock will be suppressed by holding pre-reading effects. In this regard, according to the means G-18, if the stock of the specific effect display is used, it is possible to derive the hold pre-reading effect having the hold display as the specific mode, and at the same time, it is possible to enjoy the specific effect display. . Therefore, the use value and the range of use of the stock of the specific effect display can be expanded, and the function of stocking the specific effect display can be used more effectively. In addition, you may comprise so that a reservation prefetching effect may be derived | led-out without going through a derivation | leading-out preparation state.

  H. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  By the way, in recent years, the display on the display means of the gaming machine can be performed by performing a mobile linked game in which information can be exchanged between the gaming machine and the server via a portable communication terminal, which can adjust brightness, volume, etc. There is an increasing number that can change the aspect and the like according to the player's preference. As a result, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the elements that make it uncomfortable, and to increase the attachment to the gaming machine, and as a result, the repeat rate to the gaming machine is improved.

  However, there are still cases where people get bored relatively early. For this reason, there is a need to further strengthen elements that further increase the interest in gaming machines so that the player wants to play again for the longest possible time.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent getting bored at an early stage.

Means H-1. A parts mounting part that allows the detachable dedicated parts (by the player)
A game machine, comprising: a mode changing means for changing the mode of the dedicated part attached to the part mounting portion.

  According to the means H-1, the external appearance of the gaming machine can be changed by attaching the dedicated parts to the parts attaching portion. Therefore, for example, when the player himself brings in a special part or rents a special part in the game hall, the gaming machine is a part of the environment where the game is played in the sense of coordinating his room. The appearance of can be made to the player's preference, and the game can be played with good mood. Further, even when dedicated parts are attached in advance in the game hall, the appearance of the gaming machine can be individually changed. In addition, because the configuration of the dedicated parts attached to the part mounting part is configured to be changeable, the dedicated parts do not become mere figurines, but can be used as part of the production, etc. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of attaching special parts to the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is possible to attach to the gaming machine a thing that protrudes ahead of the gaming machine that is difficult to attach as the gaming machine itself, and to improve design and the like.

  As a result, by attaching special parts selected by the player to the gaming machine and adapting the appearance to their own hobbies and preferences, it is possible to increase the interest and attachment to the gaming machine more actively. It is possible to suppress getting bored at an early stage and to improve the repeat rate to the gaming machine.

  In addition, as an aspect change of the exclusive part by the aspect changing means, the exclusive part may be configured to be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the part mounting portion. In the case of an exclusive part having translucency, A change in form due to changes in lighting on / off, brightness, emission color, or the like may occur, and in the case of a deformable dedicated part, a configuration may be adopted in which a change occurs in the outer shape. Moreover, you may comprise so that a player can change suitably the attachment position and attachment direction of exclusive parts.

  Means H-2. The game according to means H-1, further comprising attachment detection means capable of distinguishing between a state in which the dedicated part is attached to the part attaching portion and a state in which the exclusive part is not attached. Machine.

  According to the means H-2, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the processing for changing the mode of the dedicated part and the driving operation are executed even though the dedicated part is not attached to the part attaching part. it can. Therefore, simplification of control, power saving, suppression of deterioration due to use, and the like can be achieved.

  In addition, for example, when a dedicated part is prepared by the game hall and rented to the player, an announcement etc. requesting the return of the dedicated part in the gaming machine is made by making the dedicated part removed from the attached state It can be derived or configured so that the corresponding signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, so that the person related to the game hall can grasp that the dedicated part has been removed, and the dedicated part is the player Can be taken away without permission.

  Furthermore, for example, when the player prepares a dedicated part, when the player performs an operation to end the game (for example, when an operation to return a game value storage medium capable of storing the game value is performed, When a game machine's digitized and stored game value is paid out as the actual game value, etc., it will be alerted not to forget the special parts. Display and sound to teach).

  The attachment detection means may include a plurality of sensors or switches capable of detecting a predetermined part of the dedicated part at a position where the player cannot see or touch it. Furthermore, the attachment detection means may include part reading means capable of reading RFID (Radio frequency identification) information such as an IC tag as part information means provided in the dedicated part. That is, it is possible to suppress a situation in which something is attached to something other than removing the dedicated part from the part attaching portion so as not to be understood.

Means H-3. The gaming machine according to means H-2, wherein an attachment reaction mode corresponding to the attachment of the dedicated part to the part attachment portion is derived based on detection by the attachment detection means.
According to the means H-3, it is easy for the player to recognize that the dedicated part has been accurately attached to the part attaching portion, and for example, as an attachment reaction mode, an attachment reaction effect of greeting to the store or enthusiasm for the game. When the game is performed, it is possible to excite the start of the game and further increase the interest in attaching the dedicated parts.

Means H-4. The aspect changing means includes
When the first dedicated part is attached to the part mounting part, the aspect of the first dedicated part is changed to the aspect corresponding to the first dedicated part,
When a second special part different from the first special part is attached to the part attachment part, the second special part differs from the first special part in the aspect of the second special part. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be changeable in a mode according to the above.

  According to the means H-4, a different function can be given for each type of the dedicated part, and the interest by attaching the dedicated part to the gaming machine can be further improved. It should be noted that the first dedicated part and the second dedicated part can be attached to the same part mounting part, and a means for enabling the part mounting part to be identified as the first dedicated part or the second dedicated part is provided. You may comprise, and you may comprise so that the 1st parts attachment part which can attach only a 1st exclusive part and the 2nd parts attachment part which can attach only a 2nd exclusive part may be provided.

  Means H-5. Means H-1 to H-1 to H-1 to H-2, wherein a part reaction part whose aspect changes based on the attachment of the dedicated part to the part attachment part is provided at a position different from the part attachment part. The gaming machine according to any one of H-4.

  According to the means H-5, the aspect of the part reaction part can be changed to the corresponding aspect simply by attaching the dedicated part. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest in attaching the dedicated parts. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether the dedicated parts are properly attached.

  Means H-6. The part mounting portion is provided with a part reading unit capable of reading information of a part information unit provided in the dedicated part, and configured to execute a process based on the information read by the part reading unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the means H-1 to H-5, which is characterized by, for example, turning on a process of changing a mode of a dedicated part attached to the part attaching portion.

  According to the means H-6, just by attaching the dedicated part, the type of the dedicated part attached to the part attaching portion is discriminated, and the dedicated part (further, the attachment reaction mode of the means H-3 is performed). And the like, and the aspect of the above-mentioned means H-5) can be changed to a corresponding aspect. Therefore, the convenience can be improved and the interest in attaching the dedicated parts can be further increased.

Means H-7. (Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the special game state is generated when the winner is selected. Main control means to
Special display means that is controlled by the main control means and displays a variation display of identification information that teaches the result of the success / failure lottery;
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means and includes an effect display means that can derive an effect display related to the variable display of the special display means,
The sub-control unit is configured to be able to derive a display corresponding to the attachment of the dedicated part in the effect display unit when the dedicated part is mounted to the part mounting portion. A gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-6.

  According to the means H-7, for example, when a dedicated part is attached, the character displayed on the effect display means changes to another mode, and the corresponding change is also brought about at the core of the effect. In this way, you can raise your interest in attaching special parts. As a result, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the production in which the production display means and the dedicated parts are linked. The effect display means of this means corresponds to a means for deriving the attachment reaction mode of the means H-3 and a parts reaction part of the means H-5.

Means H-8. The sub control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player,
In the state where the dedicated part is mounted on the part mounting portion, the aspect of the specific effect display is derived as a mode different from the state where the dedicated part is not mounted. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means H-8, by attaching the dedicated parts, the aspect of the specific effect display specified by the player can be changed. Therefore, the derivation of the specific effect display and the interest in the dedicated parts can be further enhanced. Note that attaching the dedicated part to the parts attaching portion may be an input operation to the gaming machine by the player for specifying the specific effect display. In this case, it is possible to save the labor of the input operation for specifying the specific effect display, and to increase the mood of the game to the gaming machine that changes to the corresponding mode by attaching the dedicated part.

Means H-9. A locking means for locking the exclusive parts attached to the parts mounting portion so that they cannot be removed;
The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-8, further comprising: a lock release means capable of releasing a locked state by the lock means.

  According to the means H-9, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the dedicated parts are both removed and carried in order to prevent the dedicated parts from being stolen for short periods of time such as going to the toilet or buying beverages. In addition, due to the theft countermeasures, it is possible to wear the ones prepared in the game hall, and the convenience can be improved.

Means H-10. (Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the special game state is generated when the winner is selected. Main control means to
Special display means that is controlled by the main control means and displays a variation display of identification information that teaches the result of the success / failure lottery;
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means and includes an effect display means that can derive an effect display related to the variable display of the special display means,
The sub control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player,
At least in the state where the specific effect display is derived, it is possible to execute the aspect change of the dedicated part based on the displacement of the part mounting portion as a substitute for the specific effect other than the specific effect display or the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-9, characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the means H-10, in the state where the specific effect display is derived, the specific effect display can be enjoyed, and information other than the specific effect display can be obtained through the parts mounting portion and the dedicated parts. It can be configured such that it is obtained by all tactile senses. Therefore, while suppressing the situation where a specific effect display is obstructed by other effects, notifications, etc., the information of the eyelids obtained by the other effects and notifications is also obtained while keeping the line of sight in the specific effect display. be able to. It should be noted that “at least in the state where the specific effect display is derived, the reaction mode corresponding to the entry to the predetermined entry means is derived in the form of the displacement of the part mounting portion” Good.

  Means H-11. In the effect display means, an overlap between the derivation period of the specific effect display and the specific effect display is not permitted (reduces the visibility of at least a part of the visual aspect of the specific effect display or When it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the non-permission display is derived in an overlapping manner, the aspect changing means is the aspect of the dedicated part attached to the part attachment portion The game machine according to means H-10, wherein an effect of changing the game is executed.

  According to the means H-11, when the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to seeing overlaps with the obstruction effect display, the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced instead of the special effect display. The aspect changes. For this reason, the fall of the interest by the visual recognition of specific production | presentation display being prevented can be suppressed.

  Means H-12. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-11, wherein at least a part of the parts mounting portion is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the gaming machine main body.

  According to the means H-12, it is possible to operate the dedicated part attached to the part attaching portion, and it is possible to improve performance. In addition, when the player can touch the dedicated parts attached to the parts mounting part, it is possible to produce and suggest using changes such as the feel, improving the performance and gameplay more. More can be achieved.

Means H-13. The parts mounting portion includes a first component that projects forward from the front surface of the gaming machine, and a second component.
The first component is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the second component,
The gaming machine according to means H-12, wherein the dedicated part has an elastic bag shape and is provided so as to cover the first component and the second component.

  According to the means H-13, the dedicated part attached to the part attachment part is deformed (the outer shape is changed) according to the displacement of the deformation part of the part attachment part. Accordingly, an unprecedented movable accessory for production will be provided, and the interest in the dedicated parts, and thus the gaming machine can be further enhanced. In particular, when the parts mounting portion is provided at a position where the player can always contact, and the deformation portion is displaced according to the performance, it is possible to perform an effect utilizing the tactile transmission, and this effect is It will be played more prominently.

  For pachinko machines, it is not always necessary to move to the shoulder with the hand (left hand) opposite to the hand (right hand) that operates the firing operation means (launching handle) that is operated when launching the game ball. ) In the position that can be touched (gripped) (symmetrical position of the launching handle), it is possible to change the mode acting on the tactile sense (the mode can be changed so that the change can be felt by tactile sense). It is good also as being done. Examples of the material for the dedicated parts include rubber, thermoplastic elastomer (olefin elastomer), sponge rubber, and synthetic sponge.

  Means H-14. The game machine according to means H-13, wherein the second component part is configured to be capable of relative displacement with respect to the front surface of the game machine together with the first component part and the dedicated part.

  According to the means H-14, it is possible to widen the range of effects produced by the part mounting portion and the dedicated parts, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

  Means H-15. The gaming machine according to means H-13 or H-14, wherein the part mounting portion is configured to be able to change a tension applied to the dedicated part.

  According to the means H-15, it is possible to provide a novel effect that the feel (hardness, tension) of the dedicated parts changes.

Means H-16. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guiding a game ball fired by the launching means;
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in a game area;
A launch operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and a launch ball is launched by the launch means based on an operation of the player;
The gaming machine according to any one of means H-11 to H-15, wherein the parts mounting portion is provided in a bilaterally symmetrical position of the firing operation means or a position in the vicinity thereof in the gaming machine. .

  According to the means H-16, a position (a left hand) opposite to a hand (generally a right hand) that operates the firing operation means, a position that does not get tired even if touched for a relatively long time (can be reached without moving to the shoulder) Position). Therefore, while the specific effect display is derived, it is possible to keep touching the dedicated part attached to the part mounting part relatively easily, and the function of the dedicated part can be fully utilized.

Means H-17. Provided with input operation means that the player can input,
In the effect display means, in an arrangement in which an effect that the input by the input operation means is successful and the effect is derived if the input is not correct is derived,
When it is determined that the production will be successful when input by the input operation means is performed,
Means H-1 is characterized in that, in a state where the operation of the input operation means is enabled, it is possible to execute an effect that teaches the correct input of the input operation means by the operation of the part mounting portion. Thru | or the game machine in any one of H-16.

  According to the means H-17, in a state where input by the input operation means is possible (a state where he / she is wondering what kind of input is to be made), the player is surprised and delighted by teaching the input guidelines. And, while expecting that the result of the input will be taught, it is possible to obtain an exhilarating feeling during that time. As a result, it is possible to derive an effect that can improve interest.

  Means H-18. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-17, further comprising a pressure sensor capable of detecting that pressure is applied to the part mounting portion.

  According to the means H-18, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a warning sound is emitted when the force is applied to the part mounting part and the part mounting part is destroyed. The pressure gauge and pressure storage means for storing the measurement value of the pressure gauge are provided, and when a predetermined effect is performed based on the value stored in the pressure storage means, or when the parts mounting portion is damaged, the It can be used as a material for determining the cause.

  Means H-19. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-18, wherein the part mounting portion is configured such that a contact portion with the dedicated part can be replaced.

  According to the means H-19, it is possible to independently replace parts that are relatively easily damaged or deteriorated, such as wear when attaching / detaching or using a dedicated part, thereby improving convenience when replacing parts. Can be planned. For example, the engaged part of the part mounting part that engages with the engaging part of the dedicated part is configured in the shape of a hole, and parts can be attached by performing a mischief such as a malicious player filling a foreign object in the engaging part It is possible to avoid a situation in which the part becomes unusable or the work up to reuse (for example, removal of the filling) becomes difficult.

  In addition, in order to suppress mischievous acts on the part mounting part, when a part other than the dedicated part is attached to the part mounting part based on the information grasped by the mounting detection means described in the means H-2. The corresponding information may be output to the outside of the gaming machine or the corresponding mode may be derived in the gaming machine.

  Means H-20. The means H-1 to H are characterized in that the parts mounting portion is configured to be changeable between an accommodation state in which contact from outside is prohibited and an exposed state in which contact from outside is possible. The gaming machine according to any one of -19.

  According to the means H-20, mischief to the part mounting part can be suppressed.

  Means H-21. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-20, comprising line-of-sight input means for enabling input based on the movement of the player's eyes.

  According to the means H-21, it is possible to perform a predetermined input based on the player's will even in a state where both hands of the player are buried. Therefore, the range of things that can be done in production is widened, and improvement in production performance can be achieved.

  A light projecting unit capable of irradiating light (infrared rays) toward a player located in front, a light receiving unit that detects light emitted from the light projecting unit and reflected by the player's eyeball, and the light receiving unit On the basis of the detected information, it is possible to provide a line-of-sight detection means comprising an analysis means for analyzing the position and line-of-sight angle of the player's eyes. In other words, it is possible for the gaming machine to determine where the player is looking, that is, what information the player is trying to obtain, or what operation the player is trying to perform. it can. For this reason, for example, even if the player does not move his / her hand, it is possible to detect the player's line of sight and execute corresponding processing. As a result, a relatively large amount of information can be provided to the player while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

  In addition, by configuring the game menu operation etc. without moving the hand at all, for example, it has a dedicated part attached to the part mounting part, a drink, a portable communication terminal, etc. It is possible to make a quick selection in a state, or to make a selection in a situation where you do not want to use your hand as much as possible, such as hurting your hand. Therefore, even in situations where the use of hands is refrained, the same operability can be realized, and the convenience can be improved. Furthermore, even a player who feels embarrassed with a predetermined selection / determination act can make a selection / determination secretly and without much effort. Therefore, even a shy or troubled player can fully enjoy the game.

  I. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived with the progress of the variable display and the special game state, and there are many players who visit the game hall looking forward to seeing the specific effects.

  By the way, in general, various effects are diversified by deriving different effects in an overlapping manner or changing the combination of effects derived in a predetermined period (for example, one fluctuation display). However, there is a demand for more enjoyment of specific effects that we are looking forward to (for example, effects that are the main feature of gaming machines or effects where specific characters appear) among various effects. .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of developing a game that respects the hobbies and preferences of the player. .

Means 1-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display,
A first effect display that can select the specific effect display is provided as one of the effect displays derived within the period,
With respect to the first effect display, a forcible setting process is set so as to be executable so as to be derived in such a manner that the entire predetermined effect display is derived within the period of the first effect display. Gaming machine.

  According to the means I-1, it is possible to surely increase the chances of deriving the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to or the effect of the gaming machine. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the production is diversified and many production patterns are provided, the specific production display can be more fully enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that respects the player's hobbies and preferences.

Means I-2. A pattern determination process for determining an effect display pattern derived within the period of the first effect display at the start of the first effect display;
Resetting to determine whether or not the specific effect display is set as the effect display derived at the timing when the entire effect display is within the period of the first effect display among the effect displays determined in the pattern determination process The gaming machine according to means 1-1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute unnecessary determination processing.

  According to the means I-2, it is possible to simplify the processing. In addition, the original first effect display flow can be maintained as much as possible.

  Means I-3. The effect display set in the pattern determination process and then replaced with the specific effect display in the forced setting process is shifted in order so as to be derived after the specific effect display. A gaming machine according to I-2.

  According to the means I-3, the flow of the original first effect display can be maintained as much as possible. In addition, avoid the situation that the interest is lowered when the favorite effect can be omitted by replacing it with the specific effect display, although it cannot be set as the specific effect display. Can do.

Means I-4. It has specific operation means that can be operated by the player,
When the predetermined effect display is derived in the effect display means, a predetermined operation input of the specific operation means is performed, whereby the predetermined effect display derived in the effect display means is displayed as the specific effect display. Configured to be identifiable as a display,
In the forced setting process, it is determined whether or not the specific effect display has been set. If the determination is affirmative, the forced setting process is executed. If the determination is negative, the forced setting process is skipped. A gaming machine according to the means I-1 or I-2.

  According to the means I-4, an effect display that the player likes can be specified as the specific effect display. Therefore, it becomes possible to respond to more detailed needs, and the satisfaction with the game can be improved. In addition, the forced setting process can be performed reliably.

Means I-5. An information acquisition means for acquiring success / failure related information related to the success / failure lottery when the condition establishment detection means is detected;
A holding storage unit having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the success / failure related information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the success / failure related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means,
The predetermined success / failure-related information corresponds to the special gaming state at a stage prior to execution of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined success / failure-related information stored in the holding storage means. A pre-reading process for determining whether or not there is,
The special gaming state is configured as the first effect display,
In the special gaming state, when the predetermined success / failure related information stored in the holding storage means corresponds to the special gaming state, a setting for prohibiting the derivation of the specific effect display is configured to be executable. A gaming machine according to any one of means I-1 to I-4.

  According to the means I-5, since the specific effect display that was supposed to be derived has not been derived, it is possible to give a feeling of joy on the contrary. In other words, it is possible to create an interesting situation where the user is happy whether or not the specific effect display is derived, and the interest can be improved.

Means I-6. The specific effect display was not derived in the special gaming state because the predetermined success / failure related information stored in the holding storage means in the special gaming state corresponds to the special gaming state. in case of,
An effect display derived in the reserved continuous special game state when the reserved continuous special game state corresponding to the success / failure related information stored in the hold storage means in the special game state is executed. Means for increasing the selection ratio of the specific effect display, or deriving the specific effect display that is not derived or is difficult to derive except in the reserved continuous special gaming state. A gaming machine according to I-5.

  According to the means I-6, the specific effect display can be greatly enjoyed in the current special game state as much as the specific effect display is not derived in the immediately preceding special game state.

  Means I-7. In the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disapproval display in which the overlap with the specific effect display is not permitted are derived in an overlapping manner. In this case, the derivation timing of at least one of the specific effect display and the non-permission display can be changed so that the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the non-permission display do not overlap. A gaming machine according to any one of means I-1 to I-6.

  According to the means I-7, the specific effect display can be more thoroughly enjoyed.

  In addition, it is also possible to carry out by appropriately combining each technical matter described in each means A, means B, means C, means D, means E, means F, means G, means H, and means I ( It is also possible to combine a part of each means).

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (particularly, a slot machine specification ball-type turning gaming machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). The game value is provided on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper plate or the like) is further provided, taking-in means for taking the game ball from the ball receiving tray, and the ball receiving tray Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 32a ... First variable winning device, 32b ... Second variable winning device, 33a ... First starting winning device, 33b ... Second starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decoration pattern Display device, 43a ... first special display device, 43b ... second special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub control device.

Claims (5)

Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player can be performed is determined whether or not to generate a special game state. Main control means for generating a special gaming state;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on information from the main control means;
Production display means controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means,
In the effect display means, in the gaming machine in which the effect change display is performed corresponding to the change display of the identification information of the special display means, and the effect display during the special game state is performed corresponding to the special game state,
A special teaching related display related to a predetermined effect display derived from the effect variation display of the effect display means performed in response to the variation display of the special display means that taught the occurrence of the special gaming state is the special display A gaming machine derived from at least one of a timing for notifying the start of the special gaming state and a timing for starting the special gaming in the effect display during the gaming state. The special teaching related display includes a first special teaching related display performed at the timing of the start of the special game and a second special teaching related display performed after the first special teaching related display,
The effect display during the special game state is connected to a regular effect display having a constant length from the start to the end, the first effect display that is performed from the start to the end of the period in which the special game is performed, There is a second effect display that is performed in one period of the period during which the special game is performed and the length from the start to the end is variable,
The first special teaching related display is the second effect display,
The second special teaching related display is the regular effect display,
At the start of the second special teaching related display, it is determined whether or not the second special teaching related display and the first special teaching related display overlap, and it is determined that there is no overlap in the determination. In the case where the second special teaching related display is started and it is determined that the second special teaching related display overlaps, the start of the second special teaching related display is postponed, and instead of the second special teaching related display 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein another periodical effect display is started. The sub control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to a gaming machine by a player,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the special game state effect display, the specific effect display and the special teaching related display are set so as not to overlap each other.   4. The derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed when the specific effect display and the special teaching related display overlap when setting the effect display during the special gaming state. The gaming machine described. The number of times of the specific effect display derived in the effect display during the special gaming state is determined,
When the special display related to the special instruction is set as the special teaching related display when the special display related to the special teaching is displayed, the special display related to the special teaching is displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein a display is included in the number of times of the specific effect display, and the setting of the specific effect display is performed.

Images